Class Series Programmer`s Manual
Class Series
Programmer’s Manual
Datamax Corporate Headquarters
4501 Parkway Commerce Boulevard
Orlando, Florida USA 32808
Phone (407) 578-8007
Fax (407) 578-8377
[email protected]
Datamax International
Phone +44 1279 772200
[email protected]
Datamax Latin America
Phone (407) 523-5520
[email protected]
Datamax Asia Pacific
Phone +65-6542-2611
[email protected]
Datamax China
Phone +86-21-64952882
[email protected]
CG Times (based upon Times New Roman), CG Triumvirate, MicroType, and TrueType are trademarks
of the AGFA Monotype Corporation.
PCL, Intellifont, and HP Laser JetII are trademarks of the Hewlett Packard Corporation.
Macintosh is a trademark of the Apple Corporation.
Windows is a trademark of the Microsoft Corporation.
All other brand and product names are trademarks, service marks, registered trademarks, or registered
service marks of their respective companies.
Information in this manual is subject to change without notice and does not represent a commitment on
the part of Datamax Corporation. No part of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or
by any means, for any purpose other than the purchaser’s personal use, without the expressed written
permission of Datamax Corporation.
© 2007 by Datamax Corporation
Part Number: 88-2316-01
Revision H
Contents
Overview ........................................................................................................................ 1
Who Should Use This Manual .............................................................................. 1
The Scope of this Manual ..................................................................................... 1
General Conventions............................................................................................ 3
Computer Entry and Display Conventions ............................................................ 3
Typical Dataflow Sequence .................................................................................. 4
Control Code Command Functions ............................................................................. 7
Introduction........................................................................................................... 7
Attention-Getters .................................................................................................. 7
Immediate Command Functions .................................................................................. 9
Introduction........................................................................................................... 9
SOH #
Reset............................................................................................... 9
SOH *
Reset (Display-Equipped Models only) .......................................... 9
SOH A
Send ASCII Status String.............................................................. 10
SOH a
Send ASCII Extended Status String.............................................. 10
SOH B
Toggle Pause ................................................................................ 11
SOH C
Stop/Cancel .................................................................................. 12
SOH D
SOH Shutdown (Non-Display Models only) ................................. 12
SOH E
Send Batch Remaining Quantity ................................................... 13
SOH e
Send Batch Printed Quantity ......................................................... 13
SOH F
Send Status Byte .......................................................................... 13
i
System-Level Command Functions........................................................................... 15
Introduction......................................................................................................... 15
STX A
Set Time and Date ........................................................................ 15
STX a
Enable Feedback Characters........................................................ 16
STX B
Get Printer Time and Date Information ......................................... 16
STX c
Set Continuous Paper Length ....................................................... 17
STX d
Set Double Buffer Mode (Non-Display Models only) .................... 17
STX E
Set Quantity For Stored Label....................................................... 18
STX e
Select Edge Sensor ...................................................................... 18
STX F
Form Feed .................................................................................... 18
STX f
Set Form Stop Position (Backfeed) ............................................... 19
STX G
Print Last Label Format................................................................. 19
STX I
Input Image Data........................................................................... 20
STX i
Scalable Font Downloading .......................................................... 21
STX J
Set Pause for Each Label ............................................................. 21
STX K
Extended System-Level Commands ............................................. 21
STX k
Test RS-232 Port .......................................................................... 22
STX L
Enter Label Formatting Command Mode ...................................... 22
STX M
Set Maximum Label Length .......................................................... 22
STX m
Set Printer to Metric Mode ............................................................ 22
STX n
Set Printer to Imperial Mode ......................................................... 23
STX O
Set Start of Print Position .............................................................. 23
STX o
Cycle Cutter .................................................................................. 24
ii
STX P
Set Hex Dump Mode..................................................................... 24
STX p
Controlled Pause........................................................................... 24
STX Q
Clear All Modules .......................................................................... 24
STX q
Clear Module................................................................................. 25
STX R
Ribbon Saver On/Off..................................................................... 25
STX r
Select Reflective Sensor ............................................................... 26
STX S
Set Feed Speed ............................................................................ 26
STX s
Set Single Buffer Mode (Non-Display Models only) ..................... 26
STX T
Print Quality Label......................................................................... 27
STX t
Test DRAM Memory Module ......................................................... 27
STX U
Label Format String Replacement Field........................................ 28
STX V
Software Switch Settings .............................................................. 29
STX v
Request Firmware Version............................................................ 30
STX W
Request Memory Module Information ........................................... 31
STX w
Test Flash Memory Module........................................................... 32
STX X
Set Default Module........................................................................ 32
STX x
Delete File from Module ................................................................ 33
STX Y
Output Sensor Values ................................................................... 34
STX y
Select Font Symbol Set................................................................. 34
STX Z
Print Configuration Label............................................................... 35
STX z
Pack Module ................................................................................. 35
iii
Extended System-Level Command Functions ......................................................... 37
Introduction......................................................................................................... 37
STX K
Memory Configuration (Non-Display Models only) ........................ 37
STX K}E
Empty Sensor Calibration (Non-Display Models only)................... 38
STX K}M
Manual Media Calibration (Non-Display Models only)................... 38
STX K}Q
Quick Media Calibration (Non-Display Models only) ..................... 39
STX KaR
Read Data from RFID Tag ............................................................ 39
STX KaW
Write Data to RFID Tag (Direct Mode – Generic Read/Write
Interface)....................................................................................... 40
STX Kb
Backfeed Time Delay .................................................................... 40
STX KC
Get Configuration .......................................................................... 41
STX Kc
Configuration Set .......................................................................... 42
STX KD
Database Configuration (Non-Display Models only)...................... 90
STX Kd
Set File as Factory Default ............................................................ 91
STX KE
Character Encoding ...................................................................... 91
STX KF
Select Factory Defaults (Display-Equipped and EX2 only) .......... 93
STX Kf
Set Present Distance .................................................................... 93
STX KJ
Assign Communication Port (MCL Command) ............................ 94
STX KI
GPIO Input .................................................................................... 94
STX Kn
NIC Reset ..................................................................................... 95
STX KO
GPIO Output ................................................................................. 95
STX Kp
Module Protection ......................................................................... 96
STX KQ
Query Memory Configuration ........................................................ 97
iv
STX Kq
Query Memory Configuration (Display-Equipped Models only)..... 99
STX KR
Reset Memory Configuration ........................................................ 99
STX Kr
Resettable Counter Reset........................................................... 100
STX KS
Memory Configuration, Scalable Font Cache.............................. 100
STX KtA
Write Application Family Identifier (AFI) to Tag (Direct Mode – HF
[13.56 MHz] ISO15693 Tag Interface) ........................................ 100
STX KtD
Write Data Storage Format Identifier (DSFID) to Tag (Direct Mode
– HF [13.56 MHz] ISO15693 Tag Interface)................................ 101
STX KtE
Write Electronic Article Surveillance (EAS) Bit ............................ 101
STX KtH
Read and Feedback Tag Information to Host ............................. 102
STX KtR
Read Data from RFID Tag .......................................................... 102
STX KtU
Read Unique Serial Number from RFID Tag............................... 103
STX KtW
Write Data to RFID Tag............................................................... 104
STX KuB
Read Data from Gen2 Tag Section ............................................. 105
STX KuF
Send RFID Device Firmware Version ......................................... 105
STX KuJ
Write Data to Gen 2 Tag Section ................................................ 105
STX KuR
Read Data from RFID Tag .......................................................... 106
STX KuW
Write Data to RFID Tag............................................................... 107
STX KV
Verifier Enable/Disable................................................................ 107
STX KW
Memory Configuration, Printable Label Width ............................. 107
STX Kx
Delete Configuration File............................................................. 108
STX KZ
Immediately Set Parameter......................................................... 108
v
Label Formatting Command Functions................................................................... 109
Introduction....................................................................................................... 109
:
Set Cut By Amount...................................................................... 109
A
Set Format Attribute .................................................................... 110
B
Bar Code Magnification............................................................... 111
C
Set Column Offset Amount ......................................................... 111
c
Set Cut By Amount...................................................................... 112
D
Set Dot Size Width and Height.................................................... 112
E
Terminate Label Formatting Mode and Print Label ..................... 113
e
Recall Printer Configuration ........................................................ 113
F
Advanced Format Attributes........................................................ 113
f
Set Present Speed ...................................................................... 114
G
Place Data in Global Register ..................................................... 114
H
Enter Heat Setting....................................................................... 115
J
Justification ................................................................................. 115
M
Select Mirror Mode...................................................................... 116
m
Set Metric Mode .......................................................................... 116
n
Set Inch (Imperial) Mode............................................................. 116
P
Set Print Speed ........................................................................... 117
p
Set Backfeed Speed ................................................................... 117
Q
Set Quantity of Labels to Print .................................................... 118
R
Set Row Offset Amount............................................................... 118
r
Recall Stored Label Format ........................................................ 119
vi
S
Set Feed Speed .......................................................................... 119
s
Store Label Format in Module ..................................................... 120
T
Set Field Data Line Terminator ................................................... 120
U
Mark Previous Field as a String Replacement Field.................... 121
X
Terminate Label Formatting Mode .............................................. 121
y
Select Font Symbol Set............................................................... 122
z
Zero (Ø) Conversion to “0” .......................................................... 122
+ (>)(()
Make Last Field Entered Increment Numeric (Alphanumeric)
(Hexadecimal) ............................................................................. 123
– (<)())
Make Last Field Entered Decrement Numeric (Alphanumeric)
(Hexadecimal) ............................................................................. 124
^
Set Count By Amount.................................................................. 125
Special Label Formatting Command Functions ................................................ 125
STX S
Recall Global Data and Place in Field .............................. 126
STX T
Print Time and Date ......................................................... 126
Font Loading Command Functions ......................................................................... 129
Introduction....................................................................................................... 129
*c###D
Assign Font ID Number............................................................... 129
)s###W
Font Descriptor............................................................................ 129
*c###E
Character Code........................................................................... 130
(s#W
Character Download Data........................................................... 130
vii
Generating Label Formats........................................................................................ 131
Introduction....................................................................................................... 131
Format Record Commands .............................................................................. 131
Generating Records ......................................................................................... 132
The Structure of a Record ................................................................................ 132
Record Structure Types.................................................................................... 136
Internal Bit-Mapped Fonts...................................................................... 136
Smooth Font, Font Modules, and Downloaded Bit-Mapped Fonts......... 136
Scalable Fonts ....................................................................................... 137
Bar Codes.............................................................................................. 138
Images ................................................................................................... 139
Graphics ................................................................................................ 139
Lines and Boxes.......................................................................... 139
Polygons ..................................................................................... 140
Circles ......................................................................................... 141
Fill Patterns ................................................................................. 141
Advanced Format Attributes........................................................ 143
Appendix A ................................................................................................................ 147
ASCII Control Chart.......................................................................................... 147
Appendix B ................................................................................................................ 149
Sample Programs............................................................................................. 149
VB Application to Send RAW Data via a Windows Printer Driver ..................... 154
viii
Appendix C ................................................................................................................ 159
Available Fonts – Sizes, References, and Samples ......................................... 159
Appendix D ................................................................................................................ 165
Reset Codes..................................................................................................... 165
Appendix E ................................................................................................................ 167
Single Byte Symbol Sets .................................................................................. 167
Appendix F................................................................................................................. 177
Bar Code Summary Data ................................................................................. 177
Bar Code Default Widths and Heights .............................................................. 179
Appendix G ................................................................................................................ 181
Bar Code Details .............................................................................................. 181
Appendix H ................................................................................................................ 221
Single and Double Byte Character Font Mapping............................................. 221
Appendix I.................................................................................................................. 223
Symbol Sets and Character Maps .................................................................... 223
Symbol Set Selection ....................................................................................... 223
Double-Byte Symbols, Chinese, Kanji, and Korean.......................................... 225
Appendix J................................................................................................................. 227
General Purpose Input Output (GPIO) Port Applications.................................. 227
M-Class GPIO .................................................................................................. 227
I & W-Class GPIO............................................................................................. 229
Applicator Interface Card (Version 1) ............................................................... 230
Applicator Interface Card (Version 2) ............................................................... 233
ix
Appendix K ................................................................................................................ 239
Resolutions; Field, Row, Column, & Character Values; Module IDs and
Allocations ........................................................................................................ 239
Appendix L................................................................................................................. 243
Speed Ranges.................................................................................................. 243
Appendix M................................................................................................................ 245
Commands by Function.................................................................................... 245
Appendix N ................................................................................................................ 247
Class Series DPL Constraint Cross-Reference ................................................ 247
Appendix O ................................................................................................................ 253
Image Loading.................................................................................................. 253
Appendix P ................................................................................................................ 255
UPC-A and EAN-13: Variable Price/Weight Bar Codes.................................... 255
Appendix Q ................................................................................................................ 257
International Language Print Capability (ILPC) Programming Examples ......... 257
Appendix R ................................................................................................................ 265
Plug and Play IDs ............................................................................................. 265
Appendix S ................................................................................................................ 267
Line Mode......................................................................................................... 267
Appendix T................................................................................................................. 271
RFID Overview ................................................................................................. 271
Appendix U ................................................................................................................ 277
WiFi Region Country Codes ............................................................................. 277
x
Appendix V ................................................................................................................ 281
Bar Code Symbology Information Resources................................................... 281
Glossary..................................................................................................................... 283
xi
xii
Overview
Who Should Use This Manual
This manual is intended for programmers who wish to create their own label production software.
The Scope of this Manual
This manual, arranged alphabetically by command, explains Datamax Programming Language (DPL) and
its related uses in the writing, loading and storing of programs for the control and production of label
formats (designs) for the following printers at the listed firmware versions:
Printers (all models, unless where otherwise noted)
Applicable Firmware Version*
A-Class
E-Class**
EX2
I-Class***
H-Class
M-Class (M-4206, only)
M1 & M2
M-Class (M-4206, only)
M-Class
W-Class***
10.065
4.21
10.065
8.03M2
10.065
5.08E
11.00
5.08E
8.03M2
8.03M2
*Firmware in RFID-equipped printers must be at version 08.043 or greater; see Note 1, below.
**For information regarding the E-3202 printer, see Note 2, below.
***Standard firmware version shown, while option-specific version numbers may differ.
Model distinctions, including configurations (i.e., Display-Equipped or Non-Display Models) and
equipped types (e.g., GPIO-1, graphics display, RFID, etc.), will be indicated in this text to differentiate
command compatibility. The appendices of this manual also contain details that cannot be ignored. The
use of any command will require checking for possible exclusionary conditions.
Notes: (1) See the <STX>KC command for information regarding attainment of the printer’s firmware version;
and then, if necessary, upgrade that firmware. Upgrades are available at ftp://ftp.datamaxcorp.com/.
(2) Programming information for the S-Class and the Datamax legacy printers (Prodigy, DMX400, etc.)
can be found in the DPL Programmer’s Manual (part number 88-2051-01). Programming information for
the E-3202 can be found in E-3202 Programmer’s Manual (part number 88-2257-01). Both manuals can
be downloaded from our web site at http://www.datamaxcorp.com/.
(3) References to “Menu Settings” refer either to the printer’s internal set-up menu, or to the printer’s
menu driven display system; please consult to the appropriate printer Operator’s Manual for details.
(4) For backward compatibility purposes, the Class Series printers covered in this manual will ignore
commands that are no longer processed; Appendix N lists these commands.
(5) When updating firmware for E-Class version 4.10 and higher the printer must be in DPL Mode, not
LINE mode, prior to sending the *.dlf file. See Appendix S for details.
(6) Where applicable, printer responses to a host device will depend upon the communication port, port
settings, and cabling.
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
1
Overview
This manual contains the following chapters and appendices:
OVERVIEW on page 1
Contents, organization, and conventions used in this manual; also includes a typical data flow
sequence for the printer.
CONTROL CODE COMMAND FUNCTIONS on page 7
Description of the attention-getter characters necessary for the printer to receive a command
sequence, and available alternate characters and line terminators.
IMMEDIATE COMMAND FUNCTIONS on page 9
Description of the commands, listed alphabetically, that perform status queries and printer control
commands.
SYSTEM-LEVEL COMMAND FUNCTIONS on page 15
Description of the commands, listed alphabetically, that control the printer and allow scalable font
and image downloads.
EXTENDED SYSTEM-LEVEL COMMAND FUNCTIONS on page 37
Description of the commands (listed alphabetically) that control the printer.
LABEL FORMATTING COMMAND FUNCTIONS on page 109
Description of commands, listed alphabetically, that control the position of text and images on the
media, print or store, and end the formatting process.
FONT LOADING COMMAND FUNCTIONS on page 129
Description of commands, listed alphabetically, used when downloading font data in PCL-4
compatible bit-maps.
GENERATING LABEL FORMATS on page 131
Description of the structure of records, the different types, and their use in generating label formats.
APPENDICES A THROUGH V on pages 147 through 281
These contain details that cannot be ignored including various tables, programming examples,
printer default values, and bar code symbology details. See the Table of Contents for specific
content information.
GLOSSARY on page 283
Definitions of words, abbreviations, and acronyms used in this manual.
2
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
Overview
General Conventions
These are some of the conventions followed in this manual:
On the header of each page, the name of the chapter.
On the footer of each page, the page number and the title of the manual.
Names of other manuals referenced are in Italics.
Notes are added to bring your attention to important considerations, tips or helpful suggestions.
Boldface is also used to bring your attention to important information.
This manual refers to IBM-PC based keyboard command characters for access to the ASCII
character set. Systems based on different formats (e.g., Apple’s Macintosh™) should use the
appropriate keyboard command to access the desired ASCII character. See Appendix A for the
ASCII character set.
Computer Entry and Display Conventions
Command syntax and samples are formatted as follows:
The Courier font in boldface indicates the DPL command syntax, and Italics are used to indicate
the command syntax parameters.
Regular Courier font indicates sample commands, files and printer responses.
Square brackets ([ ]) indicate that the item is optional.
<CR> is used to identify the line termination character. Other strings placed between < > in this
manual represent the character of the same ASCII name, and are single-byte hexadecimal values
(e.g., <STX>, <CR>, and <0x0D> equal 02, 0D, and 0D, respectively).
Hexadecimal values are often displayed in ‘C’ programming language conventions (e.g., 0x02 =
02 hex, 0x41 = 41 hex, etc.)
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
3
Overview
Typical Data Flow Sequence
The typical data flow sequence is summarized in the following bullets and detailed in the table below.
Printer Commands data is transmitted to the printer as shown in the table from left to right, top to bottom.
Status commands
Configuration commands
Download commands
Label format
Status commands
Label reprint commands
Memory cleanup
Printer Commands
Description
Notes
<STX>WG
“Status” commands: Get
Status, Request Memory
Module Storage
Information…
Optional, bi-directional
communication required
for these commands.
<STX>O220
<STX>n
<STX>V0
“Configuration”
commands, download
image…
See <STX>Kc to reduce
configuration commands
transferred
<SOH>D
<STX>IApImagename<CR>image data...data
<CR>
“Download” commands,
image, fonts…
RAM (temporary) or
Flash (semi-permanent)
memory
<STX>L
Begin label
D11
Label Header record
131100000500050Typical text field 01
Label Formatting Data
record –
Object type, orientation,
position, data
Q0001
Label Quantity
E
Label Terminate record
<SOH>A
Status command
Optional, bi-directional
communication required
for these commands.
Reprint with New Data
Records
Used for fast re-prints
Memory cleanup
Typically used for
temporary storage
<SOH>A
Existing label formats
may be recalled. Label
header records are not
required
<STX>U01new data for field 01
<STX>E0005
<STX>G
<STX>xImagename<CR>
<STX>zA
4
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
Overview
Commands are available for retrieving stored label formats, updating data, and adding new data. These
techniques are used for increasing throughput. See <STX>G, Label Recall Command ‘r’, and Label Save
Command ‘s’.
Typical commands used in the various stages shown above are listed in the tables that follow.
Configuration Commands
The following table lists some commands useful in controlling printer configuration. These
commands are generally effective only for the current power-up session; toggling power restores the
default configuration. See <STX>Kc for changes to the default power-up configuration. Changing the
default power-up configuration and saving objects in printer Flash memory can reduce the data
transmitted for each label and therefore improve throughput.
Configuration
Command
Name
Function
<STX>A
Set Date and Time
Set Date and Time
<STX>d
Set Double Buffer Mode
Force generation of multiple memory copies of label format;
usually not used
<STX>c
Set Continuous Paper Length Must be 0000 for gap media; not used for reflective media
<STX>e
Set Edge Sensor
Setup for gap or registration hole type stock
<STX>Kf
Set Present Distance
Determines label stop position, head relative. <STX>f edge
sensor relative equivalent command, older models
<STX>Kc
Configuration Set
Determines default power-up configuration
<STX>F
Send Form Feed
Sets the stop position of the printed label
<STX>M
Set Maximum Label Length
Length to search for next gap or reflective mark; not used
with continuous media
<STX>m
Set to Metric Mode
Subsequent measurements interpreted in metric (most units
mm/10). Label equivalent command can be used
<STX>n
Set to Inch Mode
Subsequent measurements interpreted in inches, most units
in/100, Label equivalent command can be used
<STX>O
Set Start of Print Position
Effect is not on label immediately following command since
media position is at Start of Print between labels; <STX>K
default position relative ± 64 in/100 maximum deviation
<STX>S
Set Feed Rate
Blank label movement speed
<STX>V
Software Switch
Enable optional hardware, cutter, present sensor
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
5
Overview
Download Commands
Download
Command
Name
Function
<STX>I
Download Image
Download Image to selected memory module
<STX>i
Download Scalable Font
Download Scalable Font to selected memory module
<ESC>
Download Bitmapped Font
Download Bitmapped Font to selected memory module
Label Header Commands
These commands determine how the label formatting occurs, effect print quality and quantity. They
are typically issued immediately following the <STX>L start of the label format. The Format
Attribute (A) and the Offset (C, R) commands can be changed at any point between format records to
achieve desired effects.
Label Header
Command
6
Name
A
Set Format Attribute
C
Column Offset
D
Set Width and Dot Size
H
Set Heat Setting
M
Set Mirror Mode
P
Set Print Speed
P
Set Backup Speed
Q
Set Quantity
R
Set Row Offset
S
Set Feed Speed
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
Control Code Command Functions
Introduction
The printer requires a special “attention-getter” character in order to receive a command sequence,
informing the printer that it is about to receive a command and the type of command it will be. Control
Commands, System-Level Commands, and Font Loading Commands have their own unique attentiongetter, followed by a command character that directs printer action.
Attention-Getters
The attention-getters (e.g., “SOH”) are standard ASCII control labels that represent a one character control
code (i.e., ^A or Ctrl A). Appendix A contains the entire ASCII Control Code Chart.
Attention-Getter
ASCII Character
Decimal Value
HEX Value
Immediate Commands
System-Level Commands
Font Loading Commands
SOH
STX
ESC
1
2
27
01
02
1B
Table 2-1: Control Code Listings
Alternate Control Code Modes
For systems unable to transmit certain control codes, Alternate Control Code Modes are available.
Configuring the printer to operate in an Alternate Control Code Mode (selected via the Setup Menu, the
<STX>Kc command or, where applicable, the <STX>KD command) requires the substitution of Standard
Control Characters with Alternate Control Characters in what is otherwise a normal data stream.
Control Character
Standard
Alternate
Alternate 2
Custom
Command Type
SOH
0x01
0x5E
0x5E
User Defined
Control
STX
0x02
0x7E
0x7E
User Defined
System
CR
0x0D
0x0D
0x7C
User Defined
Line Termination
0x1B
0x1B
0x1B
User Defined
Font Loading
0x5E
0x40
0x40
User Defined
Label Formatting
ESC
“Count By”
[1]
[1]
See Label Formatting Commands, ^ set count by amount.
Table 2-2: Alternate Control Code Listings
Note: Throughout this manual <SOH>, <STX>, <CR>, <ESC>, and ^, will be used to indicate the control codes.
The actual values will depend on whether standard or alternate control codes are enabled for the
particular application.
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
7
Control Code Command Functions
Alternate Line Terminator Example
Alternate Control Codes provide for substitution of the line terminator, as well as the control characters
listed above. For example using Alternate 2, the line terminator <CR> (0x0D) is replaced by | (0x7C).
The following is a sample label format data stream for a printer configured for Alternate-2 Control Codes:
~L|1911A10001000101234560|X|~UT01ABCDE|~G|
8
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
Immediate Command Functions
Introduction
When the printer receives an Immediate Command, its current operation will be momentarily interrupted
to respond to the command. Immediate Commands may be issued before or after System-Level
commands; however, they may not be issued among Label Formatting Commands or during font or
image downloading. Immediate Commands consist of:
1. Attention-Getter, 0x01 or 0x5E, see Control Codes.
2. Command Character
SOH #
Reset
This command resets the printer. Resetting the printer returns all settings to default and clears both
the communications and printing buffers. The command also clears DRAM memory.
Syntax:
<SOH>#
Printer Response:
The printer will reset.
<XON> T (The T may come before the <XON>)
SOH *
Reset
(Display-Equipped Models only)
This command forces a soft reset of the microprocessor, resetting the printer, returning all factory
default values, and clearing the communication and print buffers.
Syntax:
<SOH>*
Printer Response:
The printer will reset.
<XON> R (The R may come before the <XON>)
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
9
Immediate Command Functions
SOH A
Send ASCII Status String
This command allows the host computer to check the current printer status. The printer returns a
string of eight characters, followed by a carriage return. Each character (see below) indicates an
associated condition, either true (Y) or false (N). Byte 1 is transmitted first. See <SOH>F.
Syntax:
<SOH>A
Sample:
<SOH>A
Printer Response:
abcdefgh<CR>
Where:
Possible Values
Interpretation
Byte Transmit Sequence
a
-
Y/N
Y
=
Interpreter busy (imaging)
1
b
-
Y/N
Y
=
Paper out or fault
2
c
-
Y/N
Y
=
Ribbon out or fault
3
d
-
Y/N
Y
=
Printing batch
4
e
-
Y/N
Y
=
Busy printing
5
f
-
Y/N
Y
=
Printer paused
6
g
-
Y/N
Y
=
Label presented
7
h
-
N
N
=
Always No
8
Table 3-1: ASCII Status Bytes
SOH a
Send ASCII Extended Status String
This command allows the host computer to check an extended current printer status. The printer
returns a string of seventeen characters, followed by a carriage return. Most characters (see below)
indicate an associated condition, either true (Y) or false (N). Byte 1 is transmitted first. See <SOH>F.
10
Syntax:
<SOH>a
Sample:
<SOH>a
Printer Response:
abcdefgh:ijklmnop<CR>
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
Immediate Command Functions
Where:
Possible Values
Interpretation
Byte Transmit Sequence
a
-
Y/N
Y
=
Interpreter busy (imaging)
1
b
-
Y/N
Y
=
Paper out or fault
2
c
-
Y/N
Y
=
Ribbon out or fault
3
d
-
Y/N
Y
=
Printing batch
4
e
-
Y/N
Y
=
Busy printing
5
f
-
Y/N
Y
=
Printer paused
6
g
-
Y/N
Y
=
Label presented
7
h
-
N
N
=
Always No
8
-
:
:
=
Always :
9
i
-
Y/N
Y
=
Cutter Fault
10
j
-
Y/N
Y
=
Paper Out
11
k
-
Y/N
Y
=
Ribbon Saver Fault
12
l
-
Y/N
Y
=
Print Head Up
13
m
-
Y/N
Y
=
Top of Form Fault
14
n
-
Y/N
Y
=
Ribbon Low
15
o
-
Y/N
Y
=
N (reserved for future)
16
p
-
Y/N
Y
=
N (reserved for future)
17
Table 3-1: ASCII Status Bytes
SOH B
Toggle Pause
This command toggles the printer’s paused state between on and off. (This is the same function
achieved by pressing the PAUSE Key on the printer.)
Syntax:
<SOH>B
Sample:
<SOH>B
Printer Response:
This command will illuminate the Paused/Stop Indicator and/or indicate
PAUSED on the LCD or graphics display panel, suspend printing, and wait
until one of the following occurs:
The <SOH>B command is sent to the printer.
The PAUSE Key is pressed.
Upon which the printer will turn the Paused/Stop Indicator ‘Off’ and/or
remove PAUSED from the LCD or graphics display panel, then resume
operation from the point of interruption. (If the Receive Buffer is not full,
an <XON> character will be transmitted from the printer.)
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
11
Immediate Command Functions
SOH C
Stop/Cancel
This command performs the same function as pressing the STOP/CANCEL Key on the printer. This
function clears the current format from the print buffer, pauses the printer, and illuminates the
Paused/Stop Indicator. (The pause condition is terminated as described under <SOH>B.)
Syntax:
<SOH>C
Sample:
<SOH>C
Printer Response:
This command will clear the print buffer, pause the printer, illuminate the
Paused/Stop Indicator and/or indicate PAUSED on the LCD or graphics
display panel, suspend printing, and wait until one of the following occurs:
•
•
The <SOH>B command is sent to the printer; or
The PAUSE Key is pressed.
Upon which the printer will turn the Paused/Stop Indicator ‘Off’ and/or
remove PAUSED from the LCD or graphics display panel. (If the Receive
Buffer is not full, an <XON> character will be transmitted from the printer.)
SOH D
SOH Shutdown
(Non-Display Models only)
This commands the printer to ignore Immediate Commands (^A). The SOH shutdown command is
required before loading images or fonts because some may contain data sequences that could be
interpreted as Immediate Commands. After the SOH shutdown command is sent, Immediate
Commands can be turned back on by sending a valid SOH command three times, separated by a one
second delay between each command, or by manually resetting the printer. It is good practice to
check batch quantities (<SOH>E) to verify that the SOH commands are working.
12
Syntax:
<SOH>D
Sample:
<SOH>D
Printer Response:
This printer will ignore Immediate Commands (^A) until a valid SOH
command is received three times, separated by a one second delay between
each command; or, until the printer is manually reset.
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
Immediate Command Functions
SOH E
Send Batch Remaining Quantity
This command causes the printer to return a four-digit number indicating the quantity of labels that
remain to be printed in the current batch, followed by a carriage return. Communications latency may
cause this value to be higher than actual on some printers.
Syntax:
<SOH>E
Printer response:
nnnn<CR>
Where:
nnnn
SOH e
- Are four decimal digits, 0-9999.
Send Batch Printed Quantity
This command causes the printer to return a four-digit number indicating the quantity of labels that
have been printed in the current batch, followed by a carriage return. Communications latency may
cause this value to be lower than actual on some printers.
Syntax:
<SOH>e
Printer response:
nnnn<CR>
Where:
nnnn
SOH F
- Are four decimal digits, 0-9999.
Send Status Byte
This command instructs the printer to send a single status byte where each bit (1 or 0) represents one
of the printer’s status flags, followed by a carriage return (see below). If an option is unavailable for
the printer, the single bit will always be zero. See <SOH>A.
Syntax:
<SOH>F
Printer response format: X<CR>
Where ‘X’ is 0 through 0xef with bits as indicated in the ‘Condition’ column below:
[1]
Bit[1]
Value
Condition
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
1 or 0
1 or 0
1 or 0
1 or 0
1 or 0
1 or 0
1 or 0
Always zero
Label presented
Printer paused
Busy printing
Printing batch
Ribbon out or Fault
Paper out or Fault
Command interpreter busy (imaging)
One is the least significant bit.
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
13
Immediate Command Functions
14
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
System-Level Command Functions
Introduction
The most commonly used commands are the System-Level Commands. These are used to load and store
graphics information, in addition to printer control. System-Level Commands are used to override default
parameter values (fixed and selectable) and may be used before or after Immediate Commands but cannot
be issued among Label Formatting Commands. System-Level Commands consist of:
1. Attention-Getter, 0x02 or 0x7E, see Control Codes.
2. Command Character
3. Parameters (if any).
STX A
Set Time and Date
This command sets the time and date. The initial setting of the date will be stored in the printer’s
internal inch counter. This date can be verified by printing a Configuration Label.
Syntax:
<STX>AwmmddyyyyhhMMjjj
Where:
w
1 digit for day of week; 1 = Monday; 7 = Sunday
mm
2 digits for month
dd
2 digits for day
yyyy
4 digits for year
hh
2 digits for hour in 24 hour format
MM
2 digits for minutes
jjj
3 digits for Julian date (numerical day of the year) / constant; see notes below.
Sample:
<STX>A1020319960855034
Printed response:
Mon. Feb 3, 1996, 8:55AM, 034
Notes: (1) When set to 000, the Julian date is automatically calculated; otherwise, the Julian date will print
as that entered number, without daily increments. If factory defaults are restored the actual Julian
date will also be restored.
(2) Printers without the Real Time Clock option lose the set time/date when power is removed.
(3) Response format is variable; see the Special Label Formatting Command <STX>T.
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
15
System-Level Command Functions
STX a
Enable Feedback Characters
This command enables the feedback ASCII hex characters to be returned from the printer following
specific events after each completed batch of labels when using serial communications. The default
value is ‘Off’.
Syntax:
<STX>a
Printer response:
Event dependent. (Also, see Appendix D for error codes.)
Where:
Event
Return Characters
Invalid character
0x07 ( BEL )
Label printed
0x1E ( RS )
End of batch
0x1F ( US )
STX B
Get Printer Time and Date Information
This command instructs the printer to retrieve its internal time and date information.
Syntax:
<STX>B
Sample:
<STX>B
Printer response format: wmmddyyyyhhMMjjj<CR>
Where:
w
1 digit for day of week; 1 = Monday
mm
2 digits for month
dd
2 digits for day
yyyy
4 digits for year
hh
2 digits for hour in 24 hour format
MM
2 digits for minutes
jjj
3 digits for Julian date / constant*
* See <STX>A for details and restrictions.
Printer response sample: 1020319960855034<CR>
16
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
System-Level Command Functions
STX c
Set Continuous Paper Length
This command sets the label size for applications using continuous media. It disables the top-of-form
function performed by the Media Sensor. The sensor, however, continues to monitor paper-out
conditions. See <STX>M.
Syntax:
<STX>cnnnn
Where:
nnnn
Sample:
<STX>c0100
-
Specifies the length of the media feed for each label format, in
inches/100 or millimeters/10 (see <STX>m).
This sample sets a label length of 100, which equals 1.00 inch (assuming Imperial Mode is selected).
Note: This command must be reset to zero for edge or reflective sensing operation.
STX d
Set Double Buffer Mode
(Non-Display Models only)
This command, available for backward compatibility, enables double buffer mode. When printing
labels with incrementing, decrementing and replacement fields (see note below) the printer will only
erase and format those fields, leaving the rest of the label format untouched, and thus increasing
throughput. This command is only active if the labels being printed are less than half the maximum
size of the print buffer (see <STX>S).
Syntax:
<STX>d
Notes: (1) This command is generally not used because fast formatting is the normal operating mode when
the number of variable print fields (Label Formatting commands +, -, <, >, u) is less than or equal to
1/3 of the print field count total. In this case, the command will force fast formatting even when the
proportion of variable print fields is greater than 1/3 the total.
(2) The maximum label size is unaffected by this command.
(3) The <STX>s command restores normal (fast) formatting.
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
17
System-Level Command Functions
STX E
Set Quantity For Stored Label
This command sets the number of labels for printing using the format currently in the print buffer.
(The printer automatically stores the most recent format received in the buffer until the printer is reset
or power is removed.) When used in conjunction with the <STX>G command, this will print the
labels.
Syntax:
<STX>Ennnn
Where:
nnnn
Sample:
<STX>E0025
<STX>G
Printer response:
25 labels of the current format in memory will be printed.
Notes:
- A four-digit quantity, including leading zeros.
(1) This command may be issued prior to a label format without a specified quantity, Qnnnnn.
Also, if a <CR> terminates the command, a five-digit quantity (nnnnn) can be entered.
(2) All models, except E-Class – Specifying 9999 as the four-digit quantity causes continuous
printing.
STX e
Select Edge Sensor
This command enables transmissive (see-through) sensing for top-of-form detection of die-cut, and
holed (or notched) media. This Media Sensor will detect a minimum gap of 0.1 inches (2.5 mm)
between labels (see the Operator’s Manual for media requirements). Use the <STX>O command to
adjust the print position. This is the printer default setting at power-up or reset.
Syntax:
Note:
STX F
<STX>e
This command is ignored when <STX>cnnnn is issued with a non-zero value for nnnn.
Form Feed
This commands the printer to form feed to the next start of print.
Syntax:
<STX>F
Printer response:
The printer will form feed.
Note:
18
Following a reset, if the length of the first label fed is less than the label offset value (defined by
the <STX>O command) the printer will advance past that label until a top-of-form is detected, or
until the offset is reached.
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
System-Level Command Functions
STX f
Set Form Stop Position (Backfeed Command)
This sets the stop position of the printed label, allowing the label to stop at a point past the start-ofprint position. When the next label format is sent, the printer motor reverses direction to retract the
media to the start-of-print position. If quantities of more than one label are requested, the printer will
operate without backfeeding. A backfeed will then only occur when printing has stopped for a few
seconds.
Non-Display Models: The printer Option Control must be set (via the menu) to ‘Host’ for this
command to have effect.
Display-Equipped Models: This command is not honored, see <STX>Kf and <STX>Kc.
Syntax:
<STX>fnnn
Where:
nnn
Sample:
<STX>f230
- Is a three-digit distance from the Media Sensor, in inches/100 or
mm/10. This distance is independent of the start-of-print position
(<STX>O), yet it must be greater than the start-of-print position to
take effect.
The sample sets a stop position distance of 230 (2.3 inches from the Media Sensor’s eye).
STX G
Print Last Label Format
This command prints a previously formatted label and restarts a canceled batch job following the last
processed label. This is used when there is a label format in the buffer. The <STX>E command is
used to enter the quantity. (If the <STX>E command is not used only one label will print.)
Syntax:
<STX>G
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
19
System-Level Command Functions
STX I
Input Image Data
This command must precede image downloading from a host computer to the printer. The data that
immediately follows the command string will be image data. If any of the 8-bit input formats are to
be used, it is necessary to disable the Immediate Command interpreter by executing an <SOH>D
command before issuing the <STX>I command. See Appendix O for more information. To print an
image, see Generating Label Formats.
A-Class (and H–Class models with a large display): A “ready mode” logo image can be input
using this command. The image must be stored on a Flash module. The image name must be
“logolab” (lowercase only) in the following DPL command. Also, printer power must be cycled
for the new image to appear. The available display area is 312 pixels wide by 94 pixels high. Images
larger than this specified width or height will be clipped along the right and/or bottom edges.
Note: The native format for storing downloaded PCX and BMP images is RLE-2, which results in a better
compression ratio for less module space usage when downloading gray-scale images and images
with large black or white areas.
Syntax:
<STX>Iabfnn…n<CR>data
Where:
a
- Memory Module Bank Select (see Appendix K).
b
- Data Type (optional), A or omit.
b Value:
A
omitted
f
- Format Designator
f Designator:
F
B
b
I
i
P
p
Sample:
Image Data Value Range:
ASCII Characters 0-9, A-F, (7 bit)
00-FF, (8 bit)
Format Type:
7-bit Datamax image load file
.BMP 8-bit format (image flipped), black and
white (B&W)
.BMP 8-bit format (image as received), B&W
.IMG 8-bit format (image flipped), B&W
.IMG 8-bit format (image as received), B&W
.PCX 8-bit format (image flipped), B&W
.PCX 8-bit format (image as received), B&W
nn…n
- Up to 16 characters used as an image name.
<CR>
-
data
- Image data
0x0d terminates the name.
<SOH>D
<STX>IDpTest <CR>
data...data <CR>
The sample instructs the printer to (1) receive an 8-bit PCX image sent by the host in an 8-bit data
format, (2) name the image ‘Test’, and (3) store it in memory module D (with a .dim file extension).
20
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
System-Level Command Functions
STX i
Scalable Font Downloading
The command structure for downloading TrueType (.TTF) scalable fonts (font files may be singlebyte or double-byte character systems) is as follows:
Syntax:
<STX>imtnnName<CR>xx…xdata…
Where:
m
-
Memory Module Designator to save this font to; see Appendix
K.
t
-
Type of scalable font being downloaded:
T
= TrueType
nn
-
Two-digit font reference ID. Valid range is 50-99, 9A-9Z, 9a-9z,
(base 62 numbers).
Name
-
The title, up to 16 characters, for this font.
<CR>
-
0x0d terminates the Name.
xx…x
-
Eight-digit size of the font data, number of bytes, hexadecimal,
padded with leading zeros.
data
-
The scalable font data.
Sample:
<STX>iDT52Tree Frog<CR>000087C2data...
This sample downloads a TrueType font to module ‘D,’ and assigns it the Font ID of 52 with the
name “Tree Frog” and file extension .dtt. The size of the font data is 0x87C2 bytes long.
STX J
Set Pause for Each Label
This command causes the printer to pause after printing each label. It is intended for use with the peel
mechanism or tear bar when the Present Sensor option is not installed. After removing the printed
label, the PAUSE Key must be pushed in order to print the next label. (The printer must be reset to
clear the <STX>J command.)
Syntax:
STX K
<STX>J
Extended System-Level Commands
This is an expansion of the System-Level Command structure. See Extended System-Level
Commands for more information.
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
21
System-Level Command Functions
STX k
Test RS-232 Port
This command instructs the printer to transmit the Y character from the printer’s RS-232 port.
(Failure to receive Y could indicate an interfacing problem.)
Syntax:
<STX>k
Printer response:
Y
STX L
Enter Label Formatting Command Mode
This command switches the printer to the Label Formatting Command Mode. Once in this mode, the
printer expects to receive Record Structures and Label Formatting Commands. Immediate, SystemLevel, and Font Loading commands will be ignored until the label formatting mode is terminated
with E, s, or X, (see Label Formatting Commands for additional information).
Syntax:
STX M
<STX>L
Set Maximum Label Length
This command instructs the printer move media this distance in search of the top-of-form (label edge,
notch, black mark, etc.) before declaring a paper fault. A paper fault condition can occur if this setting
is too close (within 0.1 inch [2.54 mm]) to the physical length of the label. Therefore, it is a good
practice to set this command to 2.5 to 3 times the actual label length used. The minimum value should
be at least 5” (127 mm).
Syntax:
<STX>Mnnnn
Where:
nnnn
Sample:
<STX>M0500
- Is a four-digit length, 0000-9999, in/100 or mm/10. Maximum
setting is 9999 (99.99 inches or 2540 mm). The default setting is
16 inches/ 406.4 mm
The sample sets a maximum travel distance of 5 inches (unless the printer is in metric mode, see
<STX>m).
STX m
Set Printer to Metric Mode
This command sets the printer to interpret measurements as metric values (e.g., <STX>c0100 will
equal 10.0 mm). The default is Imperial (see <STX>n).
Syntax:
22
<STX>m
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
System-Level Command Functions
STX n
Set Printer to Imperial Mode
This command sets the printer to interpret measurements as inch values (e.g., <STX>c0100 will
equal 1.00 inch). The printer defaults to this mode.
Syntax:
STX O
<STX>n
Set Start of Print (SOP) Position
This command sets the point to begin printing relative to the top-of-form (the label’s edge as detected
by the Media Sensor). The printer will feed from the top-of-form to the value specified in this
command to begin printing.
This value operates independently of the <STX>f command.
Non-Display Models: The printer Options Control must be set (via the menu) to ‘Host’ for this
command to have effect.
Display-Equipped Models: If SOP Emulation is set to ‘enabled’ (via the menu), this command sets
the point where printing starts, emulating the selected legacy printer’s distance, as measured between
the media sensor and the print head burn line. In addition, regardless of the SOP Emulation setting,
the start of print position can be fine-tuned via the menu: Menu Mode / Print Control / Custom
Adjustments / Row Adjust.
Syntax:
<STX>Onnnn
Where:
nnnn
-
Is a four-digit offset value in inches/100 or mm/10. The
“zero” setting is the default value, and settings below 50 are
adjusted back to the default value.
Non-Display Models: the default setting is 0220 in Imperial
Mode (0559 in Metric Mode).
Display-Equipped Models: the default setting is ‘Off’ and
the printer assumes the natural start of print position.
Sample (non-display
models):
<STX>O0300
The above sample sets a start of print position of 3.0 inches (unless in Metric Mode, see <STX>m).
Sample (displayequipped models):
<STX>O0210
The above sample will begin printing 0.1 inch closer to the leading edge of the label if the 220
(Allegro) SOP Emulation was selected, or 1.0 inch farther away from the leading edge if 110
(ProdPlus) SOP Emulation was selected.
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
23
System-Level Command Functions
STX o
Cycle Cutter
This command will cause the optional cutter mechanism to immediately perform a cut after all
previously received commands are executed. The cutter must be installed, enabled and the
interlock(s) closed for operation.
Syntax:
STX P
<STX>o
Set Hex Dump Mode
This command instructs the printer to assume Hex Dump Mode. Instead of a formatted product, data
sent to the printer following this command will be printed in the raw ASCII format. To capture this
data, labels must be at least four inches (102 mm) long and as wide as the maximum print width. This
command has the same effect as turning the printer ‘On’ while pressing the FEED Key; however, no
Configuration/Test Pattern label will be printed. To return to normal operation the printer must be
manually reset.
Syntax:
STX p
<STX>P
Controlled Pause
The controlled pause command will cause the printer to pause only after all previously received
commands are executed. This is often useful between label batches. (This command will not clear the
pause condition, see <SOH>B).
Syntax:
STX Q
<STX>p
Clear All Modules
This command instructs the printer to clear all of the Flash and DRAM modules (see the Operator’s
Manual of the corresponding printer for applicable module options). All stored data will be
destroyed.
Syntax:
24
<STX>Q
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
System-Level Command Functions
STX q
Clear Module
This command clears the selected Flash or DRAM module. If a module is corrupted during normal
operations (identifiable when the printer responds with a ‘No Modules Available’ message to a
<STX>W command), it must be cleared. All stored data will be destroyed.
Syntax:
<STX>qa
Where:
a
Sample:
<STX>qA
-
Memory module designator, see Appendix K.
The sample clears memory module A.
Notes:
(1) If a module directory intermittently returns the message ‘No Modules Available’ or if data
continuously becomes corrupt with the write protect switch on, the module may be at the end of its
service life. Before, however, concluding that a module is defective, cycle the printer’s power and
test the module.
(2) E-Class models: Some Flash Memory Expansion options must have Write Enable jumpers
installed to perform this command.
STX R
Ribbon Saver On/Off
(Display-Equipped Models only)
This command enables the operation of the optional Ribbon Saver. It is the only command used to
control the Ribbon Saver. Its operation is continuous when enabled. The printer must be set to
thermal transfer (ribbon) printing mode then, during operation, the Ribbon Saver engages
automatically, lifting when the minimum amount of label white space is exceeded.
Syntax:
<STX>Rx
Where:
x
Sample:
<STX>RY
-
Y - Enabled (Default = Menu selection.)
N - Disabled
The sample will turn the ribbon saver on.
Note: This command is ignored on units not equipped with the ribbon saver option.
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
25
System-Level Command Functions
STX r
Select Reflective Sensor
This command enables reflective (black mark) sensing for top-of-form detection of rolled butt-cut,
and fan-fold or tag stocks with reflective marks on the underside. This Media Sensor will detect a
minimum mark of 0.1 inches (2.54 mm) between labels (see the Operator’s Manual for media
requirements). The end of the black mark determines the top of form. Use the <STX>O command to
adjust the print position.
Syntax:
<STX>r
Default setting:
Edge sensing
STX S
Set Feed Speed
This command controls the output rate of the media when the FEED Key is pressed.
Syntax:
<STX>Sn
Where:
n
STX s
-
Is a letter value (see Appendix L).
Set Single Buffer Mode
(Non-Display Models only)
This command, available for backward compatibility, instructs the printer to use single buffer
operation. In single buffer mode, the printer will erase and format all fields. This, in turn, decreases
printer throughput when incrementing, decrementing, or replacement fields are used (see Label
Formatting Commands). See <STX>d.
Syntax:
26
<STX>s
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
System-Level Command Functions
STX T
Print Quality Label
This command instructs the printer to produce a Print Quality label, a format comprised of different
patterns and bar codes useful in printer setup. (On display-equipped models, this is also one of the
Quick Test formats.) To capture all printed information, use the labels as wide as the maximum print
width (see Appendix K) and at least four inches (102 mm) long.
Syntax:
<STX>T
Printer response (dot
patterns may vary):
STX t
Test DRAM Memory Module
This command tests the DRAM module. The printer returns a one-line message stating the module
condition (no message is returned if a module is unavailable).
Syntax:
<STX>t
results
- Test results given as ‘Good’ or ‘Bad’.
Non-Display Models: The printer must be in Test Mode for the command to function. To enable the
Test Mode see the <STX>KD command.
Printer response format: axxxK results<CR>
Where:
a
- 2 = Slot B
xxx
- Module size in Kbytes
Display-Equipped Models: The printer must have Feedback Characters enabled for this command to
function. Feedback Characters can be enabled via the menu (see the Operator’s Manual for additional
information).
Printer response format: Module A: xxxxK
Module B: xxxxK
Module D: xxxxK
Where:
xxxx
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
DRAM Testedresults<CR>
DRAM Testedresults<CR>
DRAM Tested results<CR>
- Module size in Kbytes.
27
System-Level Command Functions
STX U
Label Format String Replacement Field
This command places new label data into format fields to build a label. Two options are available:
Exact Length and Truncated Length.
To easily keep track of fields, place all of the fields to be updated with the command at the beginning
of the label format. A maximum of 99 format fields can be updated. Fields are numbered
consecutively 01 to 99 in the order received.
Exact Length Replacement Field Functions – The new data string must equal the original string
length and contain valid data. When the dynamic data is shorter than the length of the originally
defined data field, then field will be padded with blanks (or zero when the Format Record header
specifies a numeric bar code).
Syntax:
<STX>Unnss…s<CR>
Where:
nn
- Is the format field number, 2 digits.
ss…s
- Is the new string data, followed by a <CR>
Exact Length Sample: <STX>L
1A1100001000100DATA FIELD 1<CR>
161100001100110data field 2<CR>
161100001200120data field 3<CR>
Q0001
E
<STX>U01123<CR>
<STX>U02New data F2<CR>
<STX>E0002
<STX>G
The sample produces three labels. The first is formatted with the commands between <STX>L and
E. The next two labels print with the replacement data contained in the <STX>U commands (see
<STX>E and <STX>G). The bar code is the same length: 3 digits and nine spaces.
Truncated Length Replacement Field Functions – A variant of the <STX>U command includes the
truncate option ‘T’, where dynamic data shorter than the originally defined field length will not be
padded and the original maximum field length is maintained for subsequent replacements.
28
Syntax:
<STX>UTnnss…s<CR>
Where:
nn
- Is the format field number, 2 digits.
T
- Truncate option
ss…s
- Is the new string data, followed by a <CR>
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
System-Level Command Functions
Truncated Sample:
<STX>L
1A1100001000100data field 1<CR>
161100001100110data field 2<CR>
161100001200120data field 3<CR>
Q0001
E
<STX>UT01123<CR>
<STX>U02New data F2<CR>
<STX>E0002
<STX>G
The sample produces three labels. The first is formatted with the commands between <STX>L and
E. The next two labels print with the replacement data contained in the <STX>U commands (see
<STX>E and <STX>G). The bar code is shortened; it only has three digits (and no spaces).
STX V
Software Switch Settings
This command controls the printer options, where the appropriate value allows the option(s) to be
‘On’ or ‘Off.’ Each option has a corresponding bit whose value is ‘1’ when enabled. The tables below
indicate the bit assignments and corresponding command value needed to enable the desired
option(s).
Display-Equipped Models: Printer options are set by entering selections through the menu. The
software setting command allows two of these option settings to be modified without returning to the
menu.
Syntax:
<STX>Vn
Where:
n
Sample:
<STX>V5
-
Is a single digit ASCII numeric value from 0-F. The value of
n is used to override the power-up option settings. Reset or
power-up returns the printer to the original settings.
The sample corresponds to setting Bits 0 and 2, creating a command value of 5. When applied, this
enables the Present Sensor and Cutter options.
Bit Assignment
Printer Option
0
Cutter
1
N/A
2
Present Sensor
3
N/A
Table 4-1: Software Switch Bit Assignment
Use the bit assignment table above to determine the command value n in the binary table below (e.g.,
the command value 5 sets the bits 0 and 2 to ‘1’).
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
29
System-Level Command Functions
Command Values for Bits Assigned
n Value
Bit
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
4
0
1
0
0
5
0
1
0
1
Table 4-2: Software Switch Binary
STX v
Request Firmware Version
This command causes the printer to send its version string (this data is the same as that printed on the
configuration label). The version may be different from printer to printer.
30
Syntax:
<STX>v
Printer Response:
VER: 4308 – 06.06 07/09/2001
<CR>
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
System-Level Command Functions
STX W
Request Memory Module Information
This command requests a memory module directory listing. Results may vary depending on printer
class, model, or firmware version.
Syntax:
<STX>W[b][c]a
Where:
b
s optional – list file size also
c
e optional – list file extension also
a
- Data type:
F
G
L
C
X
N
M
f
*
Sample:
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
Downloaded font
Graphic (Image)
Label format
Configuration file
Language file
Plug-in
Miscellaneous type file
Resident fonts
All types
<STX>WF
Printer response (taken from an H-Class with a downloaded true type font on Module D):
MODULE: D<CR>
S50 92244ttf50<CR>
AVAILABLE BYTES: 945152<CR>
MODULE: G<CR>
AVAILABLE BYTES: 852480<CR>
MODULE: X<CR>
AVAILABLE BYTES: 852480<CR>
MODULE: Y<CR>
AVAILABLE BYTES: 852480<CR>
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
31
System-Level Command Functions
STX w
Test Flash Memory Module
This command tests the Flash memory module. The time for each test will vary from 20 to 120
seconds, depending upon the size of the module. All stored data will be destroyed. If no module is
present, there will be no printer response.
Syntax:
<STX>wa
Where:
a
- Module designator; see Appendix K.
Printer response format: Module A: xxxxK results
Where:
A
- Module tested.
xxxx
- Module size in kilobytes.
results - Test results given as ‘Good’ or ‘Bad’.
Note:
STX X
E-Class models: Some Flash Memory Expansion options must have Write Enable jumpers installed
to perform this command.
Set Default Module
This command, typically used prior to the loading of PCL-4 bit-mapped fonts (see Font Loading
Commands), is designed to allow the user to select between modules when downloading information.
The default module is one of the following:
1. The first alpha designator of the existing modules if item 2 has not occurred.
2. The module selected by this command.
Syntax:
<STX>Xa
Where:
a
Sample:
<STX>XB
-
Module designator; See Appendix K.
The sample sets ‘B’ as the default module.
32
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
System-Level Command Functions
STX x
Delete File from Module
This command removes a specific file from the specified module. The file name is removed from the
module directory and thus the file cannot be accessed. The actual storage space occupied by the file is
not released. To reclaim deleted file storage space use <STX>z to pack module.
Syntax:
<STX>xmtnn…n<CR>
Where:
m
- Module designator; see Appendix K.
t
- The file type identification code:
G
L
F
S
C
X
N
M
u
nn…n
Sample:
-
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
Image file
Label format file
Downloaded bit-mapped font file
Downloaded scalable font file
Configuration file
Language file
Plug-in file
Miscellaneous file type
Unknown type – must use extension if applicable
The file to delete, where:
Font (bitmapped), the three character font identifier;
Font (scalable), the two character font identifier;
Graphic name, up to sixteen alphanumeric characters; and,
Label format name, up to sixteen alphanumeric characters.
<STX>xDS50<CR>
This sample deletes a downloaded scalable font with ID 50 from module D.
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
33
System-Level Command Functions
STX Y
Output Sensor Values
This command causes a sensor value response. When <STX>Y is received, the printer will respond
with the digitally converted values of the internal analog sensors (see below). To repeat the display of
values, send the printer a ‘SPACE’ character (20 hexadecimal); or, send <ESC> to terminate this
function.
Non-Display Models: The printer must be in Test Mode for the command to function. To enable the
Test Mode see the <STX>KD command.
Display-Equipped Models: The printer must have Feedback Characters enabled for this command to
function. (Feedback Mode [Characters] can be enabled via command or menu setting; see the
<STX>KcFM command or the Operator’s Manual for additional information).
Syntax:
<STX>Y
Printer response:
Thermistor ADC: 0048 Reflective ADC: 0000
Transmissive ADC: 0204 Paperout ADC: 0000 24 Volt ADC:
0217 Contrast ADC: 0093 TOF Adjust ADC: 0170 Ribbon
ADC: 0125 Battery Level: Good
<CR>
Where:
Paperout ADC:
0225 indicates paper is present;
0000 indicates paper is not present.
Battery level: Good indicates a sufficient battery charge;
Low indicates an insufficient charge.
Notes:
• Equipped sensors may vary with printer, model, and options.
• Some readings require printer-controlled paper movement to produce a meaningful value.
• Media Sensor readings require the appropriate sensor selection, transmissive (<STX>e) or
reflective (<STX>r), and label stock in the Media Sensor.
STX y
Select Font Symbol Set
This command selects the scalable font symbol set. The selected symbol set remains active until
another symbol set is selected. See the <STX>KS command and Appendices E, I, and H for more
information. Option dependant, and not all symbol sets can be used with all fonts.
Syntax:
<STX>ySxx
Where:
S
-
Byte-size designation; see Appendix H:
S = Single byte symbol sets.
U = Double byte symbol sets.
xx
-
Symbol set selection.
Sample:
<STX>ySPM
The sample selects the PC-850 multilingual set.
34
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
System-Level Command Functions
STX Z
Print Configuration Label
This command causes the printer to produce a Database Configuration Label. To capture all printed
information, use the labels as wide as the maximum print width (see Appendix K) and at least four
inches (102 mm) long.
Syntax:
<STX>Z
Printer response:
FRI SEPTEMBER 026, 1997 19:29 244
VER: E4304 - 04.06 08/24/01
BOOT 83-2329-04A
CODE 83-2325-04F
FONT 83-2337-01A
CPLD 59-2157-01C
SYSTEM RAM CHECKS____ GOOD
SYSTEM RAM SIZE___ 2016 KBYTES
SYSTEM RAM AVAIL__ 1264 KBYTES
REG POWER SUPPLY__ NO
DIRECT THERMAL
COMMUNICATIONS NOT DETECTED
9600,8,N
EDGE
SOP ADJUST________ 128
PRESENT ADJUST____ 128
TOF LOW___________
0
TOF DELTA_________ 10
TOF GAIN__________ 10
OOS MAXVOLT_______
2
INPUT VALUES
PAPER_____________
DARKNESS__________
TRAN______________
REFL______________
RIBM______________
THR_______________
24V_______________
COUNTER INFORMATION
ABSOLUTE VALUES 9-18-1999
LENGTH____
773 INCHES
TIME______
20 HOURS
RESETTABLE VALUES 9-22-1999
LENGTH____
576 INCHES
TIME______
10 HOURS
255
131
255
149
87
48
223
MEMORY CONFIGURATION
INTERNAL MODULE______ 128
SCALABLE FONTS_______
64
LABEL SIZE
0410:02218 IN
Note:
STX z
Printed information will vary according to printer, model, firmware version, and options.
Pack Module
This command causes the printer to reclaim all storage space associated with all deleted files on the
specified module (see <STX>X and <STX>x).
Syntax:
<STX>zm
Where:
m
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
-
The module identification character, see Appendix K.
35
System-Level Command Functions
36
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
Extended System-Level Command Functions
Introduction
Issued in the same context as System-Level Commands, the Extended System-Level Commands expand
certain System-Level Commands to provide extra degree of printer control.
Memory Configuration (Non-Display Models only)
STX K
This command configures the available DRAM (including any installed optional DRAM) as a method
for managing printer memory. Memory can be assigned to specific entities or functions in units of
4KB blocks. The allocation(s) set by this command, draw from the same memory pool, affecting
maximum print length and label throughput (see note below). The printer executes the memory
configuration specified by the command during the next idle period following its receipt, and is stored
in Flash memory then reinstated upon a power-up or reset. If the total requested memory allocation
exceeds the configurable memory available, contains no fields, or for configurations not specified, the
command will be rejected and the printer will assume its previous configuration. Any of the three
fields are optional, and are separated by the colon. Brackets indicate optional fields.
Syntax:
<STX>Kix[:jy][:kz]<CR>
Sample:
<STX>KM0020:S0015<CR>
In the sample, memory is allocated 20*4*1024 bytes for module space and 15*4*1024 bytes for the
scalable cache.
Where: i, j, k are M, S, or W; x, y, z are four-digit maximum numbers of 4K byte blocks or
inches/100 or (mm/10) as described below.
M
Represents the start of a sequence (up to five characters) that assigns memory to the Internal
Module. If this field does not appear, then the Internal Module is not affected. If no Internal
Module exists, it will be created and formatted. Existing Internal Modules will be erased, resized and formatted. The number that follows the M is a decimal number (up to four digits) that
specifies the size in 4KB blocks of memory to assign to the Internal Module. A value of “0000”
will delete the Internal Module (see Appendix J for additional information).
S
Represents the start of a sequence (up to five characters) that assigns the amount of internal
memory allocated to the smooth scalable font processor. This field is optional; if it does not
appear, the current amount of memory assigned to the smooth scalable font processor will
remain unchanged. The allocation must be at least 15 (60KB) to print scalable fonts, and at least
30 for double-byte fonts. The number that follows the S is a decimal number (up to four digits)
that specifies the size in 4 KB blocks to assign to the smooth scalable font processor. Any value
less than the minimum requirement results in the amount assigned to be zero (0), thereby
disabling the printing of smooth scalable fonts. The recommended value is 0025 (100KB).
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
37
Extended System-Level Command Functions
W
Represents the start of a sequence (up to five characters) that sets the printable label width.
Setting a width smaller than the natural (maximum) width of the printer effectively extends
printable label length. This field is optional; if it does not appear, the current printable label
width is left unchanged. The number that follows the W is a decimal number (up to four digits)
that specifies the printable label width in either 100ths of an inch or in millimeters, depending on
the current units setting of the printer (imperial or metric). If the value specified exceeds the
printable width of the printer, the printable label width is set to the maximum. If the value
specified is less than the minimum value allowed (200) then the printable label width is set to the
minimum allowed value.
Notes: (1) Label printing requirements may be computed as bytes (label print length * width allocation *
print head resolution / 8). For maximum throughput, the memory allocated should allow for a
minimum of three times the computed requirement, or the available label length (as determined by
<STX>KQ command) should be three times the label print length.
(2) These commands will result in a system reset for the EX2.
STX K}E
Empty Sensor Calibration (Non-Display Models only)
This command causes the printer to determine and save the calibration value for an empty media
sensor condition. This calibration function should be performed when no material is installed in
the media sensor. Depending upon the printer model, different front panel LED flash sequences
and printer responses (below) will indicate calibration progress and outcome; see the
corresponding printer operator manual for LED flash sequences details.
STX K}M
Printer Response
Alternate
REMOVE STOCK[CR ]
N/A
ENTER TO CONTINUE[CR]
N/A
PASSED CALIBRATION[CR]
FAILED CALIBRATION[CR]
Manual Media Calibration (Non-Display Models only)
This command causes the printer to save the sampled calibration values as an operator places
different portions of label stock within the media sensor. Depending upon the printer model,
different front panel LED flash sequences and printer responses (below) will indicate calibration
progress and outcome; see the corresponding printer operator manual for LED flash sequences
details. Sending <ESC> to the printer instead of <CR> will terminate the process and leave the
TOF Sensor values unchanged.
38
Printer Response
Alternate
LOAD STOCK[CR ]
ENTER TO CONTINUE[CR ]
N/A
LOAD MARK[CR ]
ENTER TO CONTINUE[CR ]
LOAD GAP[CR ]
REMOVE STOCK[CR ]
ENTER TO CONTINUE[CR ]
N/A
PASSED CALIBRATION[CR ]
FAILED CALIBRATION[CR ]
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
Extended System-Level Command Functions
STX K}Q
Quick Media Calibration (Non-Display Models only)
This command causes the printer to move media, sample, and then save sensor samples as
calibration values. This calibration function should be performed with media installed in the
printer. Depending upon the printer model, different front panel LED flash sequences and printer
responses (below) will indicate calibration progress and outcome; see the corresponding printer
operator manual for LED flash sequences details.
STX KaR
Printer Response
Alternate
FAILED CALIBRATION[CR ]
ADJUST GAIN SETTING[CR ]
N/A
PASSED CALIBRATION[CR ]
FAILED CALIBRATION[CR ]
Read Data from RFID Tag
(Direct Mode – Generic Read/Write Interface)
This command instructs the RFID device to read data from the tag and then place that data into a
replaceable field. It is expected that the tag transponder will be within the read / write distance of the
RFID programming device; otherwise, “Void” will be printed in the text or bar code label field.
Syntax:
<STX>KaRAaaabbbcdee<CR>
Where:
A
-
Optional – for data in the ASCII format.
aaa
-
The number of bytes to read.
bbb
-
HF - Starting block number (000
maximum block number).*
UHF – Should be 000.
c
-
Command 1. Reserved. Should be 0.
d
-
Command 2. Reserved. Should be 0.
ee
-
Field number in which to place the data (must be 01, 02, 03, etc.)
matching the order of Label Formatting command U.
Note: The 00 value will send read data to the host with no printing.
Sample:
<STX>L
1911A1802000010TEXT
U
X
<STX>KaR0000010001
<STX>G
The sample creates a replaceable text field (01), recalls data from the RFID tag block zero (reading
only one block), and prints the data in the location specified by the replaceable field. Since there are
two digits per each hex value, replaceable fields should be twice as long than if using ASCII data
(e.g., the character “A” would be returned as “41”).
* Dependent upon transponder manufacturer.
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
39
Extended System-Level Command Functions
STX KaW
Write Data to RFID Tag
(Direct Mode – Generic Read/Write Interface)
This command instructs the RFID device to write data to the tag. It is expected that the tag
transponder will be within the read / write distance of the RFID programming device; otherwise, a
warning will occur and a warning message (Read / Write Fail) will be displayed.
Syntax:
Where:
<STX>KaWAaaabbbcdee…e<CR>
Aaaa
- Optional – for data in the ASCII format, followed by the byte
count (000-999).
bbb
- HF – Starting block number (000
maximum block number).*
UHF – Should be 000.
c
- Command 1. Reserved for Future (should be 0)
d
- Command 2. Reserved for Future (should be 0)
ee…e
- Data to be encoded on RFID tag (HF – the last used block will be
null-padded, if necessary).
Note:
Sample:
UHF ASCII formats must be 8 or 12 characters; and, UHF
Hexadecimal formats must be 16 or 24 character pairs.
<STX>KaW0000054455354[CR]
The sample writes the data “TEST” at block zero.
* Dependent on transponder manufacturer.
STX Kb
Backfeed Time Delay
(Non-Display Models only)
The backfeed time delay command controls the time a printed label is allowed to remain “presented”
before being retracted to the start of print position.
40
Syntax:
<STX>Kbnnn<CR>
Where:
nnn
- Seconds/10
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
Extended System-Level Command Functions
STX KC
Get Configuration
This command returns the configuration of the printer. The form of the returned data is similar to that
of a printed Configuration Label. This command should be parsed by KEYWORDS, not by
Character POSITIONS. Each line is terminated by a CR (0x0d) & LF (0x0a). Datamax will
make every effort to keep Keyword consistent.
Syntax:
<STX>KC<CR>
Printer response:
CONFIGURATION
TUE 02:01PM
01AUG2005
PRINTER KEY:
4308-TB10-010327494
APPLICATION
VERSION:
83-2284-06E
06.06 07/09/2001
BOOT LOADER:
83-2269-03D 03.04
10/30/2000
SYSTEM INFORMATION
PRINT BUFFER SIZE:
280 in.
FLASH SIZE:
4 MB
RAM TEST:
PASS
OPTIONAL
LANGUAGES:
FRANCAIS
ITALIANO
DEUTSCH
ESPAÑOL
CONFIGURATION
FILE:
NONE
MEDIA SETTINGS
MEDIA TYPE
THERMAL TRANSFER
SENSOR TYPE
GAP
LABEL LENGTH
04.00 in.
MAXIMUM LABEL
LENGTH
•30.00 in.
PAPER OUT DISTANCE
00.25 in.
LABEL WIDTH
4.16 in.
SENSOR CALIBRATION
PAPER SENSOR LEVEL
144
GAP SENSOR LEVEL
30
EMPTY SENSOR LEVEL
0
SENSOR GAIN
10
PRINT CONTROL
HEAT
10
PRINT SPEED
6.0in/sec
FEED SPEED
6.0in/sec
REVERSE SPEED
4.0in/sec
ROW OFFSET
00.00 in.
COLUMN OFFSET
00.00 in.
PRESENT DISTANCE
0.00 in.
CUSTOM
ADJUSTMENTS:
DARKNESS
32
ROW ADJUST
64 DOTS
COLUMN ADJUST
0 DOTS
PRESENT ADJUST
64 DOTS
PRINTER OPTIONS
MODULES
A: NOT INSTALLED
B: NOT INSTALLED
D: FORMATTED
F: NOT INSTALLED
G: FORMATTED
X: FORMATTED
Y: 83-2296-01C
Z: NOT INSTALLED
PRESENT SENSOR
NOT INSTALLED
CUTTER
NOT INSTALLED
GPIO PORT:
NOT INSTALLED
SYSTEM SETTINGS
FACTORY SETTING
FILE
NONE
INTERNAL MODULE
1024 KB
DEFAULT MODULE
D
SCALEABLE FONT
CACHE
312 KB
SINGLE BYTE
SYMBOLS
PC-850
MULTILINGUAL
DOUBLE BYTE
SYMBOLS
UNICODE
ABSOLUTE COUNTER
3782 in.
27MAR2001
RESETTABLE COUNTER
205 in.
27MAR2001
FORMAT ATTRIBUTES
XOR
IMAGING MODE
MULTIPLE LABEL
PAUSE MODE
DISABLED
SELECT SECURITY
DISABLED
PEEL MODE
DISABLED
UNITS OF MEASURE
IMPERIAL
SOP EMULATION
DISABLED
BACK AFTER PRINT
DISABLED
MENU LANGUAGE
ENGLISH
COMMUNICATIONS
SERIAL PORT A:
BAUD RATE
9600 BPS
PROTOCOL
BOTH
PARITY
NONE
DATA BITS
8
STOP BITS
1
SERIAL PORT B:
NOT INSTALLED
PARALLEL PORT A:
PORT DIRECTION
UNI-DIRECTIONAL
PORT STATUS
DISABLED
PARALLEL PORT B:
PORT DIRECTION
BI-DIRECTIONAL
PORT STATUS
DISABLED
NIC ADAPTER:
DMXNET INACTIVE
HOST SETTINGS:
HOST TIMEOUT
10 SEC
CONTROL CODES
STANDARD CODES
FEEDBACK
CHARACTERS
DISABLED
ESC SEQUENCES
ENABLED
HEAT COMMAND
ENABLED
SPEED COMMANDS
ENABLED
DIAGNOSTICS
HEX DUMP MODE
DISABLED
PRINT TEST
RATE(min)
0
SENSOR READINGS
THR TRAN RIBM 24V
132 141 159 178
PS HD RANK
000 254 000
RIBBON SENSOR
LIMITS
RIBBON ADC LOW
105
RIBBON ADC HIGH
182
END OF LIST
Note: Formatted form of displayed information will vary with printer, model, firmware version, and equipped
options.
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
41
Extended System-Level Command Functions
STX Kc
Configuration Set
This command specifies the Power-up Configuration parameter values for the printer and is
equivalent to using other system commands followed by the <SOH>U. This command is intended
for easily configuring a custom setup, but NOT for dynamic configuration changes.
Configuration commands are examined for differences relative to the current configuration; the
command has no impact when there are no differences. Display-equipped models will reset upon
completion of a command stream containing parameter value changes; non-display models perform
this reset only for certain functions, such as memory allocation. In any case, no commands should be
sent to the printer until this reset is complete. These are some highlights of the command:
These parameter values are equivalent to changing the respective menu settings and do not affect
the factory default settings of the printer.
If separated by a semi-colon (;), multiple parameter values may be sent in a single command
stream; see sample below.
All values are stored in Flash memory and remain in effect until new values are received or until
factory defaults are restored.
If system commands are sent that override the Power-up Configuration value(s), the Power-up
Configuration value(s) will be restored the next time the printer is powered ‘On’ or reset.
These parameters are the same as those found in the Setup Menu (non-display models), or as
those found in the Menu System (display-equipped models). The respective functions are
documented in the appropriate Operator’s or Maintenance Manual. Not all commands are
effective on all Class printers.
Note: Illegal or out of range parameter values may have unpredictable results. In addition, Media sensing
scaling values, TOF Bias, etc. may not be effective on other printers of the same type due to
hardware tolerances.
Syntax:
<STX>Kcaa1val1[;aaIvalI][;aanvaln]<CR>
Where:
aa1, aaI, aan
- Are two letter parameter names.
val1, valI, valn
- Are parameter values, with ranges appropriate for
the associated parameter.
Sample:
<STX>KcPA120;CL600;STC<CR>
The sample sets the Present Adjust to 120 dots, the Continuous Label Length to 6 inches, and the
Sensor Type to Continuous.
The following table (constructed alphabetically by parameter name) summarizes the different
Configuration Set command parameters, value ranges, valid printer models, and menu item and
command equivalents (where applicable). If no command equivalent is given, or where general
clarification is necessary for the command, descriptions (listed alphabetically by parameter
pneumonic) immediately follow this table.
42
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
Extended System-Level Command Functions
Configuration Set Commands
<STX>Kc
Parameter Name
Parameter
Pneumonic
Alignment Length
AL
Backup After Print
BA
Value /
Range
Units /
Interpretation
0 – 999
1/100 inch
Y, N
Y = Enabled,
N = Disabled
Applicable
Printer Type
Menu Item Equivalent
or Menu Item Number
Non-Display
19
M1 & M2
Non-Display
18
Display-Equipped
System Settings
EX2
N/A
Command
Equivalent
N/A
N/A
Backup Delay
BD
0 – 255
1/50 second
Display-Equipped
System Settings
N/A
Backup Label
BL
0, 3, 4
0 = Disabled,
3 = Active Low,
4 = Active High
Display-Equipped
Printer Options
N/A
alpha
character
Model specific ranges;
see Appendix L.
Display-Equipped
Print Control
BS or bS
Y, N
Y = Enabled,
N = Disabled
Backup (Reverse) Speed
British Pound
Buzzer Enable
BP
BZ
Y, N
Y = Enabled,
N = Disabled
pa
EX2
Display-Equipped
N/A
N/A
N/A
EX2
A-Class
System Settings
N/A
Table 5-1: Configuration Set Commands
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
43
Extended System-Level Command Functions
<STX>Kc
Parameter Name
Column Adjust [1]
Column Adjust Fine Tune
Column Offset
Comm Heat Commands
Comm Speed Commands
Parameter
Pneumonic
CA
CF
CO
Value /
Range
Units /
Interpretation
Applicable
Printer Type
Menu Item Equivalent
or Menu Item Number
Display-Equipped
Print Control
xxx dots
Resolution specific;
see Appendix K,
and see
Column Adjust Fine
Tune
Non-Display
28
M1 & M2
Non-Display
7
Display-Equipped
Print Control
+ / – dots
0 – 9999
Resolution specific;
see Appendix K.
Y = Enabled,
N = Disabled
1, 0
1 = Enabled,
0 = Disabled
CH
Y, N
Y = Enabled,
N = Disabled
1, 0
1 = Enabled,
0 = Disabled
CS
N/A
N/A
EX2
N/A
Display-Equipped
Print Control
EX2
N/A
Display-Equipped
Communications
Non-Display
26
M1 & M2
Non-Display
25
Display-Equipped
Communications
Non-Display
25
M1 & M2
Non-Display
26
1/100 in.
Y, N
Command
Equivalent
Cnnnn
N/A
N/A
Table 5-1: Configuration Set Commands (continued)
44
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
Extended System-Level Command Functions
<STX>Kc
Parameter Name
Parameter
Pneumonic
Value /
Range
Units /
Interpretation
Applicable
Printer Type
Menu Item Equivalent
or Menu Item Number
Command
Equivalent
Display-Equipped
Communications
EX2
N/A
Non-Display (except
M1, M2, and EX2)
27
Display-Equipped
Media Settings
M1 & M2
Non-Display
12
Non-Display
10
Display-Equipped
Communications
M1 & M2
Non-Display
11
Non-Display
9
<STX>KD
N/A
Y, N
Comm TOF Commands
Y = Enabled,
N = Disabled
CT
0 – 255
(128 nominal)
Continuous Label Length
Control Codes
Cut Behind
Cutter Equipped
CL
CC
CB
0 – 9999
S, 1, 2
1/100 in.
S = Standard,
1 = Alternate,
2 = Alternate-2
<STX>c
N/A
0–9
Queued label count
Display-Equipped
Printer Options
A/Y, E, N/D
A or Y = Auto,
E = Enabled,
N or D = Disabled
Display-Equipped
Printer Options
A, E/Y, N
A = Auto,
E or Y = Enabled,
N = Disabled
Non-Display
CE
N/A
<STX>V
4
Table 5-1: Configuration Set Commands (continued)
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
45
Extended System-Level Command Functions
<STX>Kc
Parameter Name
Darkness
Parameter
Pneumonic
DK
Value /
Range
1 – 64
Units /
Interpretation
DM
Menu Item Equivalent
or Menu Item Number
Display-Equipped
Print Control
N/A
D, G
Default Module
Applicable
Printer Type
N/A
EX2
N/A
Display-Equipped
System Settings
<STX>X
Module Letter
A, B
Command
Equivalent
EX2
[3]
N/A
Delay Rate
(Test Label Formats)
DR
0 – 120
Seconds
Display-Equipped
Diagnostics
N/A
Disable Symbol Set
Selection
NS
Y, N
Y = Enabled,
N = Disabled
Non-Display
N/A
N/A
AA – ZZ, printer
resident symbol set
Display-Equipped
System Settings
DS
2-Byte alpha
character
EX2
N/A
300/400/600 DPI
Display-Equipped
System Settings
Display-Equipped
Media Settings
Double Byte Symbol Set
DPI Emulation
DE
200, 300,
400, 600
Dots per inch
Empty Sensor Level
EV
0 – 255
N/A
<STX>y,
ySxx
N/A
N/A
EX2
N/A
Display-Equipped
End Character
EN
D
N/A
N/A
N/A
EX2
Table 5-1: Configuration Set Commands (continued)
46
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
Extended System-Level Command Functions
<STX>Kc
Parameter Name
Parameter
Pneumonic
Value /
Range
Units /
Interpretation
Applicable
Printer Type
Menu Item Equivalent
or Menu Item Number
Command
Equivalent
Display-Equipped
Printer Options
N/A
Display-Equipped
Communications
End Of Print
EP
1, 2, 3, 4
1 = Low Pulse,
2 = High Pulse,
3 = Active Low,
4 = Active High
ESC Sequences
ES
Y, N
Y = Enabled,
N = Disabled
Exact Time
ET
Fault Handling
Feed Speed
FH
Y, N
L, D, R, B
Y = Enabled,
N = Disabled
See Table 5-2.
SS or sS
Alpha
character
Model specific ranges;
see Appendix L.
FM
Y, N
Y = Enabled,
N = Disabled
Feedback Mode
N/A
EX2
N/A
Non-Display (except
M1, M2, and EX2)
24
Display-Equipped
System Settings
EX2
N/A
M1 & M2
Non-Display
24
Display-Equipped
Print Control
Display-Equipped
Communications
Font Emulation
FE
0, 1, 2
N/A
Sa
<STX>a
EX2
0 = No Substitution
1 = Sub CG Times SA0
2 = Sub User S50
N/A
N/A
Display
N/A
N/A
Non-Display
Table 5-1: Configuration Set Commands (continued)
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
47
Extended System-Level Command Functions
<STX>Kc
Parameter Name
Format Attributes
Gain Reflective Value
Gap / Mark Value
GPIO Equipped
GPIO Slew
Head Bias
Parameter
Pneumonic
FA
GR
GM
GE
GS
HB
Value /
Range
Units /
Interpretation
Applicable
Printer Type
Menu Item Equivalent
or Menu Item Number
Display-Equipped
System Settings
X, O, T
X = XOR,
O = Opaque,
T = Transparent
0 – 255
0 – 255
A, V, N
0–4
L, R
An
EX2
N/A
Display-Equipped
Media Settings
N/A
N/A
EX2
N/A
Display-Equipped
Media Settings
N/A
A = Applicator,
V = Verifier,
N = Disabled
0 = Standard,
1 = Low Pulse,
2 = High Pulse,
3 = Active Low,
4 = Active High
L = Leftmost dot is zero,
R = Rightmost dot is
zero
Command
Equivalent
N/A
EX2
N/A
Display-Equipped
Printer Options
Non-Display
25
M1 & M2
Non-Display
23
Display-Equipped
Printer Options
N/A
N/A
Non-Display
N/A
A-Class
System Settings
N/A
Table 5-1: Configuration Set Commands (continued)
48
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
Extended System-Level Command Functions
<STX>Kc
Parameter Name
Parameter
Pneumonic
Head Cleaning
Heat
Host Timeout
Ignore Control Codes
Ignore Distances
Imaging Mode
HC
HE
HT
Value /
Range
Units /
Interpretation
0 – 9999
Inches (or centimeters)
multiplied by 1000
0 – 30
1 – 60
N/A
Applicable
Printer Type
Menu Item Equivalent
or Menu Item Number
Display-Equipped
Media Settings
N/A
EX2
N/A
Display-Equipped
Print Control
Non-Display
23
M1 & M2
Non-Display
21
Display-Equipped
Communications
Seconds
IL
EX2
N/A
Y, N
Y = Enabled,
N = Disabled
Display-Equipped
Communications
1, 0
1 = Enabled,
0 = Disabled
Non-Display
N/A
1, 0
1 = Enabled,
0 = Disabled
Non-Display
N/A
Display-Equipped
System Settings
EX2
N/A
M1 & M2
Non-Display
22
M, S
M = Multiple label,
S = Single label
Hnn
N/A
IC
IE
Command
Equivalent
N/A
N/A
N/A
Table 5-1: Configuration Set Commands (continued)
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
49
Extended System-Level Command Functions
<STX>Kc
Parameter Name
Input Mode
Internal Module
Parameter
Pneumonic
EM
IM
Label Alignment
LA
Label Rotation
Label Store
Label Width
Value /
Range
0, 1
Units /
Interpretation
0 = DPL,
1 = Line
100 – up to
maximum
available, see
Appendix K
Kbytes
0 – 128
4 Kbytes
(0 = disabled)
Applicable
Printer Type
Menu Item Equivalent
or Menu Item Number
Display-Equipped
System Settings
Non-Display
21
M1 & M2
Non-Display
19
Display-Equipped
System Settings
M1 & M2
Non-Display
15
Non-Display
17
Non-Display
18
M1 & M2
Non-Display
17
Command
Equivalent
N/A
N/A
<STX>KM
N/A
N, A, Y
See Table 5-3.
LR
Y, N
Y = Rotate 180
N = None
Display-Equipped
System Settings
N/A
LM
F, S
F = Fields,
S = States & Fields
Display-Equipped
System Settings
N/A
Display-Equipped
Media Settings
M1 & M2
Non-Display
13
Non-Display
15
LW
0075 – head
width, see
Appendix K
1/100 inch
N/A
<STX>KW
Table 5-1: Configuration Set Commands (continued)
50
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
Extended System-Level Command Functions
<STX>Kc
Parameter Name
Parameter
Pneumonic
Value /
Range
Units /
Interpretation
Applicable
Printer Type
Menu Item Equivalent
or Menu Item Number
Command
Equivalent
LS
String
Language Name
Display-Equipped
System Settings
N/A
Display-Equipped
System Settings
M1 & M2
Non-Display
20
N, A, P, L, M
N = None,
A = Allegro,
P = Prodigy,
L = Prodigy Plus,
M = Prodigy Max
X = XL
Non-Display
22
Display-Equipped
Media Settings
0 – 255
N/A
Language Select
N, A, P, L
Legacy Emulation
Mark Value
LE
MV
Maximum Length Ignore
SM
0, 1
0 = Processed normally,
1 = Ignore
Maximum Length
ML
0 – 9999
1/100 inch
Media Type
MT
D, T
D = Direct,
T = Thermal Transfer
N/A
EX2
N/A
Display-Equipped
Communications
Display-Equipped
Media Settings
MM
U, A
U = User,
A = Advanced
N/A
<STX>M
EX2
N/A
Display-Equipped
Media Settings
M1 & M2
Non-Display
N/A
1
Non-Display
Menu Mode
N/A
Display-Equipped
<STX>KD
System Settings
N/A
Table 5-1: Configuration Set Commands (continued)
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
51
Extended System-Level Command Functions
<STX>Kc
Parameter Name
Parameter
Pneumonic
Value /
Range
Units /
Interpretation
Z, G
Module Command
Network Setup
Menu Item Equivalent
or Menu Item Number
Command
Equivalent
N/A
N/A
Display-Equipped
See Table 5-4.
MCC
NT
Applicable
Printer Type
B
EX2
D, G, I, N, P,
S, T, U, w,
W, Y, Z
Display-Equipped
See Table 5-5.
N/A
N/A
EX2
N/A
No Paper Min [2]
(Out Of Stock)
TN
0 – 16
.1 Volt DC
Non-Display
11
N/A
No Reprint
NR
Y, N
Y = Enabled,
N = Disabled
Non-Display
26
N/A
Option Feedback
OF
D, Rx, S
See Table 5-6.
Display-Equipped
Communications
N/A
Display-Equipped
Media Settings
Paper Empty
PO
EX2
N/A
Display-Equipped
Media Settings
Paper Value
PV
0 – 9999
0 – 255
1/100 inch
N/A
N/A
N/A
EX2
N/A
Table 5-1: Configuration Set Commands (continued)
52
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
Extended System-Level Command Functions
<STX>Kc
Parameter Name
Parameter
Pneumonic
Parallel Direction
Password Set
Pause Mode
Peel Mode
Present Adjust [1]
Present Adjust Fine Tune
PP
PW
PM
PE
PA
PJ
Value /
Range
xz
Units /
Interpretation
Four characters
(or, if security is enabled
then eight characters).
Y, N
Y = Enabled,
N = Disabled
xxx dots
+ / – dots
Menu Item Equivalent
or Menu Item Number
Display-Equipped
Communications
See Table 5-7.
A – Z,
0–9
Y, N
Applicable
Printer Type
Y = Enabled,
N = Disabled
Model specific,
see Appendix K;
and, see
Present Adjust Fine
Tune.
Dots (model specific),
see Appendix K.
Command
Equivalent
N/A
EX2
N/A
Display-Equipped
System Settings
Display-Equipped
System Settings
N/A
<STX>J
EX2
N/A
Display-Equipped
System Settings
N/A
EX2
N/A
Display-Equipped
Print Control
M1 & M2
Non-Display
8
Non-Display
6
Display-Equipped
Print Control
Non-Display (except
M1 & M2)
6
N/A
N/A
Table 5-1: Configuration Set Commands (continued)
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
53
Extended System-Level Command Functions
<STX>Kc
Parameter Name
Present Distance
Parameter
Pneumonic
Value /
Range
Units /
Interpretation
PD
0 – 400
1/100 inch
Applicable
Printer Type
Menu Item Equivalent
or Menu Item Number
Display-Equipped
Print Control
<STX>Kf
EX2
Present Sensor Equipped
A/Y, E, N/D
A or Y = Auto,
E = Enabled,
N or D = Disabled
A, Y, N
A = Auto,
Y = Enabled,
N = Disabled
0 – 64
N/A
PS
[4]
Display-Equipped
Printer Level
Print Speed
PC
PL
pS
000000 –
FFFFFF
Hex Codes
Alpha
character
Model specific ranges;
see Appendix L.
N/A
Printer Options
<STX>V
M1 & M2
Non-Display
3
<STX>V,
<STX>KD
Non-Display
Display-Equipped
Print Contrast
Command
Equivalent
Print Control
N/A
Non-Display
N/A
Display-Equipped
System Settings
EX2
N/A
Display-Equipped
Print Control
EX2
N/A
N/A
Pa
Query Configuration
QQ
Q, K
N/A
All
Configuration Label
N/A
Reflective No Paper [2]
Minimum (Out Of Stock)
RN
0 – 16
.1 Volt DC
Non-Display (except
M1 & M2)
11
N/A
Table 5-1: Configuration Set Commands (continued)
54
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
Extended System-Level Command Functions
<STX>Kc
Parameter Name
Parameter
Pneumonic
Value /
Range
Units /
Interpretation
RV
0 – 255
N/A
Reflective Paper Value
Applicable
Printer Type
Menu Item Equivalent
or Menu Item Number
Display-Equipped
Media Settings
Command
Equivalent
N/A
EX2
N/A
Reflective TOF Bias [2]
RB
0 – 50
.1 Volt DC
Non-Display (except
M1, M2, and EX2)
14
N/A
Reflective TOF Delta [2]
RD
0 – 50
.1 Volt DC
Non-Display (except
M1, M2, and EX2)
13
N/A
Reflective TOF Gain [2]
RG
0 – 15
.1 Volt DC
Non-Display (except
M1, M2, and EX2)
12
N/A
Retract Delay
RW
1 – 255
Specified value,
multiplied by ten
milliseconds
Display-Equipped
Printer Options
N/A
Rewinder Equipped
RM
A/Y, E, N/D
A or Y = Auto,
E = Enabled,
N or D = Disabled
Display-Equipped
Printer Options
N/A
Rewinder Adjust
RR
-xx, +yy
Applied torque, where
-30 to +15 is the valid
range.
Display-Equipped
Printer Options
N/A
RFID Configuration
RI
M, A, D, S,
L, R, W, E, P,
T, N, U, V
See Table 5-8.
Display-Equipped
Printer Options
N/A
Table 5-1: Configuration Set Commands (continued)
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
55
Extended System-Level Command Functions
<STX>Kc
Parameter Name
Ribbon Low Diameter
Parameter
Pneumonic
RL
Value /
Range
100 – 200
Units /
Interpretation
Applicable
Printer Type
Menu Item Equivalent
or Menu Item Number
Display-Equipped
Media Settings
EX2
N/A
1/100 in.
Command
Equivalent
N/A
Ribbon Low Pause
RP
Y, N
Y = Enabled,
N = Disabled
Display-Equipped
Media Settings
N/A
Ribbon Low Signal
RS
3, 4
3 = Active Low,
4 = Active High
Display-Equipped
Print Options
N/A
Ribbon Saver Enable
RE
A/Y, E, N/D
A or Y = Auto,
E = Enabled,
N or D = Disabled
Display-Equipped
Printer Options
<STX>R
Display-Equipped
Print Control
xxxx dots
Model specific, see
Appendix K;
and,
see Row Adjust Fine
Tune
Row Adjust
[1]
Row Adjust Fine Tune
Row Offset
RA
RF
RO
+ / – dots
0 – 9999
Resolution specific; see
Appendix K.
1/100 in.
N/A
M1 & M2
Non-Display
6
Display-Equipped
Printer Control
EX2
N/A
Display-Equipped
Print Control
N/A
Rnnnn
Table 5-1: Configuration Set Commands (continued)
56
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
Extended System-Level Command Functions
<STX>Kc
Parameter Name
Parameter
Pneumonic
Value /
Range
Units /
Interpretation
Applicable
Printer Type
Menu Item Equivalent
or Menu Item Number
Command
Equivalent
SA
0 – 255
(128
nominal)
N/A,
see Row Adjust Fine
Tune
Non-Display (except
M1 & M2)
5
<STX>O
Display-Equipped
System Settings
A, L, P, D
A = Allegro,
L = Prodigy Plus,
P = Prodigy,
D = Disable
SOP Adjust [1]
SOP Emulation
Save As Filename
SE
SF
Alphanumeric
string
N/A
EX2
Display-Equipped
Up to 16 characters
System Settings
Scalable Font Cache
Kbytes
SC
0 – 128
N/A
EX2
Display-Equipped
100 – 8192
N/A
4 Kbytes (0 = disabled)
System Settings
N/A
M1 & M2
Non-Display
14
Non-Display
16
<STX>KS
N/A
N/A
Printer Options
N/A
Display-Equipped
Scalable Heap
SH
0 – 9999
Kbytes
EX2
Scanner Configuration
SN
C, H, M,
D, B, V
See Table 5-11.
Display-Equipped
Table 5-1: Configuration Set Commands (continued)
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
57
Extended System-Level Command Functions
<STX>Kc
Parameter Name
Security Lock
Parameter
Pneumonic
Value /
Range
Units /
Interpretation
Applicable
Printer Type
Menu Item Equivalent
or Menu Item Number
Command
Equivalent
Sl
N, Y, T
See Table 5-9.
Display-Equipped
System Settings
N/A
Media Settings
N/A
Display-Equipped
Sensor Gain Value
SG
0 – 32
N/A
EX2
Display-Equipped
Sensor Type
ST
G, C, R
G = Gap (edge),
C = Continuous,
R = Reflective
M1 & M2
Non-Display
Media Settings
2
Non-Display
Serial Port
Single Byte Symbol Set
Slew Speed
SP
AS
FS
xyz
2-Byte alpha
character
Alpha
character
See Table 5-12.
AA – ZZ, printer
resident symbol set
Model specific ranges;
see Appendix L.
<STX>e,
<STX>r,
<STX>c
<STX>KD
Display-Equipped
Communications
M1 & M2
Non-Display
9 & 10
Non-Display
7&8
Display-Equipped
System Settings
N/A
<STX>KD
<STX>y,
ySxx
Non-Display
N/A
GPIO-Equipped
Print Control
<STX>KZSx
Table 5-1: Configuration Set Commands (continued)
58
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
Extended System-Level Command Functions
Parameter
Pneumonic
Value /
Range
Units /
Interpretation
Applicable
Printer Type
Menu Item Equivalent
or Menu Item Number
Command
Equivalent
Software Switch
SV
Y, N
Y = Processed
N = Ignored
Display-Equipped
Communications
N/A
Start of Print
EQ
3, 4
3 = Active Low,
4 = Active High
Display-Equipped
Printer Options
N/A
Non-Display
20
SL
A, H, P,
C, T, N
See Table 5-10.
<STX>Kc
Parameter Name
Stop Location
N/A
M1 & M2
Non-Display
16
Tear Position
PT
Y, N
Y = Enabled,
N = Disabled
Non-Display (except
M1, M2, and EX2)
20
N/A
TOF Bias [2]
TB
0 – 50
.1 Volt DC
Non-Display (except
M1 & M2)
14
N/A
TOF Delta [2]
TD
0 – 50
.1 Volt DC
Non-Display (except
M1 & M2)
13
N/A
TOF Gain [2]
TG
0 – 15
.1 Volt DC
Non-Display (except
M1 & M2)
12
N/A
Table 5-1: Configuration Set Commands (continued)
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
59
Extended System-Level Command Functions
<STX>Kc
Parameter Name
TOF Precedence
Parameter
Pneumonic
TP
Value /
Range
Units /
Interpretation
Y, N
Y = Enabled,
N = Disabled
Applicable
Printer Type
Unit of Measure
UM
M, I
Command
Equivalent
N/A
N/A
Display-Equipped
EX2
Display-Equipped
M = Metric,
I = Imperial
Menu Item Equivalent
or Menu Item Number
System Settings
<STX>m,
<STX>n
EX2
M1 & M2
Non-Display
5
Display-Equipped
User Terminator
UT
ON
N/A
N/A
N/A
EX2
Verifier Equipped
VE
A/Y, E, N/D
A or Y = Auto,
E = Enabled,
N or D = Disabled
Display-Equipped
Printer Options
<STX>KV
Verifier Type
VT
A, B, C, D
Reserved for future use
Display-Equipped
N/A
N/A
Table 5-1: Configuration Set Commands (continued)
60
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
Extended System-Level Command Functions
<STX>Kc
Parameter Name
Parameter
Pneumonic
Value /
Range
WE
A, C, F, I, L,
M, N, P, R,
T, V, X
WiFi Setup
Units /
Interpretation
Applicable
Printer Type
Menu Item Equivalent
or Menu Item Number
Command
Equivalent
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Display-Equipped
See Table 5-13.
EX2
Display-Equipped
WiFi Security
WS
A, K, S, L,
P, U
See Table 5-14.
EX2
1. Commands are provided for backward compatibility on EX2. The KcQQQ command will respond with the new command equivalent; see associated new commands.
2. The EX2 uses the same Sensor Calibration value setup commands as display model printers.
3. The EX2 will accept Display-Equipped module IDs (D & G) as command parameters for upward compatibility; however, query commands will result in printer responses with
module IDs that are non-display compatible, providing backward compatibility.
4. Present distance changes for EX2 will only be accepted if the Stop Location (SL) is set to “Host.”
Table 5-1: Configuration Set Commands
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
61
Extended System-Level Command Functions
<STX>Kc Parameter Overviews
(AL) Alignment Length – This command, critical for small labels when ‘Label Alignment’ is set
to ‘Yes,’ allows a length (measured from leading edge to leading edge of two successive labels)
to be entered. The measured length must be provided to the nearest hundredth of an inch. For
very small labels, errors of 0.01” can result in noticeable print variations on the labels between
the media sensor and the print head. The number of labels that can be fit between the Media
Sensor and the print head will magnify any error in label alignment length. Errors in measurement
are more favorable on the low side rather than the high side.
Non-Display printers only: The printer will verify the label position using the provided
Alignment Length before printing the first label after power-up.
(AS) Single Byte Symbol Set – This command allows for a default single-byte symbol set. See
<STX>y or ySxx for command details.
(BA) Backup After Print – This command determines the timing of the label back up positioning
when the present distance is set and the GPIO option or Present Sensor option (including Peel and
Present) is enabled. When enabled, the printer immediately backs up the label after the applicatorissued start of print signal is received or the label is removed, resulting in faster throughput. If
disabled, the printer will not initiate repositioning until the next label is ready to print (may help
prevent the curling of the label edge).
(BD) Backup Delay – This command sets a time delay for the retraction of a presented label in
one-fiftieth (1/50) of a second increments.
(BL) Backup Label – This command determines the timing of reverse label motion when the I &
W-Class GPIO option is installed and enabled; see Appendix J for signal details.
(BP) British Pound – This command, when enabled, will automatically switch from the Number
symbol (#) found at 0x23 (default PC-850 Multilingual Symbol Set) to the British Pound symbol
(£) at 0x9C.
(BS or bS) Backup Speed – This command controls the rate of label movement during backup
positioning for start of print, cutting or present distance; see Appendix C for available speed
ranges.
62
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
Extended System-Level Command Functions
(BZ) Buzzer Enable – This command controls the audible signaling device that acknowledges
User Interface entries and, if enabled, sounds printer warning and fault conditions.
(CA) Column Adjust – This command fine-tunes the Column Offset setting by shifting both the
horizontal start of print position and the Label Width termination point to the right in dots (see
Appendix K) to compensate for slight mechanical differences sometimes evident when multiple
printers share label formats. Note that the EX2 accepts this command for backward compatibility
only, limited in range (28-228). The <STX>KcQQQ response will show the Column Adjust Fine
Tune (CF) equivalent value.
(CB) Cut Behind – This command allows the printer to queue a specified number of small labels
before a cut is performed to increase throughput.
(CC) Control Codes – This command, depending upon printer type, allows a change to the prefix
of the software commands interpreted by the printer:
Value
Units /
Interpretation
S
Standard Codes
Hex 01 = SOH command; Hex 02 = STX command; count-by = ^;
Hex 1B = ESC; Hex 0x0D = Carriage Return
1
Alternate Codes
Hex 5E = SOH command; Hex 7E = STX command; count-by = @;
Hex 1B = ESC; Hex 0x0D = Carriage Return
2
Alternate Codes 2
Hex 5E = SOH command; Hex 7E = STX command; count-by = @;
Hex 1B = ESC; Hex 0x7C = Carriage Return
Control Code Definition
(CE) Cutter Equipped – This command allows the printer to sense the cutter option. ‘A’ automatically senses device presence; if undetected, no error is generated. ‘E’ - enables the device,
where its presence must be detected; otherwise, a fault is generated. ‘N’ - disables device
detection. One of these values is returned in response to <STX>KcQQQ. Note that alternate
values are accepted for backward compatibility as follows: For Display-Equipped models ‘Y’ is
equivalent to ‘A’; and, for Non-Display models ‘Y’ is equivalent to ‘E’.
(CF) Column Adjust Fine Tune – This command fine-tunes the Column Offset setting by
shifting both the horizontal start of print position and the Label Width termination point to the
right in dots (see Appendix K) to compensate for slight mechanical differences sometimes
evident when multiple printers share label formats.
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
63
Extended System-Level Command Functions
(CH) Communicated Heat Commands – This command causes the printer to ignore DPL Heat
commands; instead, the Heat value is controlled via the menu setting.
(CL) Continuous Label Length – See <STX>c for command details.
(CO) Column Offset – See Cnnnn for command details.
(CS) Communicated Speed Commands – This command causes the printer to ignore DPL speed
commands; instead, speed values are controlled via the menu setting.
(CT) Communicated TOF Commands – This command causes the printer to ignore DPL TOF
(Gap, Continuous, and Reflective) commands; instead, the sensor type is controlled via the menu
setting.
(DE) DPI Emulation – This command allows printers with higher resolutions to emulate lower
print resolutions, as follows:
•
600 DPI can emulate 300 and 203 DPI resolutions
•
400 DPI can emulate a 203 DPI resolution
(DK) Darkness – This command controls the print head strobe timing to fine-tune the HEAT
setting.
(DM) Default Module – See <STX>X for command details.
(DR) Delay Rate – This command sets the number of minutes to delay between multiple batch
printings of Quick Test Labels.
(DS) Double Byte Symbol Set – See <STX>y or ySxx for command details.
64
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
Extended System-Level Command Functions
(EM) Input Mode – This command determines the printer’s mode of data processing: Standard
DPL, or Line Mode. In Line Mode the printer will not parse character strings; instead, it will
behave as a line printer, where each carriage return terminated line of data will be printed on the
label according to a stored template. See Appendix S for details.
(EN) End Character – This command terminates a <STX>Kc string.
(EP) End of Print – This command defines the programmable signal output that signifies the End
of Print (EOP) process:
Value
Units
End of Print Interpretation
3
Active Low Outputs a logic low (zero) following printing.
4
Active High Outputs a logic high (one) following printing.
1
2
Low Pulse
Outputs a low pulse (approximately 30 milliseconds long) following printing.
High Pulse
Outputs a high pulse (approximately 30 milliseconds long) following
printing.
(EQ) Start of Print – This command defines the type of programmable signal input required to
control the Start of Print (SOP) process:
Value
Units
Start of Print Interpretation
3
Active Low SOP signal must go low for at least 50 milliseconds to initiate printing.
4
Active High SOP signal must go high for at least 50 milliseconds to initiate printing.
(ES) ESC Sequences – This command allows data containing invalid ESC control code
sequences to be processed (helpful because some systems send a “banner” to the printer). When
set to ‘Disabled,’ ESC sequences are ignored and the data is processed. Bitmapped font
downloads are disabled in this mode.
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
65
Extended System-Level Command Functions
(ET) Exact Time – This command set the printer to wait until the system is idle before the next
label’s data and time fields are formatted to eliminate any discrepancy between the buffered and
printed times.
(EV) Empty Sensor Level – This command sets threshold value for the ‘Empty’ media sensor
parameter.
(FA) Format Attribute – See the “An” (in Label Formatting Command Functions) command for
details.
(FE) Font Emulation –This command allows font substitution for all Datamax internal fonts,
allowing a new default font to be defined without changing the host DPL data streams. Selecting
a default font that supports a desired character set could match with third party software to print
native characters without modifying the PC drivers. In other words, match the PC font with the
Printer Font then no interpretation would be required by driver or printer. Depending on host
drivers, the user may have to disable Symbol Set commands and modify the Default Symbol set.
66
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
Extended System-Level Command Functions
(FH) Fault Handling – This command determines the level of user intervention and the
disposition of the label being printed when a fault condition (ribbon out, media out, etc.) occurs.
Value
Units / Interpretation
Selection / Definition
Interaction Level,
where:
In No Reprint Mode (0), printing stops and a fault message is
displayed. After the problem is corrected, the FEED Key must be
pressed to clear the fault. The label in process is not reprinted.
0 = No Reprint;
In Standard Mode (1), printing stops and a fault message is
displayed. After the problem is corrected, the FEED Key must be
pressed to clear the fault. The label in process is reprinted.
1 = Standard;
and,
In Void and Retry Mode (2), depending upon the RETRY COUNT,
one of the following actions when faulted:
• If the Retry Count has not been exceeded, ‘VOID’ is printed on
the label in process and reprinting occurs automatically;
• If the Retry Count has been exceeded, printing stops and a fault
message is displayed. After the problem is corrected, the FEED
Key must be pressed to clear the fault. The label in process is
reprinted; or,
L
2 = Void and Retry
• If the CANCEL Key is pressed, the operator now has the option
of canceling the reprint:
To allow the reprint, press the ESCAPE Key or to cancel the
reprint, press the ENTER Key (the operator now has the option
of canceling the entire label batch by pressing the ENTER Key
again.)
Note: VOID will not be printed when insufficient text space exists (see
VOID DISTANCE, below) or if the fault occurs after the label reaches its
Present Distance at, or above, the TOF).
D
Void Distance
(.10 - 2.00)
Sets the distance (.10 - 2.00) to backup the faulted label to print
‘VOID’ on its trailing edge, which also indirectly establishes the
font size of the void message.
R
Retry Count
(0 – 3)
Only used with the RFIF or Scanner option installed and operating.
Establishes the number of times (0 – 3) the printer will attempt to
reprint a label. If the last label printed in this count has been
voided, the printer will stop and display a fault message.
B
Enable / disable
Y,N
Retract from presented distance prior to feed-clear motion. This
option is intended for use with applicator equipment that may
require certain GPIO signals for proper operation.
Table 5-2: Fault Handling Command
Example: <STX>KcFHD112<CR>
(The example configures the printer to back up and print a one-inch “VOID” message on a
label when a fault is detected; if two successive faults occur during the printing of that label
then the FEED Key must be pressed to clear the fault.)
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
67
Extended System-Level Command Functions
(FM) Feedback Mode – See <STX>a for command details.
(FS) Slew Speed – This command controls the rate of label movement between printing areas
when the GPIO port is used; see Appendix L for ranges.
(GE) GPIO Equipped – This command is used to interface the printer to external controlling
devices (see Appendix J):
Value
Units / Interpretation
GPIO Enable Definition
A
Applicator
Enables the GPIO for a label applicator.
V
Verifier
Enables the GPIO for a bar code verifier.
N
Disabled
Disables the GPIO Port.
(GM) Gap / Mark Value – This command sets threshold value for the media sensor’s ‘gap /
mark’ parameter.
(GR) Gain Reflective Value – This command sets the sensitivity of the reflective media sensor.
(GS) GPIO Slew – This command sets the GPIO slew function and control:
Value
Slew Interpretation
0
Standard (Active Low)
1
Low Pulse *
2
High Pulse *
3
Slews while low (Active Low)
4
Slews while high (Active High)
* Pulse must be at least 60 milliseconds in length. Functions as if pressing the Feed Key, clearing
alarms and advancing media.
68
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
Extended System-Level Command Functions
(HB) Head Bias – This command instructs the printer to switch the dot zero position: as viewed
from the printer’s front panel (or label output side) – when dot zero occupies the left-most
location on the print head then printing is left justified; when dot zero occupies the right-most
location, printing is right justified.
(HC) Head Cleaning – This command controls the print head cleaning routine. The entered value
specifies the inch (or centimeter) count to reach before prompting a print head cleaning. If the
number specified is exceeded three times, the printer will fault until cleaning is initiated.
Note: The number specified is multiplied by one thousand. Zero disables this function.
(HE) Heat – See Hnn for command details.
(HT) Host Timeout – This command controls the number of seconds a communications port must
be idle before the printer may process data from a different port. The value is also used to
“timeout” an image / label format download (i.e., if, at any time, data flow stops before a
complete label format is received, the data will be ignored).
(IC) Ignore Control Codes – This command allows the user to remove control codes (< 20 Hex)
in the data field. The selected line terminator is processed. When enabled, DPL Control Code
(SOH, STX, CR, ESC, and ^) characters are removed from the data string. (Note that some fonts
do have printable characters in this range and they will not be printed when enabled.)
(IE) Ignore Distances – This command, when enabled, prevents <STX>O processing that will
change the start of print position.
(IL) Imaging Mode – This command instructs the printer whether to pre-image the label format:
Value
Units / Interpretation
M
Multiple Label
S
Single Label
Imaging Mode Definition
The printer images multiple labels as memory permits,
achieving the fastest throughput; however, if timestamping, the time will reflect the moment the label is
imaged rather than when actually printed.
The printer images the next label only after the previous
label has been successfully printed. Single processing
provides time-stamps that are more accurate, but it slows
label throughput time.
Note: This selection can affect the accuracy of time-stamped labels and label throughput.
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
69
Extended System-Level Command Functions
(IM) Internal Module – This command sets the number of 1K blocks (or 4K blocks for nondisplay models, see the <STX>KM command) allocated for the internal RAM ‘D’ module.
(LA) Label Alignment – This command prevents labels with lengths that are less than the
distance between the print head and the Media Sensor from being wasted at power-up. See the
appropriate Operator’s Manual for specific information. Unless otherwise noted, the following
information pertains to all non-display models:
Value /
Mode
Media Type
N =
Disabled
6.5-inch and greater (≥
16.51 cm) die-cut,
notched, reflective,
continuous, and multiple
form lengths.
Description / Operation
When disabled, non-display printers begin printing at the
current location, unless equipped with RTC (Real Time
Clock); see note below.
The EX2 assumes the label position has not moved while
power was off and that no system changes have occurred.
In auto mode, the printer will verify the label position
using the provided Alignment Length before printing the
first label after power-up.
A =
Auto
Press and hold the FEED Key four seconds so the printer
will measure the length of the label.
6.5-inch or less (≤16.51
cm) die-cut, notched, and
reflective.
Y =
Enabled
The EX2 will only measure the label length when new
label stock is loaded.
When enabled, the printer will verify the label position
using the provided Alignment Length before printing the
first label after power-up.
Specify the Label Alignment Length using the
<STX>KcAL command, or the Setup Menu.
Table 5-3: Label Alignment Command
Note: The Real Time Clock (RTC) option allows the position-state of the label to be stored, thus
eliminating the need for an alignment prior to the printing of the first label (assuming the
label position has not moved while AC power was removed). If the label stock has been
changed then a Forced Alignment (press and hold the FEED Key 4 seconds) is
recommended.
70
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
Extended System-Level Command Functions
(LE) Legacy Emulation – This command enables the <STX>O and <STX>f print positioning
commands to allow backward compatibility with label formats that were designed for the
Allegro® Prodigy®, and Prodigy Plus® (If the printer is display-equipped, also Prodigy Max®
emulation).
(LR) Label Rotation – This command sets label rotation, allowing formats to be flipped 180
degrees.
(LS) Language Select – This command selects the language for the menu system messages and
configuration label. Only languages that are resident will be available.
(LM) Label Store – This command selects the level of stored format recall to include the labelformatting command fields, or the label-formatting command fields and the printer state.
(LW) Label Width – This command sets the maximum limit for the printable width. Objects
extending beyond this limit will NOT print; see Appendix K. (For non-display models also see
the <STX>KW command.)
Note:
The EX2 requires this command prior to the start of a label format command (<STX>L).
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
71
Extended System-Level Command Functions
(MCC) Module Command – This command adjusts the size of Flash module on the optional
Expansion Card according to the table below (see Appendix K for appropriate module details):
Value
Module Command Units / Interpretation
Zxx
xx
=
Size: 1 – 7 Mbytes. This is the amount to be allocated to Module Z; any remaining
memory will be allocated to Module F.
Gxx
xx
=
Size: 1 – 56, in 128 Kbytes blocks. This is the amount to be allocated to Module G;
any remaining memory will be allocated to Module X.
Table 5-4: Module Command
(ML) Maximum (Label) Length – See <STX>M for command details.
(MM) Menu Mode – This command sets the menu access level of the printer – where User is a
basic listing of menu settings and controls, and Advanced is a full menu listing.
(MT) Media Type – This command selects the printing method: Direct Thermal for use with heat
sensitive media or Thermal Transfer for use with media requiring a ribbon to create an image.
(For non-display models also see the <STX>KD command.)
(MV) Mark Value – This command sets threshold value for the reflective media sensor’s ‘mark’
parameter.
72
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
Extended System-Level Command Functions
(NT) Network Setup – This command configures the printer for an Ethernet connection. Each
octet must be zero-filled to be properly interpreted (e.g., an IP Address of 10.12.0.243 must be
sent to the printer as 010.012.000.243).
Value
Parameter
D
a
G
yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy
I
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
N
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
P
xxxx
S
yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy
Interpretation
Default Value*
Is Discovery (DHCP or Bootp), where a:
Y = Enable
N = Disable
Y
Is the Gateway Address, where:
y = 0 to 9
000.000.000.000
Is the IP Address, where:
x = 0 to 9
192.168.010.026
Is the SNMP Trap Address, where:
x = 0 to 9
000.000.000.000
Is the Port number, where:
x = 0 to 9
9100
Is the Subnet Mask, where:
y = 0 to 9
255.255.255.000
Is SNMP enable,
where a:
T
a
U
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
w
a
W
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
Y
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
Z
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
Y = Enable
N = Disable
Y
Is the WINS2 Address, where:
x = 0 to 9
000.000.000.000
Is WiFi enable, where a:
Y = Enable
N = Disable
N
Is the WINS1 Address, where:
x = 0 to 9
000.000.000.000
Is the DNS1 Address, where:
x = 0 to 9
000.000.000.000
Is the DNS2 Address, where:
x = 0 to 9
000.000.000.000
* Prior to the introduction of WiFi, 192.0.0.192 was the IP default value and the Subnet Mask was 0.0.0.0.
Table 5-5: Network Setup
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
73
Extended System-Level Command Functions
Example:
<STX>KcNTI010.012.000.243;NTS255.255.000.000;NTG010.012.254.254;NTDN;
<CR>
The command string above is typical of a network setup string (where the values meanings are
shown in the following table). This configuration setup command string may be included with
any other Kc sub-commands.
Sub-commands and Values
Interpretation
NTI010.012.000.243
IP Address: 10.12.0.243
NTS255.255.000.000
Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0
NTG010.012.254.254
Gateway Address: 10.12.254.254
NTDN
DHCP is disabled
(NR) No Reprint – This command controls the label reprint function following the correction of a
fault condition. Upon detection of a fault (ribbon out, paper out, etc.), printing stops and a fault
indicator is illuminated. After the problem is corrected, the FEED Key must be pressed to clear
the fault and resume normal operation. When enabled, the label in process is not reprinted.
(NS) Disable Symbol Set Selection – This command prevents the <STX>y and y commands
from changing the default single-byte symbol set. When enabled, DPL Symbol Set commands are
ignored.
Note:
74
When enabled, the only way to change the current symbol set is with the <STX>KcAS
command.
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
Extended System-Level Command Functions
(OF) Option Feedback Mode – This command configures the printer to output the status of the
RFID or Scanner option to the active port, as follows.
Note:
10.xx firmware is required; and, not supported on the I-4208 printer.
Value
D, Rx, S
Option Feedback Mode Units / Interpretation
D
=
Disable
Rx
=
RFID Enable, where x is the response format, as follows:
A = ASCII
H = Hexadecimal
S
=
Scanner Enable
Table 5-6: Option Feedback Command
Once enabled, the printer will report information about the results of the last label printed. One
response per label is returned to the host (this includes each voided and retried label). The
format and contents of the returned information is as follows:
Printer response format: <A;B;C;D;E;F>[CR]
Where:
A - Device type:
R = RFID
S = Scanner
B - Resulting status:
C = entire label complete
F = faulted (failed) label
U = unknown
C - The number of expected reads for bar codes or tags, given in
two characters.
D - The number of good reads for bar codes or tags, given in two
characters.
E - The printer’s internal Job Identifier and Sub Job Identifier,
given in four characters each.
F - The data read, delimited with semicolons (;) if multiple reads.
RFID response sample differences: Since RFID commands vary in operation, the data returned
also differs. Write commands return entire tag data; Write/Verify commands return the data
written; and, Read commands return data and length requested in the specified format. (See
Appendix T for a listing of commands.)
Write response example:
<R;C;00;00;0013:0001>[CR]
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
75
Extended System-Level Command Functions
Write/Verify hexadecimal response example:
<R;C;01;01;0012:0001;446174616D61782077726974657320524649442062657374>[CR]
Read hexadecimal response example:
<R;C;01;01;0013:0001;446174616D61782077726974657320524649442062657374>[CR]
Write/Verify ASCII response example:
<R;C;01;01;0012:0001; Datamax writes RFID best >[CR]
Read ASCII response example:
<R;C;01;01;0013:0001; Datamax writes RFID best >[CR]
Scanner response samples:
A successfully read label example:
<S;C;03;03;0002:0001;DATA1;DATA2;DATA3>[CR]
A failed label, successfully retried:
<S;F;02;01;0002:0001;DATA1>[CR]
<S;C;02;02;0002:0001;DATA1;DATA2>[CR]
(PA) Present Adjust – This command fine-tunes the Present Distance setting in dots to
compensate for slight mechanical differences sometimes evident if multiple printers share label
formats. The EX2 accepts this command for backward compatibility only, limited in range (28228). <STX>KcQQQ response shows the Present Adjust Fine Tune (PJ) equivalent value.
(PC) Print Contrast – This command adjusts the relative print edge (gray) component of the print
quality, which allows fine-tuning for specific media/ribbon mix.
(PD) Present Distance – This command sets the label stop position past the start of print. When
the next label format is received, the printer will automatically backfeed to the start position. If
the present distance is set to zero, the printer will operate without reversing. (See Stop Location,
below).
(PE) Peel Mode – This command, when enabled, specifies that a Feed operation be prevented
when the label is presented and not removed, or if the printer is to wait for the GPIO start of print
signal.
76
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
Extended System-Level Command Functions
(PJ) Present Adjust Fine Tune – This command fine-tunes the Present Distance setting in dots to
compensate for slight mechanical differences sometimes evident if multiple printers share label
formats.
(PL) Printer Level – This command is used to upgrade the software feature level of the printer.
(PM) Pause Mode – See <STX>J for command details.
(PO) Paper Empty – This command sets the length of travel before an out of stock condition is
declared.
(PP) Parallel Direction – This command controls the parallel port communications settings:
Value
Parallel Direction Units / Interpretation
x = Port ID: A or B
xz
z = Direction: U (unidirectional – one-way communication); or,
B (bi-directional – IEEE 1284 back-channel operation).
Table 5-7: Parallel Communications Configuration Command
(PS) Present Sensor Equipped – This command allows the printer to sense the present sensor
option. A or Y - automatically senses device presence; if undetected, no error will be generated. E
- enables the device, where its presence must be detected; otherwise, a fault is generated. N or D disables device detection. See <STX>V for command details. (Note that the value range for nondisplay printers is only Y, or N. Also see the <STX>KD command.)
(pS) Print Speed – See P (in Label Formatting Command Functions) for command details.
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
77
Extended System-Level Command Functions
(PT) Tear Position – This command sets the label stopping location at the tear plate on the
printer’s cover.
Note: Not recommended for use with non-display printers, instead see Stop Location (SL).
(PV) Paper Value – This command sets threshold value for the media sensor’s ‘paper’ parameter.
(PW) Password – This command modifies the numeric password required to access the menu
system when security is enabled. If security is enabled, enter the new password followed by the
old password (with no spaces) in this form: XXXXXXXX
(QQ) Configuration Query – This command requires a parameter of either K or Q. K causes the
printer to respond with the Printer Key, used for generating Upgrade Codes. A parameter value
of Q causes the printer to respond with the current configuration settings. The <STX>Kc
response command stream format is sent to the host computer via the same port as the query
containing all parameters controlled by the <STX>Kc command, and may be used for restoring
the printer’s configuration or for configuring other printers.
(RA) Row Adjust – This command shifts the vertical start of print position (in dots) to fine-tune
the Row Offset setting to compensate for slight mechanical differences sometimes evident if
multiple printers share label formats. Note that the EX2 accepts this command for backward
compatibility only, limited in range (28-228). <STX>KcQQQ response shows the Row Adjust
Fine Tune (RF) equivalent value.
(RB) Reflective TOF Bias – This command allows the manual entry for the control voltage level
to recognize a label “gap” or “mark.”
78
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
Extended System-Level Command Functions
(RD) Reflective TOF Delta – This command allows the manual entry for the control of the lowlevel voltage difference level to recognize a label “gap” or “mark.”
(RE) Ribbon Saver Equipped – This command allows the printer to sense the ribbon saver
option. A or Y - automatically senses device presence; if undetected, no error is generated. E enables the device, where its presence must be detected; otherwise, a fault is generated. N or D disables device detection. See <STX>R for command details.
(RF) Row Adjust Fine Tune – This command shifts the vertical start of print position in dots (see
Appendix K) upward or downward to fine-tune the Row Offset setting to compensate for slight
mechanical differences sometimes evident if multiple printers share label formats.
(RG) Reflective TOF Gain – This command allows the manual entry for the control of the
voltage to the LED emitter of the Media Sensor.
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
79
Extended System-Level Command Functions
(RI) RFID Configuration – This command configures the optional RFID interface module, as follows:
Value
Units / Interpretation
RFID Configuration Definition / Function
D = Disable
Disables the RFID module. (“N” is also a valid disabler.)
H = HF
Mn
where n:
Enables the RFID module for HF (Securakey).
U = UHF
Enables the RFID module for UHF Class 1 (Alien).
M = UHF
Enables the RFID module for UHF Multi-Protocol (Samsys).
AIhh
where hh:
2-Chararacter Hex ID
Sets the Application Family Identifier (AFI), (HF only)
ALn
and where n:
E = Enable,
D = Disable
DIhh
where hh:
2-Chararacter Hex ID
DLn
and where n:
E = Enable,
D = Disable
Shh
where hh:
2-Chararacter Hex ID
Sets the Electronic Article Surveillance (EAS) set, representing the manufacturer’s code. (HF only)
Lhh
where hh:
2-Chararacter Hex ID
Sets the Lock Code (Alien UHF only)
Rn
where n:
0–9
Wn
where n:
E = Enable,
D = Disable
Allows locking the tag after writing.
En
where n:
E = Enable,
D = Disable
Allows erasures of the tag on error (HF only)
Pxxx
where xxx:
3-digit value
Sets the tag encoding position: A value of 0.00 causes the print position to be used; or, a value
greater than 0 causes the presented position to be used. (Subject to change.)
Allows locking the AFI after writing (HF only)
Sets the Data Storage Format Identifier (DSFID), (HF only)
Allows locking the DSFID after writing (HF only)
Sets the number of retries for RFID functions
Table 5-8: RFID Configuration Set Commands
80
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
Extended System-Level Command Functions
Value
Units / Interpretation
0 = ISO 15693
1 = Texas Instruments
2 = Philips
3 = ST Micro LRI 512
4 = ST Micro LRI 64
RFID Configuration Definition / Function
Tn
where n:
Establishes the tag type (HF only).
Nn
where n:
64 = 64-bit
96 = 96-bit
Un
where n:
0 = EPC 0
1 = EPC 0+ Matrics
2 = EPC 0+ Impinj
3 = EPC 1
4 = ISO 18000-6A
5 = ISO 18000-6B
6 = UCODE EPC 1.19
7 = EM 4022/4222
8 = Gen 2
Vn
where n:
= a value from -4 to +4 Adjusts the power, in dBmn (Samsys UHF only).
Sets the UHF tag data size (Samsys UHF only).
Sets the UHF tag type (Samsys UHF only).
Table 5-8: RFID Configuration Set Commands (continued)
Example: <STX>KcRIMH;RIA11E;RID22E;RIS04;RIR3;RIWE;RIEE;RIP000<CR>
The above example sets the printer to HF, protect after write AFI 11, protect after write DFSID 22, set EAS Bit (Mfg. Code 0x04), allow 3 tries
for each read or write attempt, lock after writing, erase the tag if there is an error, and use a position of 0.00.
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
81
Extended System-Level Command Functions
(RL) Ribbon Low Diameter – This command sets the threshold for a low ribbon indication,
where nnnn is the diameter in hundredths of inches.
(RM) Rewinder Equipped – This command allows the printer to sense the powered internal
rewind option. A or Y - automatically senses device presence; if undetected, no error is generated.
E - enables the device, where its presence must be detected; otherwise, a fault is generated. N or
D - disables device detection.
(RN) Reflective No Paper Minimum – This command sets the media sensor’s reading for the Out
Of Stock (OOS) condition.
(RO) Row Offset – See Rnnnn (in Label Formatting Command Functions) for command details.
(RP) Ribbon Low Pause – This command (when enabled) pauses the printer when a Ribbon Low
Diameter warning is declared; the PAUSE Button must be pressed to continue printing.
(RR) Rewinder Adjust – This command changes the torque applied by the powered rewinder, in
percentage points of the nominal force, to minimize TOF registration drift (sometimes evident
when using small or narrow media).
(RS) Ribbon Low Signal – This command sets the signal output type for the Ribbon Low
Diameter condition when using the optional GPIO (see Appendix J).
(RV) Reflective Paper Value – This command sets the threshold value for the reflective media
sensor’s paper parameter.
(RW) Retract Delay – This command sets a time delay for the retraction of a presented label,
where the time specified is multiplied by ten milliseconds.
82
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
Extended System-Level Command Functions
(SA) SOP Adjust – This command sets the start of print (SOP) location, relative to the top of
form. See <STX>O for command details. The EX2 accepts this command for backward
compatibility only, limited in range (28-228). The <STX>KcQQQ response shows the Row
Adjust Fine Tune (RF) equivalent value.
(SC) Scalable Cache – This command sets the number of 1K blocks allocated for the scaleable
font engine. Available memory dependent upon model; see Appendix K. (For non-display models
see the <STX>KS command.)
(SE) SOP Emulation – This command enables the <STX>O and <STX>f print positioning
commands to allow backward compatibility with label formats designed for other printers.
(SF) Save As Filename – This command, which may be sent separately or included as the last
command in an <STX>Kc command string, saves the effective printer configuration to a file in
Flash memory with a .dcm file extension.
(SG) Sensor Gain Value – This command sets the control of the voltage to the LED emitter of
the Media Sensor.
(SH) Scalable Heap – This command sets a working “scratch pad space” in DRAM for scalable
font construction.
(Sl) Security Lock – This command provides the ability to password-protect all printer settings
made through the User Interface, as follows:
Value
Security Function
Nxxxx
Where xxxx is the current password, this disables Menu protection.
Yxxxx
Where xxxx is a new password, this enables Menu protection and sets a new password.
Txxxx
Where xxxx is a new password, this enables Menu protection, disables the User
Interface Test Button functions, and sets a new password.
Table 5-9: Security Lock Command
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
83
Extended System-Level Command Functions
(SL) Stop Location – This command sets the label stopping (and in certain cases the starting)
location, as follows:
Value
Stop Location
A
Automatically sets the stop location. Installed options will be ‘auto-sensed’ and the
appropriate stop position will automatically be set. Host commands are ignored.
H
Sets stop position according to options installed. If no options are installed the printer
sets stop location to the next label’s start of print. Host commands will override. The
stop location (present distance) may be controlled dynamically by the host using the
<STX>f or <STX>Kf commands. This selection has the same effect as <STX>KD
Ignore Host Distance bit value 0.
P
Sets the stop location to approximately 2 mm behind the peel bar edge, a nominal peel
position. The Present Sensor status and this setting are independent.
C
Sets the stop location to a nominal cut position. For die-cut media, the position is just
following the end of the label. The cutter status and this setting are independent.
T
Sets the stop location to that of the tear bar on the printer cover.
N
Sets the stop location to the start of the next label, equivalent to setting the <STX>KD
Ignore Host Distance bit value 1.
Table 5-10: Stop Location Command
(SM) Maximum (Label) Length Ignore – This command controls recognition of the <STX>M
command.
84
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
Extended System-Level Command Functions
(SN) Scanner Configuration – This command configures the optional linear scanner, as follows:
Values
Scanner Configuration Range / Interpretation
B
Bar Code Type – Specifies the bar code, using two digits, followed by ‘Y’ (to enable) or
‘N’ (to disable) the code, where:
01 =
02 =
03 =
04 =
05 =
CODE 39
IATA
CODABAR
INTERLEAVED 2 OF 5
INDUSTRIAL 2 OF 5
06 =
07 =
08 =
09 =
10 =
CODE 93
CODE 128
MSI/PLESSEY
EAN(13/8)
EAN(13/8)+2
11 =
12 =
13 =
14 =
EAN(13/8)+5
UPC(A/E)
UPC(A/E)+2
UPC(A/E)+5
Note: To maximize throughput and decoding integrity enable only those symbologies that will
be read.
C
Bar Code Count – Specifies the number of codes to be read, where:
00 – 99 (00 = Auto [variable] mode, counting those codes present)
Note: Do not use Auto Mode with bitmapped codes or codes with certain addendums; see
Appendix F.
H
Min Readable Height – Sets the vertical distance of the code that must have identical
reads to pass, where:
1
2
3
4
5
0
=
=
=
=
=
=
1/16
2/16
3/16
1/4
1/2
Disabled (defaults to Redundancy Level, 2x)
Note: The specified distance should not exceed 50% of the measured bar code height.
M
Mode – Enables detection of the scanner by the printer, where:
A = Auto (automatically senses presence); Y is also a valid enabler.
E = Enabled (if presence is not detected a fault is generated).
D = Disabled (the scanner is disabled); (N is also a valid disabler.)
V
Redundancy Level – An alternative data integrity method, where the selected level sets
the number of consecutive, identical decodes required to pass the bar code. If differing
values are read, the count is restarted.
0 = Auto Mode
1 = read code 1X
2 = read code 2X
3 = read code 3X
4 = read code 4X
5 = read code 5X
6 = read code 6X
7 = read code 8X
8 = read code 10X
9 = read code 12X
A = read code 15X
B = read code 20X
C = read code 25X
D = read code 30X
E = read code 35X
F = read code 40X
G = read code 45X
Note: Depending upon the print speed, higher levels may cause erroneous failures when
scanning multiple or small bar codes.
Table 5-11: Scanner Configuration Set Command
Example: <STX>KcSNC00H4MAB12YV0<CR>
(The above sample sets the printer to sense the scanner automatically, to read a variable
number of UPC bar codes, and to pass only those codes where ¼ inch of the bar code has
identical reads.)
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
85
Extended System-Level Command Functions
(SP) Serial Port – This command configures the serial communication port(s) as follows:
Value
xyz
Serial Port Range / Interpretation
Where:
x = Port Identifier:
y = Function:
z = Setting
A - Serial A
P - Handshaking Protocol
B - both
B - Serial B
S - software
H - hardware
N - none
p - Parity
N - none
O - odd
D - Data Length
E - even
8 - eight bits
S - Stop Bits
7 - seven bits
1 - one bit
2 - two bits
xyzz
Where:
x = Port Identifier:
y = Function:
zz = Setting:
A - Serial A
B - Baud Rate
12 - 1200
B - Serial B
24 - 2400
48 - 4800
96 - 9600
19 - 19200
28 - 28800
38 - 38400
Table 5-12: Serial Port Configuration Set Command
Note: For E-Class & M-Class models, this command is followed by the port ID, always ‘A’ (i.e.,
SPA); for EX2 models, the data length, parity, and stop bits are fixed at 8, N, and 1
respectively. And, for Applicator Interface Card-equipped models, this command is also used
to configure the GPIO Auxiliary port (ID always ‘B’).
Example: <STX>KcSPAPB;SPApN;SPAD8;SPAS1;SPAB19<CR>
(The example configures Serial Port A to use hardware and software handshaking, an eight-bit
word, with no parity and one stop bit at 19,200 bits per second.)
(SS or sS) Feed Speed – This command controls the rate of label movement between printing
areas; see Appendix L.
86
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
Extended System-Level Command Functions
(ST) Sensor Type – See <STX>e (edge) or <STX>r (reflective) for command details. (For nondisplay models also see the <STX>KD command.)
(SV) Switch Settings – This command controls recognition of the software switch setting
command <STX>V.
(TB) TOF Bias – This command controls the low-level voltage difference level to recognize a
label ‘gap’ or ‘mark’.
(TD) TOF Delta – This command controls the low-level voltage difference level to recognize a
label ‘gap’ or ‘mark’.
(TG) TOF Gain – This command controls the voltage to the LED emitter of the Media Sensor.
(TN) No Paper Min – This command sets the media sensor level for the Out of Stock (OOS)
condition.
(TP) TOF Precedence – This command instructs the firmware to stop printing at the first top of
form mark it detects. The default, ‘No,’ prints all of the data (traversing the top of form as
necessary) then slews to the next TOF.
(UM) Units of Measure – See <STX>m (metric) or <STX>n (imperial) for command details.
(UT) User Terminator – This command allows word wrapping of long character strings of
commands to the next line in a file, for the purposes of readability only. In the <STX>Kc string,
the command UTON must fall somewhere before the first line terminator. The last command
needs to be END, followed by a line terminator (see the <STX>KcEN command for details).
(VE) Verifier Equipped – This command enables the GPIO for a bar code verifier (see Appendix
J). A or Y - automatically senses device presence; if undetected, no error is generated. E - enables
the device, where its presence must be detected; otherwise, a fault is generated. N or D - disables
device detection.
(VT) Verifier Type – This command is reserved for future use.
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
87
Extended System-Level Command Functions
(WE) WiFi Setup – This command configures the printer for a WiFi connection.
Value
Parameter
A
y
C
x
Interpretation
Default Value
Is the WiFi SSID, where:
MACR
y = Up to 31 characters, no spaces
Is the WiFi Channel number (adhoc only, country
dependant), where:
1
x = 1 to 14
Is WiFi Enable DHCP Fixed Interval
Transmission, where x:
F
x
I
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
L
x
0
1 = Fixed
0 = Exponential
Is the WiFi IP Address*, where:
192.168.010.001
x = 0 to 9
Is the WiFi DHCP Acquire Time Limit, where:
150
x = 0 to 255 seconds
Is the WiFi maximum transmission rate, where x:
M
x
N
y
0 = 1 Mbps
1 = 2 Mbps
2 = 5.5 Mbps
3 = 11 Mbps
2
Is the WiFi client name, where:
N/A
y = Up to 31 characters, no spaces
Is the WiFi WEP Access Point Density, where x:
P
x
R
y
0 = Low
1= Medium
2 = High
0
Is the WiFi Region, where:
y = two-character mnemonic; see Appendix U.
US
Is the WiFi Mode, where x:
T
x
V
x
X
a
0 = Adhoc
1 = Infrastructure
2 = Unique (SSID = MAC address; and, WiFi
type = Adhoc)
2
Is the WiFi DHCP Retransmit Interval, where:
x = 1 to 64 seconds
15
Is WiFi MAC Cloning, where a:
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
0
* Each octet must be zero-filled to be properly interpreted (e.g., an IP Address of 10.12.0.243 must be sent to the
printer as 010.012.000.243).
Table 5-13 WiFi Setup
Example 1:
<STX>KcNTDN;NTwN;WEI010.012.000.248;WEAEngWAN1;NTI010.012.000.245;NTS
255.255.000.000;NTG010.012.254.254<CR>
88
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
Extended System-Level Command Functions
(WS) WiFi Security – This command configures WiFi security.
Value
Parameter
Interpretation
Default Value
Is the WEP Key, where x:
xy
1 = WEP Key 1
2 = WEP Key 2
3 = WEP Key 3
4 = WEP Key 4
1
See Note 1
And where y:
Is the Key, up to 26 characters with no spaces.
Is the Security Authentication, where x:
A
x
0 = Auto
1 = Open
2 = Shared
0
Is the WEP Default Key, where x:
K
x
1 = WEP Key 1
2 = WEP Key 2
3 = WEP Key 3
4 = WEP Key 4
1
Is the WiFi Security setting, where x:
S
x
L
y
0 = Disabled
1 = WEP 64 Bit
2 = WEP 128 Bit
3 = WPA PSK
4 = WPA LEAP
5 = WPA LEAP 64
6 = WPA LEAP 128
7 = WPA PSK+TKIP 64
8 = WPA PSK+TKIP 128
Is the LEAP Password, where y:
Is up to 32 characters.
Is the WPA Passphrase (Preshared Key) , where
y:
P
y
U
y
Is 8 to 63 characters with no spaces; or, 64 hex
characters.
Is the LEAP User ID, where y:
Is up to 32 characters.
0
See Note 2
See Note 3
See Note 4
1.Default values for WEP Keys is all zeros (whether 10 digit or 26 digits).
2.The LEAP password is 1 to 32 characters and must match the LEAP password assigned to the LEAP user on the
LEAP server. The password cannot contain spaces.
3.The WPA passphrase must match the passphrase on the Access Point.
4. The User ID cannot contain spaces.
Table 5-14 WiFi Security
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
89
Extended System-Level Command Functions
STX KD
Database Configuration (Non-Display Models only)
This command, stored in Flash memory for future power-ups, controls the printer’s environment and
operates as a pseudo DIP switch. The <STX>Kc command is recommended for use over <STX>KD.
Syntax:
<STX>KDwxyz<CR>
Where:
w, x, y, and z are binary values with respective bit settings as defined
in the following table. (Bit 0 is least significant.)
Sample:
<STX>[email protected]@@<CR>
The sample configures the printer as follows:
@
H
@
@
Sets the communications to 9600 baud with an 8-bit word and no parity;
Selects direct thermal printing, standard control characters, and enables the media cutter;
Selects gap sensing;
Is the default setting (items saved for future expansion).
Notes: (1) The Ignore Host Distance setting (see below) allows the printer to disregard <STX>O and
<STX>f commands (a feature provided for host system software that sends these commands with
values that may be inappropriate for the printer and result in incorrect start of print and present
distances). Use the <STX>KD command or the Setup Menu to enable this feature. (2) This
command will result in a system reset for the EX2.
<STX>KD
Parameter
w
x
y
z
[1]
Bit
Number
Function
0–2
BAUD Rate / Set Test Mode
3
4&5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0&1
2
3–5
6
7
0&1
2
3–5
6
7
Word Length and Parity
Unused
Always 1
Always 0
Print Method
Present Sensor
Control Character[1]
Cutter
Ignore Host Distance
Alt-2 Control Codes[1]
Always 1
Always 0
Paper Type (Media Sensor)
Linerless
Unused
Always 1
Always 0
Reserved
Reserved
Unused
Always 1
Always 0
Value(s)
0 = 9600, 1 = 600, 2 = 2400, 3 = 19200,
4 = 4800, 5 = 38400, 6 = 1200, 7 = 9600 Test Mode
0 = 8 bits, no parity; 1 = 7 bits, even parity
Set to 0
Set to 1
Set to 0
0 = direct thermal, 1 = thermal transfer
0 = not equipped, 1 = equipped
0 = standard, 1 = alternate characters
0 = disabled, 1 = enabled
0 = disabled, 1 = enabled (See note above)
0 = disabled, 1 = alternate-2 characters
Set to 1
Set to 0
0 = gap (edge), 1 = reflective, 2 = continuous
0 = not equipped, 1 = equipped
Set to 0
Set to 1
Set to 0
Set to 0
Set to 0
Set to 0
Set to 1
Set to 0
Selects the values of the control characters; see Control Codes.
Table 5-15: Database Configuration Command
90
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
Extended System-Level Command Functions
STX Kd
Set File as Factory Default
(Display-Equipped Models only)
This command selects the specified file name as the “factory default” for the printer’s configuration.
After execution, subsequent “Select Factory Default” commands will configure the printer to the
file’s configuration. Currently there are three ways to “Select Factory Defaults”: 1) by the <STX>KF
command; 2) power-up the printer while pressing the PAUSE and CANCEL Keys; or, 3) via the
printer’s menu system entry System Settings / Set Factory Defaults.
Note: Powering ‘On’ the printer while pressing the PAUSE, FEED and CANCEL Keys will reset the
configuration to the factory defaults.
Syntax:
<STX>KdName<CR>
Where:
Name
- The name, up to 16 characters, of the configuration file.
<CR>
- 0x0d terminates the name.
Sample:
<STX>KdPlant1
This command selects the configuration file “Plant1” as the default factory configuration.
STX KE
Character Encoding
This command is provided primarily as a means for users of 7-bit communication and to embed
control characters and extended ASCII characters in their data streams. Any character in the DPL data
stream may be substituted with a delimited two-character ASCII hexadecimal numeric equivalent.
The command allows the delimiting character to be selected, and the encoding to be enabled or
disabled. When character encoding is enabled, the printer will decode any ASCII hexadecimal
numeric pairs following the delimiter as single-byte values. Character encoding is used where control
characters cannot be transmitted or where control characters within data may prematurely terminate a
label format record. Although the delimiter may be changed at any time (except within a label format
definition), there cannot be more than one defined delimiter, and character encoding must be disabled
with <STX>KEN prior to re-enabling, regardless of any change in the delimiter.
Syntax:
<STX>KEex<CR>
Where:
e
-
Y – character encoding enabled
N – character encoding disabled
x
-
Delimiter: one ASCII character (Do not include when e = N)
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
91
Extended System-Level Command Functions
Sample:
<STX>KEN
<STX>KEY\
<STX>L<CR>
1u0000001200120[)>\1E\01\1D\...\04\<CR>
E<CR>
The sample disables, and then enables character encoding with the backslash (\) as the delimiter. A
UPS MaxiCode will be formatted using a data string interpreted as: [)>RS01GS... EOT<CR>, then
formatting is terminated.
Character Encoding Syntax: This syntax requires at least two hexadecimal ASCII digits (0-9, A-F)
delimited by the character specified in the <STX>KE command. The number of hexadecimal digits
between the delimiter pair must be even; see notes below.
Syntax:
xaa[bbcc…nn]x
Where:
x
- One byte delimiter, 0 to ff16, leading and trailing.
aa
-
2 bytes, ASCII, hexadecimal encoded, range each character 0-9, A-F
bb
-
2 bytes, ASCII, hexadecimal encoded, range each character 0-9, A-F (optional)
cc
-
2 bytes, ASCII, hexadecimal encoded, range each character 0-9, A-F (optional)
nn
-
2 bytes, ASCII, hexadecimal encoded, range each byte - 0-9,
A-F (optional)
Notes: (1) A delimiter pair with no ASCII hexadecimal pairs between (e.g., \\) will be interpreted as one
byte whose value is that of the delimiting character, allowing the assigned delimiter to be
interpreted as itself rather than as the delimiter.
(2) A delimited string that contains either a non-valid hexadecimal character (e.g., FX) or an odd
number of bytes will be treated as an illegal string and, therefore, not correctly decoded.
Character Encoding Examples: In the following partial datastreams it is assumed that character
encoding is enabled and that the selected delimiter, a backslash (\), has been transmitted to the
printer (i.e., <STX>KEY\). In each example, the printer has not received an unpaired delimiter prior
the example.
Partial DPL
Sample Data Stream
Interpretation
AB\\CE
5 bytes AB\CE with values 4116, 4216, 5C16, 4316, 4416
\ABCDEF\
3 bytes with values AB16, CD16, and EF16
1A\1A\1A
5 bytes 1A<SUB>1A with values 3116, 4116, 1A16, 3116, 4116.
<SUB> represents a single-byte ASCII control character with value 1A16
Alternate Control Codes with Alternate Line Terminator: Character Encoding can also be used
with the Alternate Control Character set. Alternate Control Characters are enabled, depending upon
the model, via a Setup Menu or the <STX>KD / <STX>Kc commands. See Control Codes.
92
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
Extended System-Level Command Functions
STX KF
Select Factory Defaults (Display-Equipped and EX2 Models only)
This command restores the configuration of the printer to the factory default settings. These settings
may be Datamax default values or the values previously specified by a configuration file (see
<STX>Kd).
Syntax:
<STX>KFn<CR>
Where:
n
-
2 = Level One Reset, returning the factory default settings
(and, if saved, restoring the Factory Setting File).
-
3 = Level Two Reset, returning the factory default settings,
and clearing all calibration and custom adjustment parameters.
Note: Media sensor calibration will be required before printing
can be resumed.
STX Kf
Set Present Distance
This command specifies an additional amount to advance the label after printing. This command has
the same effect as the <STX>f command, but specifies a distance to advance relative to the start of
print (<STX>O command) of the next label.
Non-Display Models: The printer Option Control must be set (via the menu) to ‘Host’ for this
command to have effect.
Display-Equipped Models: SOP Emulation selection has no effect on this command.
Syntax:
<STX>Kfnnnn<CR>
Where:
nnnn
Sample:
<STX>Kf0100
- A four-digit present distance in inches/100 or mm/10.
The sample represents a one-inch label advance unless in metric mode (see <STX>m).
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
93
Extended System-Level Command Functions
STX KJ
Assign Communication Port (MCL Command)
This command assigns a communication port for specific use. When activating MCL, all ports are
assigned to MCL; this command allows changes to that assignment.
Syntax:
<STX>KJpf<CR>
Where:
p
- Port ID: P = Parallel
S = Serial (A)
U = USB
N = Ethernet
L = Wireless
A = Serial (B)
f
- Flag:
Sample:
1 = DPL
0 = MCL
<STX>KJN1
The sample forces the Ethernet port to bypass MCL and go directly to DPL.
STX KI
GPIO Input
This command configures the GPIO input channels of the Applicator Interface Card; see Appendix J
for details.
94
Syntax:
<STX>KIffnspwww<CR>
Where:
ff
-
2 character function name abbreviation (e.g., PS [Print Start],
I1 [User Input 1], etc).
n
-
Pin number, where 1 – 8 is the valid range.
s
-
Signal type, where: L = Level; P = Positive Pulse; and N =
Negative Pulse
p
-
Polarity, where: 0 = Active Low; and 1 = Active High
www
-
3 character filter pulse width, in milliseconds.
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
Extended System-Level Command Functions
STX Kn
NIC Reset
This command resets the NIC to factory defaults.
Syntax:
<STX>Knx
Where:
x
- Specifies the action to take, where:
F = Returns the NIC to the factory default settings; and,
H = Reports settings to host (wireless, only).
Address
Default Values
Wired *
Default Values
WiFi
IP
192.168.010.002
192.168.010.001
Subnet
Mask
255.255.255.000
255.255.255.000
Gateway
000.000.000.000
000.000.000.000
* Prior to introduction of the WiFi, 192.0.0.192 was the IP default
value and the Subnet Mask was 0.0.0.0.
STX KO
GPIO Output
This command configures the GPIO output channels of the Applicator Interface Card; see Appendix J
for details.
Syntax:
<STX>KOffnsptd0pw0td1pw1<cr>
Where:
ff
-
2 character function name abbreviation (e.g., LC [Label
Complete], LM [Label Movement], etc).
n
-
Pin number, where 1 – 8 is the valid range.
s
-
Signal type, where: L = Level; P = Positive Pulse; and N =
Negative Pulse
p
-
Polarity, where: 0 = Active Low; and 1 = Active High
td0
-
3 character delay time from function condition “true” to
output signal.
pw0
-
3 character pulse width corresponding to the function
condition becoming “true”. (Ignored for level-type signals.)
td0
-
3 character delay time from function condition “false” to
output signal.
pw0
-
3 character pulse width corresponding to the function
condition becoming “false”. (Ignored for level-type signals.)
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
95
Extended System-Level Command Functions
STX Kp
Module Protection
(Display-Equipped Models only)
This command controls memory module protection. When “protected”, a module will ignore format,
downloads and delete commands. This command can be useful to add data to Datamax reserved
modules, Z (ILPC) and Y (EFIGS). See Appendix K for a listing of the memory modules.
There are two types of modules: RAM (volatile) and Flash (non-volatile).
RAM - When protected, if the power is cycled or if the printer is reset, the module state resets
back to unprotected.
Flash - When protected, the module can be temporarily unprotected. However, if the power is
cycled or if the printer is reset, the module is initialized to ‘protected.’
Syntax:
<STX>Kpmf
Where:
m
- Module ID – Range A to Z (See Appendix K).
Where:
f
- Flag specifying Enable or Disable protection.
0 = disable protection
1 = enable protection
Sample:
<STX>KpY0
This example disables protection for memory module “Y”. Graphics may now be downloaded to
module “Y” and, on subsequent resets, these graphics will be protected.
96
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
Extended System-Level Command Functions
STX KQ
Query Memory Configuration
This command causes the printer to transmit, in a model-dependent format, its DRAM memory
configuration (i.e., total amount installed, amount available for configuration, and amount currently
assigned to specific functions or entities) to the host device.
Syntax:
Non-Display Model
response format:
Where:
<STX>KQ<CR>
INTERNAL MEMORY<CR>
VER: aa-cdd.ee mm/dd/yy<CR>
INSTALLED: iiii<CR>
AVAILABLE: vvvv<CR>
MODULE: X:xxxx<CR>
SCALABLE: ssss<CR>
LABEL MEM: LLLL<CR>
LABEL SIZE: wwww:gggg:oo<CR>
<CR>
- ASCII Carriage Return (0x0D) record delimiter.
aa- ASCII string sequence that represents the firmware version
cdd.ee
number string.
mm/dd/yy
iiii
- The number of 4KB blocks of DRAM memory.
vvvv
- The number of 4KB blocks of DRAM available for
configuration.
X:
- ASCII character identifying a DRAM module followed by an
ASCII colon (:). If no Internal Module is present, this field
and its associated legend will not appear.
xxxx
- The number of 4KB blocks of DRAM allocated as an
Internal Module.
ssss
- The number of 4KB blocks of DRAM assigned to the
smooth scalable font processor cache.
LLLL
- The number of 4KB blocks of DRAM assigned to label print
buffer.
wwww
- Current maximum printable label width (in 100ths of an inch
or millimeters).
gggg
- Current printable length (in 100ths of an inch or millimeters),
200 min. / 640 max.
oo
- Current label dimension unit’s designation: “IN” for inches
or “MM” for millimeters.
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
97
Extended System-Level Command Functions
Display-Equipped
Model response
format:
Product: I4208 – 01.01 05/21/1999
Installed RAM: 8 MB
Label Width: 4.09 IN
Print Buffer Size: 272 IN
Allocation RAM: 6389 KB
Internal Files: 512 KB
Font Cache: 232 KB
Where:
Product
- Printer model, type, and firmware version.
Installed RAM
- Total amount of RAM.
Label Width
- Size in inches/millimeters of the print head.
Print Buffer Size - Total number of inches/millimeters of Print
Dot Buffers available. (This is not the
maximum size of a label, which is limited to
99.99 inches.)
98
Allocation RAM
Amount of RAM that can be configured for
- the Internal Files, Font Cache and the
remainder going to the Print Buffer Size.
Internal Files
- Size of the Internal Module used to store
downloaded fonts, graphics and label formats.
Font Cache
- Size of the Font Buffer used to temporarily
store characters. Increasing this buffer will
increase performance if labels have a large
variety of font sizes and characters.
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
Extended System-Level Command Functions
STX Kq
Query Memory Configuration (new format, Display-Equipped Models only)
This command causes the printer to transmit its internal DRAM memory configuration to the host
device. The transmitted data provides information regarding the total amount of internal DRAM
installed, the amount available for configuration, and the amount currently assigned to specific
functions or entities.
Syntax:
<STX>Kq<CR>
Printer response format: Memory Configuration<CR>
Product: aaaacdd.ee mm/dd/yy<CR>
Installed RAM: iiiiMB<CR>
Label Width: vvvvoo<CR>
Print Buffer Size: :xxxxoo<CR>
Allocation RAM: ssssKB<CR>
Internal Files LLLLKB<CR>
Font Cache wwww:KB<CR>
Where:
<CR>
- ASCII Carriage Return (0x0D) record delimiter.
aaaacdd.ee - ASCII string sequence that represents the firmware
mm/dd/yy
version number string.
STX KR
iiii
- The number of megabytes of installed internal DRAM
memory.
vvvv
- The length of the Label Width.
xxxx
- The length of the Print Buffer.
ssss
- The number of kilobytes of internal memory assigned to
the label Print Buffer.
LLLL
- The number of kilobytes assigned to the internal memory
module.
wwww
- The number of kilobytes assigned to the Scalable Cache.
oo
- Current label dimension unit’s designation. “IN” for inches
and “MM” for millimeters.
Reset Memory Configuration
(Non-Display Models only)
This command resets the printer’s DRAM configuration to the default settings; see <STX>KM.
Syntax:
<STX>KR<CR>
Note: This command will result in a system reset for the EX2.
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
99
Extended System-Level Command Functions
STX Kr
Resettable Counter Reset
This command resets the internal counters. Follow this command with an <SOH>U command to
retain the reset or the counters will revert to the previous values after cycling power.
Syntax:
STX KS
<STX>Kr<CR>
Memory Configuration, Scalable Font Cache
(Non-Display Models only)
See the <STX>K command.
Note: This command will result in a system reset for the EX2.
STX KtA
Write Application Family Identifier (AFI) to Tag
(Direct Mode – HF [13.56 MHz] ISO15693 Tag Interface)
This command writes the AFI data to the tag.
Syntax:
<STX>KtAabcc
Where:
a
- The number of retry attempts, 0-9.
b
- Lock the Application Family Identifier (AFI) after writing:
0 = No Protection
1 = Write Protect
cc
- Two character AFI value representing one byte.
Sample:
<STX>KtA91C3[CR]
The sample writes 0xC3 AFI byte, locking value, retrying nine times, if necessary.
100
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
Extended System-Level Command Functions
STX KtD
Write Data Storage Format Identifier (DSFID) to Tag
(Direct Mode – HF [13.56 MHz] ISO15693 Tag Interface)
This command writes the DSFID data to the tag.
Syntax:
<STX>KtDabcc
Where:
a
- The number of retry attempts, 0-9.
b
- Lock the Data Storage Format Identifier (DSFID) after writing:
0 = No Protection
1 = Write Protect
cc
- Two character DFSID value representing one byte.
Sample:
<STX>KtD91C3[CR]
The sample writes 0xC3 DSFID byte, locking value, retrying nine times, if necessary.
STX KtE
Write Electronic Article Surveillance (EAS) Bit
(Direct Mode – HF [13.56 MHz] ISO15693 Tag Interface)
This command writes the EAS bit for Philips ISO tags.
Syntax:
<STX>KtEabcc
Where:
a
- The number of retry attempts, 0-9.
b
- Electronic Article Surveillance (EAS) option:
0 = Set EAS
1 = Reset EAS
2 = Test EAS
cc
- Two character Manufacturer’s Code, representing one byte.
Sample:
<STX>KtE9004[CR]
The sample writes the EAS bit for Philips (0x04), retrying nine times, if necessary.
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
101
Extended System-Level Command Functions
STX KtH
Read and Feedback Tag Information to Host
(Direct Mode – HF [13.56 MHz] ISO15693 Tag Interface)
This command returns the tag info to host.
Note: This command only works when the Data Flag for the tag is 0x0F (i.e., when the tag contains
DSFID, AFI, VICC and IC data).
Syntax:
<STX>KtH
Sample Feedback:
DATA FLAG: 0x0F
TAG ID: E004010000751412
DSFID: 0xE3
AFI: 0x01
NUM BLK: 0x1B
BLK SIZ: 0x03
IC REF: 0x01
STX KtR
Read Data from RFID Tag
(Direct Mode – HF [13.56 MHz] ISO15693 Tag Interface)
This command instructs the RFID device to read data from the tag and then put that data into a
replaceable field. It is expected that the tag transponder will be within the read / write distance of the
RFID programming device; otherwise, “Void” will be printed in the text or bar code label field(s).
Syntax:
<STX>KtRUn1…n16Haaabbbcdee<CR>
Where:
Un1…n16
- (Optional) Where n1…n16 is the Unique Identifier (UID) in
hexadecimal format. Must be sixteen characters long.
H
- (Optional) Hexadecimal data – An “H” may be added directly
after “R” to return a two character hex value of the data. Since
there are two digits per hex value, replaceable fields should be
twice as long than if using ASCII data (e.g., the character “A”
would be returned as “41”).
aaa
- Starting block number (000
bbb
- The number of blocks to read (001
number).*
c
- The number of retry attempts, 0-9.
d
- Reserved. Should be 0.
ee
- Field number in which to place the data (must be 01, 02, 03,
etc.) matching the order of Label Formatting command, U.
maximum block number).*
maximum block
Note: The 00 value will send tag data to the host with no printing.
* Dependent on transponder manufacturer.
102
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
Extended System-Level Command Functions
Sample:
<STX>L
1911A1802000010TEXT
U
X
<STX>KtRUE00700ABCDEF1234H0000015001
<STX>G
The sample creates a replaceable text field (01), recalls data from the RFID tag block zero (reading
only one block, which is attempted nine times), and prints the data in the location specified by
replaceable field.
Note: When using addressed commands and the tag with the specified UID cannot be found, a standard
RFID read/write fault will be issued.
STX KtU
Read Unique Serial Number from RFID Tag
(Direct Mode – HF [13.56 MHz] ISO15693 Tag Interface)
This command instructs the RFID device to read the unique serial number data from the tag and then
place that data into a replaceable field. It is expected that the tag transponder will be within the read /
write distance of the RFID programming device; otherwise, “Void” will be printed in the text or bar
code label field(s).
Note: This is a sixteen character alphanumeric value; the replaceable field must have an adequate length.
Syntax:
<STX>KtUabcc<CR>
Where:
a
- The number of retry attempts, 0-9.
b
- Reserved. Should be 0.
cc
- Field number in which to place the data (must be 01, 02, 03, etc.)
matching the order of Label Formatting command, U.
Note: The 00 value will send the unique tag ID to the host with no
printing.
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
103
Extended System-Level Command Functions
STX KtW
Write Data to RFID Tag
(Direct Mode – HF [13.56 MHz] ISO15693 Tag Interface)
This command instructs the RFID device to write data to the tag. It is expected that the tag
transponder will be within the read / write distance of the RFID programming device; otherwise, a
warning will occur and a warning message (Read / Write Fail) will be displayed.
Syntax:
<STX>KtWUn1…n16Bncncncaaabcdee…e<CR>
Where:
Un1…n16
- (Optional) Where n1…n16 is the Unique Identifier (UID) in
hexadecimal format. Must be sixteen characters long.
Bncncnc - (Optional) Where ncncnc is the data byte count, to allow nonprintable characters (i.e., characters with hex values less than
0x20) to be encoded.
Sample 1:
aaa
- Starting block number (000
maximum block number).*
b
- The number of retry attempts, 0-9.
c
- Lock block after writing:
0 = No Protection
1 = Write Protect
d
- Reserved. Should be 0.
ee…e
- Data to be encoded on RFID tag.
<STX>KtWB004000900<0x00><0x01><0x02><0x03>[CR]
Sample 1 programs the hex values 0x00, 0x01, 0x02, 0x03 in block zero.
Sample 2:
<STX>KtWUE00700ABCDEF1234B004000510TEST[CR]
Sample 2 programs the data “TEST” to the tag with UID “E00700ABCDEF1234” at block zero then
write-protects block zero (attempting to write five additional times, if necessary). When write
protecting (locking) with UID, the separate lock command will also use the addressed mode and the
supplied UID.
* Dependent on transponder manufacturer.
Note: When using addressed commands and the tag with the specified UID cannot be found, a standard
RFID read/write fault will be issued.
104
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
Extended System-Level Command Functions
STX KuB
Read Data from Gen2 Tag Section
This command reads a specific block address of a Gen2 tag.
Syntax:
<STX>KuBaaabbb
Where:
aaa
- Block address number, where: 000 is kill/access section; 001
is EPC section; 002 is Tag ID; and, 003 is user memory.
bbb
- Data offset in word length
Sample:
<STX>KuB001002
This example reads the block address 1 at offset word 2, which is location of the EPC data.
STX KuF Send RFID Device Firmware Version
This command instructs the RFID device to return the firmware version.
Syntax:
<STX>KuF<CR>
Printer response:
DEVICE VERSION: XXX.XXX.XXX[CR]
STX KuJ
Write Data to Gen 2 Tag Section
This command writes a specific block address of a Gen2 tag.
Syntax:
<STX>KuJaaabbb<data>
Where:
aaa
- Block address number, where: 000 is kill/access section; 001
is EPC section; 002 is Tag ID; or, 003 is user memory
bbb
- Data offset in word length
<data>
- Hexadecimal data, must be length of multiples of 4
Sample:
<STX>KuJ001002112233445566778899AABBCC
This example writes data “112233445566778899AABBCC” to block address 1 at offset word 2,
which is the EPC data.
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
105
Extended System-Level Command Functions
STX KuR
Read Data from RFID Tag
(Direct Mode – UHF Interface – Hexadecimal Data Only)
This command instructs the RFID device to read data from the tag and then place that data into a
replaceable field. It is expected that the tag transponder is within the read / write distance of the RFID
programming device; otherwise, “Void” will be printed in the text or bar code label field(s).
Note: Data should be at least 16 or 24 characters in length.
Syntax:
<STX>KuRaa<CR>
Where:
aa
- Field number in which to place the data (must be 01, 02, 03, etc.)
matching the order of Label Formatting command, U.
Note: The 00 value will send the unique tag ID to the host with no
printing.
Sample:
<STX>L
D11
1911A1801000100 xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
U
1A31050002000200 xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
U
X
<STX>KuR01
<STX>Kur02
<STX>G
The sample creates a replaceable text field (01) and bar code field (02) and then recalls the data from
the tag and places it into the specified fields.
106
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
Extended System-Level Command Functions
STX KuW Write Data to RFID Tag
(Direct Mode – UHF Interface – Hexadecimal Data Only)
This command instructs the RFID device to write data to the tag. It is expected that the tag
transponder will be within the read / write distance of the RFID programming device; otherwise, a
warning will occur and a warning message (Read / Write Fail) will be displayed.
Syntax:
<STX>KuWabcc…c<CR>
Where:
a
- The number of attempts to locate, erase, and program the tag, 1-9.
b
- Reserved. Should be 0.
cc…c
- Data to be encoded in the ASCII format. Must be sixteen
characters in length. The valid characters are 0-9, A-F.
Note: Must be 16 or 24 characters long.
Sample:
<STX>KuW10ABCDEF0102030405[CR]
The sample programs the data <0xAB><0xCD><0xEF><0x01><0x02><0x03><0x04><0x05>
to the tag, attempting to write one additional time if necessary.
STX KV
Verifier Enable/Disable
(Display-Equipped Models only)
This command allows the verifier (option, if installed), to be enabled and disabled.
Syntax:
<STX>KVa<CR>
Where:
a
STX KW
-
Y = verifier enable
N = verifier disable
Memory Configuration, Printable Label Width
(Non-Display Models only)
See the <STX>K command.
Note: This command will result in a system reset for the EX2.
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
107
Extended System-Level Command Functions
STX Kx
Delete Configuration File
(Display-Equipped Models only)
This command deletes the specified configuration file.
Syntax:
<STX>KxmName<CR>
Where:
m
-
Valid Module ID – Range A to Z.
Name
-
The name, up to 16 characters, of the configuration file.
<CR>
-
0x0d terminates the name.
Sample:
<STX>KxYPlant1
This command deletes the configuration file Plant1 located on Module Y. (Remember to prefix this
command with the Module (Un)Protect Command <STX>Kp.)
STX KZ
Immediately Set Parameter
This command immediately sets the specified parameter.
Syntax:
<STX>KZax<CR>
Where:
a
-
Valid parameter identifier, as follows:
F
H
P
S
x
=
=
=
=
Feed Speed
Heat Setting
Print Speed
Slew Speed
-
Speed Parameter Range – A to e (see Appendix L).
-
Heat Parameter Range – A two-digit value (00-30); see the
‘H’ Label Formatting Command.
-orxx
Sample:
<STX>KZH22
This command causes the file currently being executed to assume a Heat Value of 22.
108
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
Label Formatting Command Functions
Introduction
The <STX>L command switches the printer from the System-Level Processor to the Label Formatting
Processor. All commands following the <STX>L are interpreted as label formatting commands, and can
be used to override default parameter values. Selectable parameter value defaults may be also reassigned
via the Setup Menu, as defined in the corresponding Operator’s Manual. Label formats that contain no
commands overriding printer default values will assume those defaults.
:
Set Cut By Amount
This command allows a predetermined number of labels to be printed before a cut is initiated. This
feature is useful when it is necessary to print an uncut strip of labels. Between 1 and 9999 labels may
be printed before a cut is made. The amount must be smaller than the quantity of labels printed.
Syntax:
:nnnn
Where:
nnnn
Sample:
<STX>L<CR>
:0005<CR>
141100001000100SAMPLE LABEL<CR>
Q0021<CR>
E<CR>
- Is a four digit decimal number indicating the number of labels to
be printed before a cut is performed.
The sample instructs the printer to make a cut after 5, 10, and 20 labels have been printed. Label 21
will be cut at the start of a subsequent label format (batch) unless a default (cut by amount) greater
than one has been entered.
Note: The cutter must be enabled and all mechanism interlocks closed for operation.
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
109
Label Formatting Command Functions
A
Set Format Attribute
This command specifies the type of format operation and remains in effect until another format
command is specified or another label format has begun (<STX>L). Each label format defaults to
Attribute 2 (Transparent Mode).
Syntax:
An
Where:
n
Sample:
<STX>L
A3
141100001000100DATAMAX<CR>
141100001100110DATAMAX<CR>
E
-
Is attribute mode 1, 2, 3, or 5; see table below.
The default is 1, (XOR Mode).
The sample sets the printer to Opaque Mode and produces one label.
n
Attribute
Description
1
XOR
Mode
In this mode, the region where text strings, images or
bar codes intersect will not be printed. (An odd
number of overlapping objects will print.)
2
Transparent
Mode
This is the default mode; the intersecting regions of
text strings, images, and bar codes will print, allowing
the user to print fields on top of one another.
3
Opaque
Mode
Interacting text is obliterated by the text formatted
last. Each character cell is treated as opaque. This
mode is effective only in rotation 1. See Record
Structure Types.
Inverse
Mode
This mode allows inverse (white on black) printing
(e.g., a proportionally sized border and background
are printed similar to photographic negative). If text or
image fields overlap in this mode, the effect will be
similar to the XOR mode.
5
Example
Table 6-1: Format Attributes
110
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
Label Formatting Command Functions
B
Bar Code Magnification
(Display-Equipped Models only)
This command provides a mechanism to specify bar codes greater than 36 dots (0-9,A-Z in the field
record). The value is reset to 1 at the start of every label and stays active for the entire label or set to
a new value.
Syntax:
Bnn
Where:
nn
Sample:
<STX>L<CR>
D11
B01
1a9305000100030ABCD<CR>
B03
1a3105000700030ABCD<CR>
Q0001
E
-
Is a two digit decimal number indicating the magnification
value.
The sample instructs the printer to print two bar codes, each 9 dots by 3 dots.
C
Set Column Offset Amount
This command allows horizontal adjustment of the point where printing begins. The printer is
instructed to print label formats nnnn units to the right of the position that the format specifies. This
feature is useful when a single format is to be printed on labels containing preprinted information.
Note: If using preprinted labels where the placement of the preprint data varies from label to label, the
printed information may overlap the preprinted data.
Syntax:
Cnnnn
Where:
nnnn
Sample:
<STX>L
C0050
141100001000100DATAMAX<CR>
-
Is a four-digit number for the column offset, inches/100 or
mm/10. The printer default is 0 for offset.
The sample shifts all format data 0.5 inches to the right, unless the printer is in metric mode, (see
Label Formatting Command ‘m’).
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
111
Label Formatting Command Functions
c
Set Cut By Amount
This command is the same as the ‘:’ command except only a two-digit value can be entered. This
command allows a predetermined number of labels to be printed before a cut is made. 1 to 99 labels
may be printed before a cut is made.
Syntax:
cnn
Where:
nn
Sample
<STX>L<CR>
c07<CR>
141100001000100SAMPLE LABEL<CR>
Q0021<CR>
E
-
Is a two-digit number indicating the number of labels to be
printed before a cut is made. The default is one.
The sample instructs the printer to make cuts after labels 7, 14, and 21 have been printed. See Label
Formatting Command ‘:’.
Note: The cutter must be enabled and all mechanism interlocks closed for the cut operation.
D
Set Dot Size Width and Height
This command is used to change the size of a printed dot, hence the print resolution – dots per inch
(DPI) of the print head. By changing the height of a dot, the maximum length of a label can be
increased or decreased. For the element sizes see Appendix K.
Syntax:
Dwh
Where:
w
-
Is Dot Width multiplier 1 or 2.
h
-
Is Dot Height multiplier 1, 2, or 3.
Note: D11 is the default value for 300, 400 and 600 DPI printer models, while D22 is the default value for
all 203 DPI printer models.
112
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
Label Formatting Command Functions
E
Terminate Label Formatting Mode and Print Label
This command causes the printer, when the processing Label Formatting commands, to terminate the
Label Formatting Mode then generate, print, and feed a label. The label generated will be based on
whatever data has been received to that point, even if no printable data has been received. Other
termination commands are ‘X’ and ‘s’. Commands sent to the printer after the Terminate Label
command must be of the Immediate, System-Level, or Font Download type.
Syntax:
E
Sample:
<STX>L<CR>
121100000000000Testing<CR>
E<CR>
The sample will print one label.
e
Recall Printer Configuration
(Display-Equipped Models only)
This command recalls a previously stored printer configuration. It is highly recommended that only
one Recall Printer Configuration command be used per label, and that it be used at the beginning of
the label; otherwise, unpredictable results will occur. (Printer configurations may be stored using the
Extended System-Level Commands or the printer’s menu system.)
Syntax:
eName<CR>
Where:
Name
-
The name, up to 16 characters, of the configuration file.
<CR>
-
0x0d terminates the name.
Sample:
<STX>L<CR>
ePlant1<CR>
1A2210001000000Testing<CR>
E<CR>
The sample recalls the stored printer configuration, Plant1.
F
Advanced Format Attributes
These commends extend the text presentation capabilities for Scalable Fonts. The format attribute
allows a set of label format records to select Bolding, Italicizing and Underlining. Additional
commands allow the specification of line rotation and font changes within a label field. Reference
Section 8.0, Generating Label Formats / Advanced Format Attributes for details.
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
113
Label Formatting Command Functions
f
Set Present Speed
(Non-Display Models only)
This command controls the rate at which the present distance is positioned, allowing the media
movement to be slowed during ‘presentation’ (the distance traveled after printing is completed to the
label stop position). This command is used only within the context of a label format. The speed
assigned is retained until another label format is received or until power is removed; if a subsequent
format does not contain a present speed command then the present speed reverts to the feed speed.
Syntax:
fa
Where:
a
Sample:
<STX>LD11H30PGSG
fA
191100200830165Fixed Data Field 1
E
<STX>L
191100200830165Fixed Data Field 1
E
-
Is a single alpha character representing a speed, limited by the
feed speed range; see Appendix L. The default is the feed speed.
The sample prints two labels; the first label has present speed of 1 inch per second, while the second
reverts to the feed speed of 4 inches per second.
G
Place Data in Global Register
The ‘G’ command saves the print data of a print format record in a global register (temporary
storage). This data may be retrieved and copied to another record in the same label format using the
special Label Formatting Command: <STX>S. Global registers are named in the order received,
beginning with register A, ending at register P, and incrementing with each instance of the G
command use.
Syntax:
G
Sample:
<STX>L<CR>
121100000000000Testing<CR>
G<CR>
1A2210001000000<STX>SA<CR>
E<CR>
The sample stores, retrieves and prints the data in global register A. One label is printed with
“Testing” in two locations.
114
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
Label Formatting Command Functions
H
Enter Heat Setting
This command changes the “on time” of elements of the print head. The default setting is 10 (except
in the case of printers with a menu, where the default setting can be changed through the keypad). An
increase or decrease in this value results in a change of heat applied by the print head to the media,
lightening or darkening the print contrast accordingly. This is helpful when using different media
types, each requiring a different amount of heat to properly image the media. The host device can
send this command value to correct the heat setting per the application.
Syntax:
Hnn
Where:
nn
Sample:
<STX>L<CR>
H15<CR>
141100001000100SAMPLE LABEL<CR>
E
-
Is a two-digit heat value (00-30)
The sample sets the printer for a heat value of 15 and prints one label.
Note: Non-Display Models – the “Darkness Potentiometer,” while providing subtle changes, is intended to
be used to match print contrast levels following print head replacements.
J
Justification
This command changes the printing justification.
Note: Display-Equipped Models – This command is only valid for use with scalable fonts.
Syntax:
Ja
Where:
a
Sample:
<STX>L<CR>
1911A1801001000TEST1
JR
1911A1801000100TEST2
JC
1911A1802000200TEST3
E
-
Is a single-digit alpha character:
L = left justified (default)
R = right justified
C = center justified
The sample’s first text field “TEST1” will be printed at one inch up, one inch over going right. The
second text “TEST2” will be printed at one inch up one inch over, going left. (Note the characters
will not be reversed.) The third field “TEST3” will be centered on the point two inches up two inches
over.
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
115
Label Formatting Command Functions
M
Select Mirror Mode
This command instructs the printer to “mirror” all subsequent print field records. This command
toggles the mirroring mode. Mirrored fields are transposed visually, as if the object is viewed in a
mirror.
Syntax:
M
Sample:
<STX>L
161100003200010 NOT MIRRORED<CR>
M<CR>
161100003000400 MIRRORED<CR>
E
Printed Result:
m
Set Metric Mode
This command sets the printer to measure in metric. When this command is sent, all measurements
will be interpreted as metric values, (e.g., a column offset of 0010 will be interpreted as 1.0 mm). All
printers default to Imperial (inch) mode.
Syntax:
m
Sample:
<STX>L<CR>
m
141100001000100SAMPLE LABEL<CR>
E
The sample prints the text (SAMPLE LABEL) starting at location coordinates 10.0 mm, 10.0 mm.
n
Set Inch (Imperial) Mode
This command sets the printer to measure in inches. When this command is sent, all measurements
will change to inches. All printers default to Imperial units. Menu selectable.
Syntax:
n
Sample:
<STX>L<CR>
n
141100001000100SAMPLE LABEL<CR>
E
The sample prints the text (SAMPLE LABEL) starting at location coordinates 1.0 inch, 1.0 inch.
116
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
Label Formatting Command Functions
P
Set Print Speed
This command sets a print speed for a label or batch of labels.
Syntax:
Pa
Where:
a
Sample:
<STX>L
PC
141100001000100LABEL1<CR>
E
<STX>L
141100001000100LABEL2<CR>
E
-
Is a single character representing a speed; see Appendix L for
valid ranges.
The sample prints two labels, the first at a speed of 2 inches per second (51 mm per second) and the
second at the printer default.
p
Set Backfeed Speed
This command, typically used in conjunction with the Cut or Peel and Present operations, controls the
rate at which the labels will reverse to align to the next start of print position. The setting remains in
effect until another backfeed speed command is received or until the printer is reset.
Syntax:
pa
Where:
a
Sample:
<STX>L
pF
-
Is a single alpha character representing a speed; see Appendix
L for valid ranges.
The sample sets the printer to a backup speed of 3.5 IPS.
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
117
Label Formatting Command Functions
Q
Set Quantity of Labels to Print
This command sets the number of the label copies to be printed. A one to five digit value is allowed,
if the command is delimited by a carriage return <CR>. This permits host applications to generate
label quantity commands without the need to pad leading zeros. (A four-digit command value does
not need to be <CR> terminated.)
Syntax:
Qnnnnn
Where:
nnnnn
Sample:
<STX>L
121100000000000Testing<CR>
Q0020<CR>
E<CR>
- Is a one to five-digit delimited value setting for the number of
labels to be printed. The default value is one.
The sample will print a batch of 20 identical labels.
Note: (All models, except E-Class) Specifying 9999 as the four-digit quantity causes continuous printing.
R
Set Row Offset Amount
This command allows vertical adjustment of the point where printing begins. The printer is instructed
to print label formats nnnn units above the position that the format specifies. This feature is useful
when a single format is to be printed on labels containing preprinted information.
Notes:
(1) If using preprinted labels where the placement of the preprint data varies from label to label,
the printed information may overlap the preprinted data.
(2) If printing near the TOF is important (i.e., on very small labels, or in very tight formats), it may
be necessary to use the ROW ADJUST setting to shift the vertical start of print position in the
negative direction.
Syntax:
Rnnnn
Where:
nnnn
Sample:
<STX>L
R0037<CR>
141100001000100SAMPLE LABEL<CR>
E
-
Is a four-digit number (0000-9999) for the row offset, in
inches/100 or millimeters/10. The printer default is 0.
The sample prints a label with a row offset amount of .37 inches, unless in metric mode.
118
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
Label Formatting Command Functions
r
Recall Stored Label Format
This command is used to retrieve label formats stored on a memory module.
Syntax:
rnn...n
Where:
nn…n
-
Is a label name, up to 16 characters in length.
The samples below explain different ways to recall and print a label format. (To view a memory
module’s directory of label formats use the <STX>W command.)
String Sent:
Printer Interpretation:
Sample 1:
<STX>L<CR>
rTEST<CR>
Q0002<CR>
E<CR>
Begin label format
Retrieve format named TEST
Quantity requested = 2
Terminate formatting and print
Sample 2:
<STX>L<CR>
rTEST<CR>
X<CR>
<STX>G<CR>
Begin label format
Retrieve format named test
Terminate formatting
Print
Sample 3:
<STX>L<CR>
D11<CR>
PO<CR>
SO<CR>
rTEST<CR>
E<CR>
Begin label format
Dot size = 1x1
Print speed O
Feed speed O
Retrieve format named test
Terminate formatting and print
S
Set Feed Speed
This command controls the rate at which the label is moved through non-printed areas. The setting
remains unchanged unless another feed speed command is received or until the printer is reset.
Syntax:
Sa
Where:
a
Sample:
<STX>L
SE
141100001000100LABEL1<CR>
E
<STX>L
1411000010001000LABEL2<CR>
E
- Is a single alpha character representing a speed; see Appendix
L for valid ranges.
The sample sets the feed speed to 3 inches per second (76 mmps), and prints two labels. The feed
speed for the second label is the same as the first.
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
119
Label Formatting Command Functions
s
Store Label Format in Module
This command stores a label format to a specified module as a .dlb file. Supplying the module name
will store the label to that module; otherwise, using C will cause the label format to be stored in the
selected default module (see <STX>X). In addition, this command terminates the Label Formatting
Command.
Syntax:
sann…n
Where:
a
-
Is the module designator representing a single character
module name; see Appendix K.
nn…n
-
Represents the name of the label (maximum 16 characters).
Sample:
<STX>L<CR>
D11<CR>
191100501000000123456789012<CR>
1911005020000001234567<CR>
191100500000000Sample<CR>
1X1100000000000B250250002002<CR>
Q0001<CR>
sATEST<CR>
The example stores a format in memory module A and names it ‘TEST’. (To recall a label format
from the module use the ‘r’ command.)
T
Set Field Data Line Terminator
This command, intended for use with record types that accept binary data (e.g., PDF417), allows
special binary control codes (e.g., a carriage return) to be embedded in the printed data by setting an
alternate data line terminator. It remains valid only for the next format record, then the terminator
defaults back to the carriage return.
Syntax:
Tnn
Where:
nn
Sample:
<STX>L<CR>
T00<CR>
191100200000000TEST<NULL>
141100001000100TERMIATOR<CR>
Q0001<CR>
E<CR>
-
Is an ASCII two-character representation of a HEX code to be
used for the end of data terminator.
The sample sets the printer to use a NULL terminator (ASCII NULL: HEX 00) for the data line
termination code. The terminator is immediately restored to a carriage return <CR>, as seen in the
format record containing the text ‘TERMINATOR’.
120
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
Label Formatting Command Functions
U
Mark Previous Field as a String Replacement Field
This command controls the way replacement data is formatted. Specifying a field as a string
replacement for dynamic fields, and not for static fields, will optimize label throughput. See the
<STX>U command.
Note: The length of the original string sets the data string length of any replacement; both must be equal.
The data being used when created must be valid for the font type being selected.
Syntax:
U
Sample:
<STX>L
D11
121100001000000123456789012<CR>
U<CR>
1211000020000001234567<CR>
U<CR>
161100000000000Sample<CR>
1X1100000000000B250250002002<CR>
Q0001
E
<STX>U01ABCDEFGHIJKL<CR>
<STX>U028901234<CR>
<STX>G
The sample sets up the label format for register loading and prints two labels. The first two of the four
format records have been designated as replacement fields. The second label is generated with
System-Level field-replacement commands and prints the last label.
X
Terminate Label Formatting Mode
This command causes the printer, when in label formatting mode, to immediately switch to the
system command mode and generate a label format based on the data received at that point. However,
unlike the ‘E’ command, it will not print a label. (Other termination commands are the ‘E’ and ‘s’.)
Syntax:
X
Sample:
<STX>L<CR>
141100001000100SAMPLE<CR>
X<CR>
The sample will result in a label format, but no label will be printed.
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
121
Label Formatting Command Functions
y
Select Font Symbol Set
This command, like the <STX>y, selects the scalable font symbol set. The selected symbol set
remains active until another symbol set is selected; see the <STX>y command for details.
Syntax:
ySxx
Where:
S
-
Byte-size designation; see Appendix H:
S = Single byte symbol sets.
U = Double byte symbol sets.
xx
-
Symbol set selection.
Sample:
<STX>L
ySSW<CR>
The sample selects the Swedish symbol set for use in succeeding format records using scalable fonts.
z
Zero (Ø) Conversion to “0”
This command removes the slash zero in fonts 0 to 8, and in the human readable field (if any) of the
bar codes A to Z. The command applies only to format records containing those fonts and bar codes,
and is effective only for the label format in which it appears.
Note:
122
None of the smooth fonts (i.e., Font 9) use the slash zero convention. This command will have no
effect on scalable fonts.
Syntax:
z
Sample:
<STX>L
z
121100000000000Test0000<CR>
E
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
Label Formatting Command Functions
+ (>)(()
Make Last Field Entered Increment Numeric (Alphanumeric)
(Hexadecimal)
This command, useful in printing sequenced labels, causes the printer to automatically increment a
field on the labels in a batch. The numeric data in the field will increment by the value assigned after
the plus sign (+) each time a label is produced (or the greater than symbol [>] can be substituted to
make the field increment alphabetically, or the left parenthesis [(] can be substituted to make the field
increment hexadecimal data*). This command is effective only on the label format record that it
follows, and is intended to be used with the Q, <STX>E, or <STX>G commands.
Syntax:
*pii
Where:
*
-
Is + for numeric increment, > for alphanumeric increment, or
(for hexadecimal increment.
p
-
Is the fill character for the left-hand character of the field.
ii
-
Is the amount by which to increment the field.
Sample:
<STX>L<CR>
13220000000000012345<CR>
+01<CR>
Q0003<CR>
E<CR>
The sample will generate a single field label format that prints the initial label with a value of 12345,
and then increments that number by one for the next two labels.
Embedding
Numeric strings for incrementing may also be embedded between alphabetic characters (e.g., when
systems require alphanumeric bar codes with alphabetic prefixes or suffixes).
Sample:
<STX>L<CR>
161100000100010AB0001CD<CR>
+ 100<CR>
Q0003<CR>
E<CR>
The sample will print three labels, incrementing 0001 by 1 on each label with AB and CD remaining
untouched: AB0001CD, AB0002CD, AB0003CD. Note that the increment value has one leading
blank and two trailing zeros, while the blank is a pad character and the trailing zeroes are
placeholders that leave CD unchanged.
* Valid hexadecimal data is 0-9 or A-F, usually in pairs.
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
123
Label Formatting Command Functions
– (<)())
Make Last Field Entered Decrement Numeric (Alphanumeric)
(Hexadecimal)
This command, useful in printing sequenced labels, causes the printer to automatically decrement a
field on the labels in a batch. The numeric data in the field will decrement by the value assigned after
the minus (-) sign each time a label is produced (or the less than character [<] can be substituted to
make the field decrement alphabetically, or the right parenthesis [)] can be substituted to make the
field decrement hexadecimal data*). This command is effective only on the label format record that it
follows, and is intended to be used with the Q, <STX>E or <STX>G commands.
Syntax:
*pii
Where:
*
-
Is – for numeric decrement, < for alphanumeric decrement, or)
for hexadecimal decrement.
p
-
Is the fill character for the leftmost character of the field.
ii
-
Is the amount by which to decrement the field.
Sample:
<STX>L<CR>
132200000000000123AB<CR>
<01<CR>
Q0003<CR>
E<CR>
The sample will generate a single field label format that prints the initial label with a value of 123AB,
and then decrements that number by one for the next two labels.
Embedding
Numeric strings for decrementing may also be embedded between alphabetic characters (e.g., when
systems require alphanumeric bar codes with alphabetic prefixes or suffixes).
Sample:
<STX>L<CR>
1611000001000101000CD<CR>
- 100<CR>
Q0003<CR>
E<CR>
The sample will print three labels: 1000CD, 999CD, and 998CD. Note that the pad character is a
placeholder for digits removed from the left side in the subtraction process. When a fixed pitch font
(where all characters have the same width) is used, the justification of the rightmost character is
sustained regardless of the number of digits replaced by the pad character on the left side.
* Valid hexadecimal data is 0-9 or A-F, usually in pairs.
124
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
Label Formatting Command Functions
^
Set Count By Amount
This command allows applications using the increment / decrement field command to print more than
one label with the same field value before the field data is updated. All printers default to 1.
Note:
This command can only be issued once per label format. In addition, when alternate Control Codes
are enabled, the ^ character must be replaced by the @ character (hexadecimal 0x40). See
Control Codes.
Syntax:
^nn
Where:
^
- May be 0x55 or 0x40; see Control Codes.
nn
- Is a two-digit value that specifies the number of labels to be
generated before incrementing (or decrementing) the field value.
Sample:
<STX>L<CR>
13220000000000012345<CR>
-01<CR>
^02<CR>
Q0006<CR>
E<CR>
The sample prints two labels containing the same field value before decrementing the field. Six labels
are printed.
Special Label Formatting Command Functions
Two Special Label Formatting Commands, the <STX>S and the <STX>T, are entered directly into the
data field of label format records. Do not confuse them with System-Level Commands because the same
control character is used. If alternate control codes are enabled the <STX> becomes ‘~’ (hexadecimal
0x7E); see Control Codes.
Label Formatting Character
<STX>S
<STX>T
Command Description
Recall global data and place in field
Print time and date
Table 6-2: Special Label Formatting Commands
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
125
Label Formatting Command Functions
STX S
Recall Global Data and Place in Field
This command, when in the format record data field, places data from a specified global register into
the data field. See the G command.
Syntax:
<STX>Sn
Where:
n
Sample:
<STX>L<CR>
121100000000000DMX<CR>
G<CR>
1A2210001000000<STX>SA<CR>
E<CR>
-
Specifies the global register (A − P) that contains the data to
place into the data field.
The sample places the string “DMX” into the next available global register (A), and then line 4 is
effectively replaced by the data from global register A.
STX T
Print Time and Date
This command, using string characters and markers, allows time and date data to be selected and
retrieved from the printer’s internal clock. In addition, the <STX>T may be preceded by data to be
printed/encoded, and/or the string may now be terminated by an <STX> command and then followed
by more data terminated by a <CR>. The string characters/markers are not printed; instead, the
printed label will show a corresponding print value.
Note:
When using substitution, you must ensure the converted string produces valid characters for the
selected bar code / font.
Syntax:
<STX>Tstring<CR>
Where:
string -
String
Characters
A
BCD
EF
GH...O
PQ
RSTU
Is any set of characters, A - Z and a – h. See the table below.
Print
Values
Day of the week (Mon = 1, Sun = 7)
Day of the week name
Month number
Month name
Day
Year
String
Markers
VW
XY
Za
gh
bc
def
Print
Values
Hour in 24 hour format
Hour in 12 hour format
Minutes
Seconds
AM or PM
Julian date
Table 6-3: Time and Date String Characters
Note:
126
The sample listings below assume a current printer date of December 21, 1998.
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
Label Formatting Command Functions
Sample 1:
<STX>L<CR>
121100001000100<STX>TBCD GHI PQ, TU<CR>
E<CR>
Sample 1 will print SUN DEC 21, 98 on a label.
Sample 2:
<STX>L<CR>
191100100100010<STX>TEF/PQ<CR>
E<CR>
Sample 2 will print 12/21 on a label.
Sample 3:
<STX>L<CR>
191100100100010ABC <STX>TEF/PQ<STX> DEF<CR>
E<CR>
Sample 3 will print ABC 12/21 DEF on a label. (This illustrates a method of embedding the time
string. The string must be terminated by an <STX>.)
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
127
Label Formatting Command Functions
128
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
Font Loading Command Functions
Introduction
The commands used for font loading are usually generated by font creation software; however, the
assigned font ID number command must be sent to the printer before the font file. All Font Loading
Commands begin with <ESC> (ASCII control character 27 [decimal]).
The downloaded font will be stored in the default module (refer to the <STX>X command) as a .dbm file.
The commands in the table below are listed in their order of appearance, top to bottom, during font
downloading. The <SOH>D command must be sent prior to downloading a font.
Command
*c###D
)s#Wnn…n
*c#E
(s#W
Description
Assign Font ID Number
Font Descriptor
Character Code
Character Download Data
Table 7-1: Font Loading Commands
*c###D
Assign Font ID Number
This command is the first command required for downloading a font to either RAM or Flash Memory
modules. ESC represents the ASCII control character 27.
Syntax:
<ESC>*c###D
Where:
###
)s###W
-
Is the font ID numbers 100-999 (000 – 099 are reserved for
resident fonts).
Font Descriptor
This command (typically first data in a font file) contains all of the information about the font
contained in the file. Different font generation software will create different length header
information, but the initial 64 bytes will remain consistent with the PCL-4 (HP LaserJet II) format.
Syntax:
<ESC>)s###Wddd…d
Where:
###
-
Is the number of bytes of font descriptor data from 1 to 3
ASCII decimal digits.
dd…d
-
Is the descriptor.
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
129
Font Loading Commands
*c###E
Character Code
This code is the ASCII decimal value corresponding to the next downloaded character.
Syntax:
<ESC>*c###E
Where:
###
(s#W
-
Is the ASCII value of the character, three digits maximum, 0
to 999.
Character Download Data
This command contains all of the information for one downloaded character.
130
Syntax:
<ESC>(s###Wnn…n
Where:
###
-
Is the number of bytes of bit-mapped data, three digits
maximum, from 1 to 999.
nn…n
-
Is the bit-mapped data.
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
Generating Label Formats
Introduction
This section explains the use of the different fields in a print format record.
Format Record Commands
Table 8-1 is an example of a label format as seen by the printer, while Figure 8-1 is the label generated by
this format. The printer receives the data sequentially, left to right and top to bottom.
String Sent to Printer
Interpretation
Begin label format
Set dot size
Format text
Format text
Format text
Format text
Format text
Format bar code with text
Format bar code
Format box
Format line
Format line
Format text
Label quantity
End formatting, begin printing
<STX>L<CR>
D11<CR>
121100000050005Home Position<CR>
191100602000200ROTATION 1<CR>
291100602000200ROTATION 2<CR>
391100602000200ROTATION 3<CR>
491100602000200ROTATION 4<CR>
1A3104003000260123456<CR>
4a6210002500140123456<CR>
1X1100000000000B400400003003<CR>
1X1100002000000L400001<CR>
1X1100000000200L001400<CR>
121100004100010Printhead Location<CR>
Q0001<CR>
E<CR>
Table 8-1: Sample Label Format
Note: This example assumes that the printer is in ‘inch’ mode (<STX>n).
Printhead Location
(Media
Movement)
Home Position
Figure 8-1: Formatted Sample Label
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
131
Generating Label Formats
The first line in the sample format (Table 8-1) is the System-Level Command directing the printer to begin
label formatting. (Other System-Level Commands may precede the <STX>L for printer setup.) Lines 2, 14,
and 15 are Label Formatting Commands. Line 15 is the exit and print command. The remaining lines (313) are print format records, explained in this chapter.
A record is a data string that contains the information to be printed on the label(s). Records are the building
blocks of label formats. Every record must end with a termination character (usually a carriage return,
<CR>). Omitting termination characters will result in the concatenation of records. Omitting the carriage
return that precedes the termination character E, which is necessary to complete the label formatting and
begin printing, will cause the printer to continue interpreting all subsequent data as label print format
records.
Generating Records
Every record is made of three parts: (1) a header that is 15 bytes in length, (2) the data to be printed,
and (3) a termination character (e.g., <CR>) marking the end of the field. The header is used to select
the appearance of the data when printed by choosing rotation, font type, size, and position options.
Every header contains similar information, but different types of records may use this information in
different ways. The six record types are:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Internal Bit-Mapped Font
Smooth Font (Simulated)
Scalable Font
Bar code
Images
Graphics
The Structure of a Record
The basic structure of the record is described below. For details regarding the various interpretations of
the six types see Record Structure Types.
The third line of the label format example in Table 8-1 consists of the following:
121100000050005HOME POSITION<CR>
This string comprises a complete record, shown below, divided into its three basic component parts.
Header
Data String
Termination Character
121100000050005
HOME POSITION
<CR>
Table 8-2: Record Structure Components
The record conforms to the following fixed field format (spaces added for readability). Identifying
lower case letters have been placed below field values for reference in the following sections:
132
1 2 1 1
000
0005
0005
HOME POSITION
<CR>
a b c d
eee
ffff
gggg
[hhhh iiii] jj…j
Termination character
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
Generating Label Formats
Location
Within
Record
Record Type
Internal BitMapped Font
Smooth
Font
Scalable
Font
Bar
Code
Images
Graphics
a
Rotation
Rotation
Rotation
Rotation
Rotation
1
b
Font ID
9
9
Bar Code
Y
X
c
Width
Multiplier
Width
Multiplier
Width
Multiplier
Wide
Bar
Width
Multiplier
1
d
Height
Multiplier
Height
Multiplier
Height
Multiplier
Narrow
Bar
Height
Multiplier
1
eee
000
Font Size/
ID
ID
Bar Code
Height
000
000
ffff
Row
Position
Row
Position
Row
Position
Row
Position
Row
Position
Row
Position
gggg
Column
Position
Column
Position
Column
Position
Column
Position
Column
Position
Column
Position
hhhh
N/A
N/A
Font Height
N/A
N/A
N/A
iiii
N/A
N/A
Font Width
N/A
N/A
N/A
jj…j
Data
String
Data
String
Data
String
Data
String
Image
Name
Graphics
Specifiers
Table 8-3: Record Type Structure
In Table 8-3, the record structure is shown for each of the record types. The left-most column shows
the locations of all characters in the record, and corresponds to the example above the table. Each
record structure interprets the characters of the record in its own way, though some of the
interpretations of the characters are identical across all record types. For example, the characters ffff
are interpreted as Row Position in all record types. While c is a Width Multiplier for Internal BitMapped Font, Smooth Font, Scalable Font, and Image record types, it has other interpretations for Bar
Code and Graphics record types.
The Header Fields
Each of the fields in the record header is generally described below. Please reference the detailed
descriptions under Record Structure Types for variations. The field name titles of the following
paragraphs are preceded with a reference letter from Table 8-3. All characters sent to the printer within
the header fields are ASCII, alphanumeric.
a:
Rotation
The first field of a header is a single ASCII character that selects the degree of rotation for the data
to be printed on a label. Valid rotation values are clockwise: 1 (0º); 2 (90º); 3 (180º); and, 4 (270º).
Figure 8-1 shows the direction and amount of rotation, relative to the label feed direction, where
the bottom left corner is the pivot point.
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
133
Generating Label Formats
Fonts, Bar Codes, Graphics and Images
b:
The second field (b) determines how the rest of the fields are interpreted, as shown in the table
below. Values 0 through 9 select human-readable fonts. 0 through 8 will select standard Datamax
fonts; value 9 selects the CG Triumvirate smooth scalable font (internal) or scalable fonts. When 9
is used to select a scalable font, the font size (font I.D. number) is chosen by entering a value in the
height field eee.
Values A through z select bar codes. Values A through T (uppercase) will print bar codes with
human-readable interpretations. Values a through z (lowercase) will print bar codes only.
Value W requires two additional characters to specify the Bar Code/Font ID.
A font field value X selects a drawing object (line, box, circle or polygon), and field value Y is
used to print an image stored in a module.
Interpretation
b Font Field Value
0-9
Font
A-T
Bar code with human readable text.
a-z
Bar code without human readable text.
Wxx
Bar code/Font expansion
X
Line, box, polygon, circle
Y
Image
Table 8-4: Font Field Interpretations
c:
Width Multiplier
Values 1-9, A-Z, and a-z represent multiplication factors from 1 – 61, respectively. For humanreadable fonts, the width multiplier represents the number of times the selected font dot tables are
multiplied and has no effect on the character height. For bar codes, this character specifies the wide
bar width or ratio at a resolution that is dependent upon the printer model. See Appendix F for
default values.
d:
Height Multiplier
The height multiplier has the same range and function as the width multiplier (c), but vertical.
When used in the context of bar codes, this field is the ratio denominator, or the small bar (module)
width. Values 1-9, A-Z, and a-z will give a narrow bar width of one dot (dot size = 1/printhead
resolution) to dots. The narrow bar width resolution and range are dependent upon the print head
resolution, see Appendix K. A “dot multiplier” command can also be used to change the printed
dot size (see Label Formatting Command ‘D’ and Appendix F).
134
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
Generating Label Formats
Bar Code Height (Font Size/Selection)
eee:
This field has interpretations dependent upon the value of the font b field, as shown below.
b Font Field Value
eee Field Range
eee Field Interpretation
0-8
000
Not used –Internal bitmapped font
9
000-999, A04-A72, S00-S9z,
U00-U9z, u00-u9z
Font height; Font selection
A-T
000-999
Bar code height (with human readable)
a-z
000-999
Bar code height
Wxx
000-999
Bar code height (with human readable)
X,Y
000
Not used
Table 8-5: Bar Code Height Field Interpretations
ffff:
Row Position
The lower left corner of a label is considered the “home position” (see Figure 8-1). The row
position field is a vertical coordinate that determines how far above the home position the data is to
be printed. Field data is interpreted in hundredths of an inch or tenths of millimeters.
gggg:
Column Position
This field is a horizontal coordinate that determines how far to the right of “home position” the
data will be printed. Appendix G lists the maximum values of the gggg field.
hhhh:
Optional Scalable Font Height
The height of a scalable font can be specified in two ways: points or dots. To specify the height in
points the first character of the field is a ‘P’ followed by the number of points, 004 to 999. To
specify the size in dots, all four characters must be numeric. This field must be specified for
scalable fonts. (See note below Optional Scalable Font Width.)
iiii:
Optional Scalable Font Width
The width of a scalable font can be specified in two ways, points or dots. To specify the width in
points, the first character of the field is a ‘P’ followed by the number of points, 004 to 999 points.
To specify the size in dots, all four characters must be numeric. This field must be specified for
scalable fonts. See note below.
Note: To ensure that the data stream is portable to different Datamax printers, specify the font size in
points. If the font is specified in dots, it will output differently on printers with different DPI/MMPI
resolutions. There are 72.307 points per 1 inch (2.847 mm).
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
135
Generating Label Formats
Data Field
jj…j:
The final field contains the data that will actually be printed on the label. A string of data can be up
to 255 characters in length (except when using the PDF417 bar code, which may be up to 3000
characters long), ending with a carriage return. Characters placed in the data field will be printed as
long as they fall within the physical range of the print head. Consult Appendix K for a listing by
printer.
Record Structure Types
Each of the six record types has its own field structure and is described in the following section. The
record types allow quick reference to the field types and their valid data inputs for the field. There are
similar, but unique, record structures for each: internal, bit-mapped fonts, internal smooth fonts,
downloaded bit-mapped fonts, scalable fonts, bar codes, images, and graphics. The field location
identifiers in the tables that follow are the same as those in Table 8-3.
1.
Internal Bit-Mapped Fonts
This record type is used for internal bitmapped fonts (see Appendix C, Tables C-1 – C-5).
When a 0 through 8 is entered in field b, then the height field eee is not used. The bitmapped
fonts include 8 different fonts (see Appendix C). The character mapping for these fonts is shown
in Appendix A, or a subset thereof.
Field
a
b
c
d
eee
ffff
gggg
jj…j
Valid Inputs
1, 2, 3 and 4
0 to 8 (see Appendix C).
1 to 9, A to Z, and a to z
1 to 9, A to Z, and a to z
000
0000 to 9999
0000 to 9999 Dependent upon printer. See Appendix K.
Valid ASCII character string up to 255 characters, followed
by a termination character.
Meaning
Rotation
Font
Width Multiplier
Height Multiplier
N/A
Row
Column
Data
Table 8-6: Internal Bit-mapped Font Record Structure
2.
Smooth Font, Font Modules, and Downloaded Bit-Mapped Fonts
This record type is used for internal smooth fonts (CG Triumvirate – see Table C-6) or a bitmapped font downloaded to a memory module (see Font Loading Commands).
When a 9 is entered in field b, then the height field eee determines the font. The internal smooth
font has up to 13 font sizes (see Appendix C). Values 100 through 999 select individual fonts
stored on DRAM, or Flash memory. These include downloaded bit-mapped fonts (see Table 8-5).
Use eee values of 096 – 099 for Kanji fonts, if equipped (see Appendix I). The character mapping
for these fonts is shown in Appendix A or a subset thereof.
136
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
Generating Label Formats
Field
a
b
c
d
eee
ffff
gggg
jj…j
Valid Inputs
1, 2, 3 and 4
9
1 to 9, A to Z, and a to z
1 to 9, A to Z, and a to z
000 to 999 (000 to 099 Reserved), A04 to A72, x04 – x72*
0000 to 9999
0000 to 9999 Dependent upon printer. See Appendix K.
Valid ASCII character string up to 255 characters followed
by a termination character.
Meaning
Rotation
Fixed Value
Width Multiplier
Height Multiplier
Font/size
Row
Column
Data
* Where x is an upper case letter, see Appendix H.
Table 8-7: Smooth Font Record Structure
3.
Scalable Fonts
The Smooth Scalable Font Technology has been licensed from AGFA. Both Intellifont (.CDI) and
TrueType (.TTF) Scalable Font file formats are supported. The eee field identifies the scalable
font, and data type – normal (binary) or Hex ASCII. Uppercase S or U – binary, lowercase u – Hex
ASCII. See Appendix H for additional information. Values S00 to S9z, and U00 to U9z (u00 to
u9z), select a scalable font, either internal or downloaded.
S00 and S01 are used for the standard internal (resident) fonts on display-equipped printers, while
S01 is used for the standard internal (resident) font on non-display models.
Field
a
b
c
d
eee
ffff
gggg
Valid Inputs
1, 2, 3 and 4
9
1 to 9, A to Z, and a to z
1 to 9, A to Z, and a to z
S00 to Szz, U00-Uzz, u00-uzz
0000 to 9999
Dependent upon printer. See Appendix K.
hhhh
P004-P999, 0016-4163*
iiii
P004-P999, 0014-4163*
jj…j
Valid ASCII character string up to 255 characters followed by
a termination character.
Meaning
Rotation
Fixed Value
Width Multiplier
Height Multiplier
Font data type
Row
Column
Character height;
points, dots
Character width;
points, dots
Data
* Character size specifications are print head resolution dependent as indicated in the following table.
Table 8-8: Scalable Font Record Structure
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
137
Generating Label Formats
Print head
Resolution (DPI)
203
300
400
600
Character size (dots)
Width
16-2817
14-4163
22-5550
33-8325
Height
16-2817
16-4163
22-5550
33-8325
Table 8-9: Scalable Character Size Ranges
Note:
4.
A scalable font cache must be allocated to print. Minimum cache size is 15. The double byte
fonts require five units of additional cache.
Bar Codes
Valid inputs for the bar code field b are letters: uppercase letters will print a human-readable text
below the bar code; lowercase letters will only print the bar code. For example, entering a ‘p’ in the
b field selects the Postnet bar code. Because the Postnet font does not provide human-readable
data, the uppercase P is not valid. Other bar codes without a human-readable counterpart include u
(MaxiCode) and z (PDF417) – for additional model-specific restrictions see Appendix F.
For module-based bar codes, field d is the narrow bar width in dots (bar code module size). For
consistent results in all rotations for bar codes of this type, field d and field c must have the same
value. For ratio-based bar codes field c is the wide bar width in dots (the numerator); field d is the
narrow bar width in dots (the denominator). See Appendix G for specific bar code information and
variations in record format field usage.
The eee height field represents the bar code (symbol) height. The valid range (001 to 999)
translates to bar heights ranging from .01 inch (.254 mm) to 9.99 inches (253.7 mm). For bar codes
that require additional specified parameters, use the jj…j data field as the location for these
parameters. See the specific bar code for details in Appendix G.
Field
a
Valid Inputs
1, 2, 3 and 4
A to Z and a to z (except P, u, v, z), or Wna where n is 1 to 9 and
b [bb]
a is A to S and a to s. No n is an implied 1.
c
1 to 9, A to Z, and a to z
d
1 to 9, A to Z, and a to z
eee
001 to 999
ffff
0000 to 9999
gggg
See Appendix K.
Valid ASCII character string up to 255 characters followed by a
jj…j
termination character.
Meaning
Rotation
Bar Code
Wide Bar
Narrow Bar
Symbol height
Row
Column
Data
Table 8-10: Bar Code Record Structure
Placing a 0 (zero) in both c and d will cause the printer to use the default bar code ratio or module
size. Placing a 000 (zero) in the symbol height field causes the printer to use the default bar code
height. See Appendix F for default ratios and sizes.
138
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
Generating Label Formats
5.
Images
An image record is used to print an image that is stored in a memory module. Images can be
printed only in Rotation 1 (see Input Image Data <STX>I).
Field
a
b
c
d
eee
ffff
gggg
jj…j
Valid Inputs
Meaning
Fixed Value
Image
Width Multiplier
Height Multiplier
Fixed Value
Row
Column
1
Y
1 to 9, A to Z, and a to z
1 to 9, A to Z, and a to z
000
0000 to 9999
See Appendix K.
ASCII string, up to 16 characters followed by a termination
Image name
character.
Table 8-11: Image Fields
6.
Graphics
Using graphics, the printer can produce lines, boxes, polygons, and circles. This function is selected
by entering an X in field b. The values entered in the data field determine the sizes and shapes of
the objects to be drawn. Forms can be created using shaded boxes, complex logos, or even a simple
diagonal line without the need to download a graphics file to the printer. The following subsections describe how to generate each kind of graphic.
Lines and Boxes
Lines and boxes are drawn by values that determine column and row starting position, length,
width, and wall thickness of the line or box (see Appendix K). Depending on the printer’s mode, all
measurements are interpreted as inches/100 or millimeters/10 (see <STX>m). The data field jj…j
is used to describe the line or box dimensions.
Segment
a
b
c
d
eee
ffff
gggg
jj…j
Valid Inputs
1
X
1
1
000
0000 to 9999
0000-9999, see Appendix K.
Lhhhvvv
lhhhhvvvv
Bhhhvvvbbbsss
bhhhhvvvvbbbbssss
Meaning
Fixed value
Line / Box
Fixed Value
Fixed Value
Fixed Value
Row
Column
Line*
Line**
Box***
Box****
Table 8-12: Line and Box Parameters
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
139
Generating Label Formats
LINE* :
Where:
Lhhhvvv
LINE** :
Where:
lhhhhvvvv
L
= “l” and specifies line drawing;
hhhh = horizontal width of line; and,
vvvv = vertical height of line.
BOX*** :
Where:
Bhhhvvvbbbsss
B
= “B” and specifies box drawing;
hhh
= horizontal width of box;
vvv
= vertical height of box;
bbb
= thickness of bottom and top box edges; and,
sss
= thickness of box sides.
L
Hhh
vvv
BOX**** :
Where:
=
=
=
“L” and specifies line drawing;
horizontal width of line; and,
vertical height of line.
bhhhhvvvvbbbbssss
b
hhhh
vvvv
bbbb
ssss
=
=
=
=
=
“b” and specifies box drawing;
horizontal width of box;
vertical height of box;
thickness of bottom and top box edges; and,
thickness of box sides.
Note: While boxes are hollow, lines can be understood as filled-in boxes.
Polygons
Polygons are created by defining the positions of the corners, specifying a number of data points
that represent the vertices of the object, which can range from a simple line (two points), or a
triangle (three points), to any free-form outline. Polygons may be filled with a variety of
different patterns. All row/column specifiers are interpreted as inches/100 or millimeters/10
depending on the printer mode, (see <STX>m).
Record structure for a polygon (spaces added for readability):
1 X 11 ppp rrrr cccc P ppp bbbb rrrr cccc rrrr cccc … <CR>
Where:
1
X
1
1
ppp
rrrr
cccc
P
Note:
140
001
Rotation (must be 1)
Fixed Value
0001
Graphic field ID
Fixed Value
rrrr
Multiplier (must be 1)
Row of point 2
cccc
Multiplier (must be 1)
Column of point 2
rrrr
Fill pattern #
Row of point 3
cccc
Row of point 1
Column of point 3
…
Column of point 1
Additional points
<CR>
Polygon ID (Fixed Value)
Termination character
Table 8-13: Polygon Record Structure
The points must be specified in the order to be drawn; the last point specified is automatically
connected to the first point to close the polygon. If only two points are specified, a single line
will be drawn. See Label Formatting Command A.
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
Generating Label Formats
Circles
A circle is created by defining by its center point and radius. Circles can be filled with a variety of
different patterns (see Table 8-15). Row, column, and radius are interpreted as inches (100) or
millimeters (10) depending on printer mode.
Record structure for a circle (spaces have been added for readability):
1 X 11 fff rrrr cccc C ppp bbbb rrrr <CR>
Where:
1
X
1
1
fff
rrrr
cccc Column of the center point
Rotation (must be 1)
C
Graphic field
Circle ID (Fixed Value)
001
Multiplier (must be 1)
Fixed Value
0001 Fixed Value
Multiplier (must be 1)
rrrr Radius of the circle
Fill pattern number
<CR> Termination character
Row of the center point
Table 8-14: Circle Record Structure
Fill Patterns
Pattern Number
Description
0
No Pattern
1
Solid Black
2
6% Black
3
12% Black
4
25% Black
5
38% Black
6
50% Black
7
Diamonds
8
Circles
9
Right Diagonal Lines
10
Left Diagonal Lines
11
Grid
Example
Table 8-15: Fill Pattern Examples
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
141
Generating Label Formats
Examples (Spaces have been added for readability):
1.
Triangle
The record:
1 X 11 000 0010 0010 P 001 0001 0040 0025 0010 0040<CR>
Produces a triangle with no fill pattern:
(row 0040, column 0025)
(row 0010, column 0010)
2.
(row 0010, column 0040)
Rectangle with Fill
The record:
1 X 11 004 0010 0010 P 001 0001 0050 0010 0050 0200 0010 0200<CR>
Produces a rectangle filled with pattern 4 (25% Black):
(row 0010, column 0010) (row 0050, column 0200)
3.
Circle
The record:
1 X 11 000 0100 0100 C 001 0001 0025<CR>
Produces a circle centered at row 0100, column 0100 with a radius of 0025 and no fill pattern:
4.
Circle with Fill
The record:
1 X 11 009 0100 0100 C 001 0001 0025 <CR>
Produces a circle centered at row 0100, column 0100 with a radius of 0025 and filled with pattern
9 (right diagonal lines):
142
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
Generating Label Formats
Advanced Format Attributes
Two different advanced formatting attributes extend the text presentation capabilities. The first format
attribute allows a set of label format records to make a state change that modifies the font attributes of
any following DPL text records. The second format attribute provides a means of inserting text and
font formatting commands directly into the DPL data stream via a command delimiter structure. All
label formats begin by default with attributes disabled.
Note:
These commands are only valid for “scalable” fonts, such as Internal Font 9, S00 and S01 or
downloaded TrueType scalable fonts. (Non-display models have limited standard font sets and
capabilities; see the notes below for applicability of commands and consult the appropriate operators
manual for available standard and optional font sets.)
The table below represents the current list of font attributes available to the user. Note that these
commands are delimited by the \<xxx> sequence (where xxx is from the list below).
Command
Units
Purpose
Notes
FB
+/-
Turns on or off boldfacing of the font
minus ‘-’ disable, plus ‘+’ enable
FI
+/-
Turns on or off italicization of the font
minus ‘-’ disable, plus ‘+’ enable
FU
+/-
Turns on or off underlining of string.
minus ‘-’ disable, plus ‘+’ enable
(Display-Equipped Models only)
FPn
Points
Specifies the vertical point size of the
following text relative to the base line.
Display-Equipped models only
FSn
Points
Specifies the horizontal point size of the
following text relative to the base line.
Display-Equipped models only
Specifies the rotation of the base line,
FR[+/-]n Degrees relative to the original print direction of
the record.
If a + or – precedes the numeric
value, then the direction is relative
to the current print direction.
Table 8-16: Advanced Format Attributes
For example, the first format attribute command can be illustrated as follows. The text below and the
resulting label (Figure 1) are examples of a current DPL format:
<STX>L
D11
1911S0102600040P018P018Old
1911S0102000040P018P018Old
1911S0101400040P018P018Old
1911S0100800040P018P018Old
1911S0100200040P018P018Old
E
DPL
DPL
DPL
DPL
DPL
World
World
World
World
World
Figure 1
Now, if the DPL format is modified as follows, the resulting label (Figure 2) is printed:
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
143
Generating Label Formats
<STX>L
D11
FA+
FB+
1911S0102600040P018P018New
FU+I+
1911S0102000040P018P018New
FI-U+B1911S0101400040P018P018New
FU-B+
1911S0100800040P018P018New
FB+I+U+
1911S0100200040P018P018New
FB-U-IE
DPL World
DPL World
DPL World
DPL World
DPL World
Figure 2
Note that if all format commands after the first FB+ were deleted the entire label would have been
printed with bold scalable fonts. This is what is meant by a state change. Once invoked, that command
is in affect until turned off or the label format is terminated with the “E” “s” or the “X” command.
The second format attribute command is inserted into the text data stream and delimited by the angle
brackets “<>“ This structure takes the form of \<command>. An example of this command is as
follows:
<STX>L
D11
A2
FA+
1911S0105000020P018P018DPL allows \<FP36FS36>FONT\<FS10FP10> sizes
\<FS8FP12>in the string
1911S0103500100P018P018\<FR80>D\<FR-5>P\<FR-5>L\<FR-5> \<FR-5>l\<FR-5>e\<FR>t\<FR-5>s\<FR-5> \<FR-5>y\<FR-5>o\<FR-5>u\<FR-5> \<FR-5>w\<FR-5>r\<FR5>i\<FR-5>t\<FR-5>e\<FR-5> \<FR-5>i\<FR-5>n\<FR-5> \<FR-5>c\<FR-5>i\<FR5>r\<FR-5>c\<FR-5>l\<FR-5>e\<FR-5>s\<FR-5> \<FR-5>t\<FR-5>o\<FR-5>o\<FR-5>!
1911S0102400040P018P018\<FR+45>DPL allows \<FB+>Rotations\<FB-FR-90> in the
string
1911S0102000040P018P018DPL allows \<FB+>BOLD\<FB-> in the string
FU+
1911S0101400040P018P012DPL allows \<FI+>ITALICS\<FI-> in the string
FI+U1911S0101000040P018P012DPL allows \<FB+I+>COMBINATIONS\<FB-I-> in the
string
FB+I1911S0100600040P018P018DPL allows \<FB+>BOLD\<FB-> in the string
FU+I+
1911S0100200040P018P018DPL allows \<FB+>BOLD\<FB-> in the string
FB-U-IE
144
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
Generating Label Formats
Figure 3 is an example of the output from this DPL command
stream. The user has the ability to change the point and set size of
the font within the DPL command record. In addition, the angle of
the baseline may be specified relative to the current orientation of
the record. (For example, the command \<FR+45> will rotate the
baseline forty five degrees in the positive direction from the
default print direction.)
Note:
Refer to Section 8 for more information regarding the DPL
record format for a scalable font text string.
Figure 3
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
145
Generating Label Formats
146
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
Appendix A
ASCII Control Chart
Ctrl @
Ctrl A
Ctrl B
Ctrl C
Ctrl D
Ctrl E
Ctrl F
Ctrl G
Ctrl H
Ctrl I
Ctrl J
Ctrl K
Ctrl L
Ctrl M
Ctrl N
Ctrl O
Ctrl P
Ctrl Q
Ctrl R
Ctrl S
Ctrl T
Ctrl U
Ctrl V
Ctrl W
Ctrl X
Ctrl Y
Ctrl Z
Ctrl [
Ctrl \
Ctrl ]
Ctrl ^
Ctrl _
Char
NUL
SOH
STX
EXT
EOT
ENQ
ACK
BEL
BS
HT
LF
VT
FF
CR
SO
SI
DLE
DC1
DC2
DC3
DC4
NAK
SYN
ETB
CAN
EM
SUB
ESC
FS
GS
RS
US
Dec
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
Hex
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
0A
0B
0C
0D
0E
0F
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
1A
1B
1C
1D
1E
1F
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
Char
!
“
#
$
%
&
Ô
(
)
*
+
,
.
/
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
;
<
=
>
?
Dec
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
Hex
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
2A
2B
2C
2D
2E
2F
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
3A
3B
3C
3D
3E
3F
Char
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
\
]
^
_
Dec
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
Hex
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
4A
4B
4C
4D
4E
4F
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
5A
5B
5C
5D
5E
5F
Char
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
m
n
o
p
q
r
s
t
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
|
}
~
Dec
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
Hex
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
6A
6B
6C
6D
6E
6F
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
7A
7B
7C
7D
7E
7F
147
Appendix A
ASCII Control Chart (continued)
Char
Ç
ü
é
â
ä
à
å
ç
ê
ë
è
ï
î
ì
Ä
Å
É
æ
Æ
ô
ö
ò
û
ù
ÿ
Ö
Ü
ø
£
Ø
x
ƒ
Dec
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
Notes: (1)
Hex
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
8A
8B
8C
8D
8E
8F
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
9A
9B
9C
9D
9E
9F
Char
á
í
ó
ú
ñ
Ñ
ª
°
¿
®
1/2
1/4
¡
¯
²
³
´
Á
Â
À
©
¹
»
¢
¥
Dec
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
Hex
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
AA
AB
AC
AD
AE
AF
B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
BA
BB
BC
BD
BE
BF
Char
ã
Ã
ð
Ð
Ê
Ë
È
Í
Î
Ï
Ì
Dec
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
Hex
C0
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
C9
CA
CB
CC
CD
CE
CF
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
DA
DB
DC
DD
DE
DF
Char
Ó
ß
Ô
Ò
õ
Õ
µ
þ
Þ
Ú
Û
Ù
ý
Ý
±
3/4
÷
¸
º
¨
·
Dec
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
Hex
E0
E1
E2
E3
E4
E5
E6
E7
E8
E9
EA
EB
EC
ED
EE
EF
F0
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
FA
FB
FC
FD
FE
FF
For hardware handshake XON/XOFF commands:
XON = Ctrl Q (DC1)
XOFF = Ctrl S (DC3)
(2) The Euro currency character ( ) has been added to the table above at 255 (FF) as a Datamax
standard for resident bit-mapped fonts 0,1,2,3,4,5,6, and 9 (CG Triumvirate).
148
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
Appendix B
Sample Programs
‘C’ Language Program
The following sample ‘C’ program is included for reference. Figure B-1 shows the output generated
by this program.
/ DMX SERIES Sample C program /
# include <stdio.h>
main ()
{
char pcs = “590”;
char desc = “10K OHM 1/4 WATT”;
fputs (“DMX Printer Test Program\n”, stdout);
fputs (“\x02L\n”, stdaux);
fputs (“H07\n” stdaux);
fputs (“D11\n”, stdaux);
/ STX L – Enter Label Formatting /
/ Enter Heat Setting of 7 /
/ Set Width and Height Dot Size /
fprintf (stdaux, “191108010000025%s\n”,desc);
/ Select smooth Font /
fprintf (stdaux, “1a6210000000050%sPCS\n”, pcs); / Select Bar code type ‘a’ /
fputs (“E\n”, stdaux);
/ End Label format mode and print /
}
10K OHM 1/4 WATT
Figure B-1: Sample Label
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
149
Appendix B – Sample Programs
ASCII text file
The following ASCII text file will also generate the label shown in Figure B-1.
^BL
H07
D11
19110080100002510K OHM 1/4 WATT<CR>
1a6210000000050590PCS<CR>
E<CR>
VB Application Generating DPL
The following sample is a Visual Basic program that displays a database record on the screen. A user
can scroll through the records and then print a selected one. Five bar codes are printed along with data
fields and headings.
‘Printer DPL Controls
Dim CharSet As String‘<STX> byte
Const StartLabel = “L”
Const EndLabel = “E”
Const PrintDensity = “D11”
‘Printer DPL Data to position dynamic information on label
Const OrderTxt = “191100704150010”‘font 9, 24 pt
Const OrderBC = “1a6205004200120”
Const CustomerTxt = “191100603600010”
Const
Const
Const
Const
Item1NO = “191100403250010”
Item1BC = “1a6204002870010”
Item1Txt = “191100402690010”
Item1Qty = “191100603070260”
‘DPL Fixed Items on label
Const Itm1 = “191100303400010Item #”
Const Qty1 = “191100303400250Quantity”
Const Boxsize = “B065035002002”
Const BoxPos1 = “1X1100003050240”
Const Image1 = “1Y3300004750010SLANT1”
Dim Fixed As String
‘Item Variables
Dim Item1 As String
Dim PrintLabel As String
Dim OrderData As String
‘Print label by clicking print button with the mouse
Private Sub cmdPrint_Click()
150
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
Appendix B – Sample Programs
‘Concatenate all the dynamic data fields with the constant
header strings, terminated with <cr> Chr$(13)
OrderData = OrderTxt & txtOrderNo.Text & Chr$(13) &
OrderBC & txtOrderNo.Text & Chr$(13) & CustomerTxt &
txtCustomer.Text
Item1 = Item1NO & txtItem1.Text & Chr$(13) & Item1BC &
txtItem1.Text & Chr$(13) & Item1Txt & txtItem1Desc.Text &
Chr$(13) & Item1Qty & txtItem1Qty.Text
‘Concatinate entire label format and send out serial port
PrintLabel = CharSet & MaxLength & Chr$(13) & CharSet &
StartLabel & Chr$(13) & PrintDensity & Chr$(13) & Image1 &
Chr$(13) & OrderData & Chr$(13) & Item1 & Chr$(13) & Fixed &
Chr$(13) & EndLabel
Comm1.Output = PrintLabelEnd Sub
‘Display the record form on the screen
Private Sub Form_Load()
Fixed = Itm1 & Chr$(13) & Chr$(13) & Qty1 & Chr$(13) &
Chr$(13) & BoxPos1 & Boxsize & Chr$(13)
CharSet = Chr$(126) ‘Alternate <stx> character ~
MComm.PortOpen = 1‘Open the serial port
End Sub
‘Exit the program by clicking Exit button with the mouse
Private Sub cmdExit_Click()
Comm1.PortOpen = 0‘Close down the serial port
End
End Sub
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
151
Appendix B – Sample Programs
VB Application interfacing via Windows Driver
Create a form similar to the one shown here.
VERSION 5.00
Begin VB.Form Form1
Caption
=
“Datamax Test Print”
ClientHeight
=
1065
ClientLeft
=
60
ClientTop
=
345
ClientWidth
=
2325
LinkTopic
=
“Form1”
MaxButton
=
0
‘False
MinButton
=
0
‘False
ScaleHeight
=
1065
ScaleWidth
=
2325
StartUpPosition =
3 ‘Windows Default
Begin VB.ComboBox cmboFonts
Height
=
315
Left
=
90
TabIndex
=
2
Text
=
“Font List”
Top
=
45
Width
=
2130
End
Begin VB.CommandButton cmdExit
Caption
=
“Quit”
Height
=
465
Left
=
1350
TabIndex
=
1
Top
=
495
Width
=
825
End
Begin VB.CommandButton cmdPrint
Caption
=
“Print”
Height
=
465
Left
=
90
TabIndex
=
0
Top
=
495
Width
=
870
End
End
Attribute VB_Name = “Form1”
Attribute VB_GlobalNameSpace = False
Attribute VB_Creatable = False
Attribute VB_PredeclaredId = True
Attribute VB_Exposed = False
152
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
Appendix B – Sample Programs
‘Print label by clicking print button with the mouse
Private Sub cmdPrint_Click()
‘font name as seen in application font list box
‘if not found, driver will inform GDI to generate an
‘image that will be downloaded
Printer.FontName = cmboFonts.Text
‘1,440 twips equals one inch
Printer.Height = 6480
‘4.5 inches in twips
Printer.Width = 5760
‘4 inches in twips
Printer.CurrentX = 1440
‘1 inch (column position)
Printer.CurrentY = 2160
‘2 inches (row position)
Printer.Print “0123456789”
Printer.EndDoc
End Sub
Private Sub Form_Load()
Dim X As Printer
Dim I As Integer ‘Used for the font list
‘ search for printer queue name / driver name
For Each X In Printers
If X.DeviceName = “Datamax I-4206” Then ‘printer found
‘ Set printer as system default.
Set Printer = X
For I = 0 To Printer.FontCount - 1 ‘ Determine number of fonts.
cmboFonts.AddItem Printer.Fonts(I)
‘ Put each font into
list box.
Next I
Exit For
End If
Next
End Sub
‘Exit the program and shut down the serial port
‘by clicking Exit button with the mouse
Private Sub cmdExit_Click()
End
End Sub
When the program is run, the combo box should be populated with the available fonts as shown below.
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
153
Appendix B – Sample Programs
VB Application to Send RAW Data via a Windows Printer Driver
This is a sample Visual Basic program that checks for any printer driver attached to “LPT1”. If one is
installed then a DPL file can be printed via the print driver. **Note that this does not have to be a
Datamax DPL print driver. DPL is created by the application and sent to LPT1.
To begin, a global variable called SelPrinter must be defined as a string. Then use the following code
to create a .frm file.
VERSION 5.00
Object = “{F9043C88-F6F2-101A-A3C9-08002B2F49FB}#1.2#0”;
“comdlg32.ocx”
Begin VB.Form Form1
Caption
=
“Form1”
ClientHeight
=
1290
ClientLeft
=
165
ClientTop
=
735
ClientWidth
=
3750
LinkTopic
=
“Form1”
MaxButton
=
0
‘False
MinButton
=
0
‘False
ScaleHeight
=
1290
ScaleWidth
=
3750
StartUpPosition =
3 ‘Windows Default
Begin MSComDlg.CommonDialog CommonDialog1
Left
=
1635
Top
=
765
_ExtentX
=
847
_ExtentY
=
847
_Version
=
393216
End
Begin VB.CommandButton cmdClose
Cancel
=
-1 ‘True
Caption
=
“Close”
Height
=
372
Left
=
2400
TabIndex
=
3
Top
=
735
Width
=
972
End
Begin VB.CommandButton cmdStoreImage
Caption
=
“Print”
Default
=
-1 ‘True
Height
=
372
Left
=
240
TabIndex
=
2
Top
=
735
Width
=
972
End
Begin VB.TextBox txtFile
Height
=
288
154
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
Appendix B – Sample Programs
Left
TabIndex
Top
Width
=
=
=
=
120
1
360
3492
End
Begin VB.Label Label1
Caption
=
“File Name”
Height
=
255
Left
=
120
TabIndex
=
0
Top
=
135
Width
=
1455
End
Begin VB.Menu File
Caption
=
“&File”
Begin VB.Menu open
Caption
=
“&Open”
End
Begin VB.Menu exit
Caption
=
“&Exit”
Shortcut
=
^Q
End
End
End
Attribute VB_Name = “Form1”
Attribute VB_GlobalNameSpace = False
Attribute VB_Creatable = False
Attribute VB_PredeclaredId = True
Attribute VB_Exposed = False
Option Explicit
‘**********************************
#If Win32 Then
Private Type DOC_INFO_1
pDocName As String
pOutputFile As String
pDatatype As String
End Type
#End If ‘WIN32 Types
‘**********************************
‘** Function Declarations:
#If Win32 Then
Private Declare Function OpenPrinter& Lib “winspool.drv” Alias
“OpenPrinterA” (ByVal pPrinterName As String, phPrinter As Long, ByVal
pDefault As Long) ‘ Third param changed to long
Private Declare Function StartDocPrinter& Lib “winspool.drv” Alias
“StartDocPrinterA” (ByVal hPrinter As Long, ByVal Level As Long,
pDocInfo As DOC_INFO_1)
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
155
Appendix B – Sample Programs
Private Declare Function StartPagePrinter& Lib “winspool.drv” (ByVal
hPrinter As Long)
Private Declare Function WritePrinter& Lib “winspool.drv” (ByVal
hPrinter As Long, pBuf As Any, ByVal cdBuf As Long, pcWritten As Long)
Private Declare Function EndDocPrinter& Lib “winspool.drv” (ByVal
hPrinter As Long)
Private Declare Function EndPagePrinter& Lib “winspool.drv” (ByVal
hPrinter As Long)
Private Declare Function ClosePrinter& Lib “winspool.drv” (ByVal
hPrinter As Long)
#End If ‘WIN32
Dim ch As String * 1, f1 As Integer, loadfile As String
Private Sub cmdOpenFile_Click()
On Error GoTo ErrHandler
‘ Set Filters
CommonDialog1.Filter = “All Files (*.*)|*.*”
‘Specify Default Filter
CommonDialog1.FilterIndex = 1
‘Display Open dialog box
CommonDialog1.ShowOpen
loadfile = CommonDialog1.FileName
Label2.Caption = loadfile
Exit Sub
ErrHandler:
Exit Sub
End Sub
Private Sub cmdStoreImage_Click()
Dim hPrinter&
Dim jobid&
Dim res&
Dim written&
Dim printdata$
Dim docinfo As DOC_INFO_1
loadfile = Form1.txtFile.Text
If loadfile = ““ Then
MsgBox “You must Open a file to send”, vbExclamation
Exit Sub
End If
‘ Open file.
f1 = FreeFile
Open loadfile For Binary As f1
‘ Open printer for printing
res& = OpenPrinter(SelPrinter, hPrinter, 0)
If res = 0 Then
MsgBox “Unable to open the printer”
Exit Sub
End If
156
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
Appendix B – Sample Programs
docinfo.pDocName = “MyDoc”
docinfo.pOutputFile = vbNullString
docinfo.pDatatype = vbNullString
jobid = StartDocPrinter(hPrinter, 1, docinfo)
Call StartPagePrinter(hPrinter)
Call WritePrinter(hPrinter, ByVal printdata$, Len(printdata$),
written)
While Not EOF(1)
Get #f1, , ch
printdata$ = ch
Call WritePrinter(hPrinter, ByVal printdata$, Len(printdata$),
written)
Wend
Call EndPagePrinter(hPrinter)
Call EndDocPrinter(hPrinter)
Call ClosePrinter(hPrinter) ‘ Close when done
‘ Close file
Close #1
MsgBox “File sent to print spooler.”, vbExclamation
End Sub
Private Sub cmdClose_Click()
Unload Me
End Sub
Private Sub exit_Click()
End
End Sub
Private Sub Form_Load()
Dim X As Printer
‘ search for printer queue name / driver name
For Each X In Printers
If X.Port = “LPT1:” Then ‘printer found
‘ Set printer as system default.
SelPrinter = X.DeviceName
Exit For
End If
Next
End Sub
Private Sub lpt2_Click()
End Sub
Private Sub open_Click()
CommonDialog1.ShowOpen
loadfile = CommonDialog1.FileName
txtFile.Text = loadfile
End Sub
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
157
Appendix B – Sample Programs
Private Sub Printer_Click()
CommonDialog1.ShowPrinter
End Sub
This will create the form pictured below:
Note:
158
It may be necessary to remove and reinsert the common dialog control due to Windows® registry
issues.
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
Appendix C
Available Fonts – Sizes, References, and Samples
All character bit-mapped fonts available on the printers are described in this section. Each font has a name
(Font ID) associated with it for use in programming. Use the Font Number (in the left column of Table C1) in field b of the Format Record header to cause the printer to use the corresponding font.
Fonts 0 through 8 use the slash zero (Ø) conventions for distinguishing between the zero and the
alphabetic O. The slash can be removed with the label formatting command z. These fonts are nonproportional (monospaced). Therefore, all of the characters take up the same amount of space when
printed. This is helpful when using variable data in a fixed area. The sizes of these fonts are shown on the
following pages.
The CG Triumvirate font number 9 is a proportional font. Each character will take up a different amount
of space when printed. For example, the letter W will be wider than the letter I.
Font
Number
Valid ASCII Characters (decimal)
Use with Record
Structure Type
0
32-127, 255
1
32-168, 171, 172, 225, 255
2
32-168, 171, 172, 225, 255
3
32, 35-38, 40-58, 65-90, 128, 142-144, 146, 153, 154, 156, 157, 165,
168, 225, 255
4
32, 35-38, 40-58, 65-90, 128, 142-144, 146, 153, 154, 156, 157, 165,
168, 225, 255
5
32, 35-38, 40-58, 65-90, 128, 142-144, 146, 153, 154, 156, 157, 165,
168, 225, 255
6
32, 35-38, 40-58, 65-90, 128, 142-144, 146, 153, 154, 156, 157, 165,
168, 225, 255
7
32-126
8
32, 48-57, 60, 62, 67, 69, 78, 83, 84, 88, 90
9
32-126, 128-169, 171-173, 181-184, 189, 190, 198, 199, 208-216,
222, 224-237, 241, 243, 246-250, 255
Smooth Font*
9
Dependent upon selected symbol set, see Appendix H.
Scalable Font
Internal
Bit-Mapped
Fonts
*E-Class and M-4206 models
Table C-1: Valid Human-Readable Font (Internal) ASCII Characters
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
159
Appendix C – Available Fonts
Font sizes are dependent upon the print head resolution of the printer used. The tables below contain a
listing of the font sizes by resolution with dimensions given in dots.
Font
Font 0
Font 1
Font 2
Font 3
Font 4
Font 5
Font 6
Font 7
Font 8
Height
7
13
18
27
36
52
64
32
28
Width
5
7
10
14
18
18
32
15
15
Spacing
1
2
2
2
3
3
4
5
5
Point Size
2.5
4.6
6.4
9.6
12.8
18.4
22.7
11.3
9.9
Table C-2: Font Sizes @ 203 DPI Resolution
Font
Font 0
Font 1
Font 2
Font 3
Font 4
Font 5
Font 6
Font 7
Font 8
Height
10
19
27
40
53
77
95
47
41
Width
7
10
15
21
27
27
47
22
22
Spacing
1
3
3
3
4
4
6
7
7
Point Size
2.4
4.6
6.5
9.6
12.7
18.5
22.8
11.3
9.8
Table C-3: Font Sizes @ 300 DPI Resolution
Font
Font 0
Font 1
Font 2
Font 3
Font 4
Font 5
Font 6
Font 7
Font 8
Height
14
26
36
54
72
104
128
64
56
Width
10
14
20
28
36
36
64
30
30
Spacing
2
4
4
4
6
6
8
10
10
Point Size
2.5
4.6
6.4
9.6
12.8
18.4
22.7
11.3
9.9
Table C-4: Font Sizes @ 406 DPI Resolution
160
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
Appendix C – Available Fonts
Font
Font 0
Font 1
Font 2
Font 3
Font 4
Font 5
Font 6
Font 7
Font 8
Height
20
38
54
80
106
154
190
94
82
Width
14
20
30
42
54
54
94
44
44
Spacing
2
6
6
6
8
8
12
14
14
Point Size
2.4
4.6
6.5
9.6
12.7
18.5
22.8
11.3
9.8
Table C-5: Font Sizes @ 600 DPI Resolution
Internal Smooth Font 9 (Smooth Font) Point Size Specifiers
Label format records with font code 9 (in Format Record header field b) can specify any of the font sizes
in the leftmost column of the table below. The corresponding specification in either column labeled Ann
or 0nn is used in the font size/selection (eee height) field to select the desired font size. Optional font
sets may contain subsets of those described here. For an optional font set that generates these fonts via
scalable font technology, the character mapping for this font is the selected scalable symbol set (see
Appendix E).
In the sample format below, a 300 DPI printer will use 4-point smooth font to produce a printed label
with the words “four point font”. Sample format:
<STX>L<CR>
1911A0400100010four point font<CR>
E<CR>
Point
Size
4
5
6
8
10
12
14
18
24
30
36
48
72
Smooth Font 9 Font Size Specification Syntax
Ann
[1]
203 DPI Print Resolution
300, 400, & 600 DPI Print Resolutions [2]
A04
A05
A06
A06
A08
A08
A10
A10
A12
A12
A14
A14
A18
A18
A24
A24
A30
A30
A36
A36
A48
A48
A72
0nn
000 [3]
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
-
[1]
All fonts greater than A36 are created from multiples of smaller fonts, 2x or 3x, as available.
All fonts greater than A24 are created from multiples of smaller fonts, 2x or 3x, as available.
[3]
Available at 300 DPI and greater print resolutions only.
[2]
Table C-6: Internal Bit-Mapped (Smooth Font) 9 Size Chart
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
161
Appendix C – Available Fonts
Internal Bit-Mapped and Smooth Font Samples
The identifying number is used in the Format Record header field b to cause the printer to use the
corresponding font.
Note:
The Euro currency character ( ) has been added to Fonts 0 – 6. For the E-Class and M-4206 only, the
character is also present in Font 9.
0: Identifies a 96-character alphanumeric font, uppercase and lowercase.
1: Identifies a 145-character uppercase and lowercase alphanumeric font that includes desenders and
ascenders.
2: Identifies a 138-character alphanumeric upper and lowercase font.
3: Identifies a 62-character alphanumeric uppercase font.
4: Identifies a 62-character alphanumeric uppercase font.
162
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
Appendix C – Available Fonts
5: Identifies a 62-character alphanumeric upper case font.
6: Identifies a 62-character alphanumeric uppercase font.
7: Identifies a font that prints OCR-A, size I.
8: Identifies a font that prints OCR-B, size III.
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
163
Appendix C – Available Fonts
9: Identifies the Internal CG Triumvirate font. Point sizes are selected by the number in the Format
Record header eee height field, see Table C-6.
164
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
Appendix D
Reset Codes
The most common transmitted error codes are:
Uppercase “R”
This code is sent every time the printer is turned ‘On’, signaling a hardware reset.
Uppercase “T”
This code signals a software reset. A software reset is made by sending the command sequence to the
printer or by performing a reset using the front panel keys.
Lowercase “v”
There is an input buffer overflow situation, caused when an overflow of data is sent to the printer.
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
165
Appendix D – Reset Codes
166
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
Appendix E
Single Byte Symbol Sets
The following tables include some of the sixty-six standard symbol sets. Not all of these symbol sets can
be used with every font. Symbol sets containing the Euro currency character are W1, WE, WG, WL, WT,
WR, and PM; see Appendix I, and the <STX>y command.
The following sets were produced using a Windows®-based PC-compatible with a United States
keyboard properties layout. Results may vary if printing this document using a different input locale.
Note:
(DN) ISO 60: Danish / Norwegian Symbol Set
00
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
@
P
‘
p
!
1
A
Q
a
q
“
2
B
R
b
r
#
3
C
S
c
s
$
4
D
T
d
t
%
5
E
U
e
u
&
6
F
V
f
v
‘
7
G
W
g
w
(
8
H
X
h
x
)
9
I
Y
i
y
*
:
J
Z
j
z
+
;
K
Æ
k
æ
,
<
L
Ø
l
ø
=
M
Å
m
å
.
>
N
^
n
¯
/
?
O
_
o
▒
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
@
P
‘
p
!
1
A
Q
a
q
“
2
B
R
b
r
#
3
C
S
c
s
$
4
D
T
d
t
%
5
E
U
e
u
&
6
F
V
f
v
‘
7
G
W
g
w
(
8
H
X
h
x
)
9
I
Y
i
y
*
:
J
Z
j
z
+
;
K
[
k
{
,
<
L
\
l
|
=
M
]
m
}
.
>
N
^
n
~
/
?
O
o
▒
¶
“
±
)
§
µ
×
«
†
‰
÷
»
‡
•
°
‚
©
®
™
¢
–
—
“
–
(
Q
¼
¡
¹
²
£
fi
¬
/
¤
=
″
‘
…
‘
³
¥
fl
¦
′
„
þ
½
¿
ƒ
ß
ª
‘
º
‘
æ
ˆ
Æ
¨
ð
˜
Ð
ˇ
ij
˘
IJ
”
t
°
t
·
Œ
,
ø
˛
Ø
'
þ
l
Þ
(DT) DeskTop Symbol Set
00
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
A0
B0
C0
D0
E0
F0
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
o
¾
Pt
ℓ
œ
¯
167
Appendix E – Single Byte Symbol Sets
(E1) ISO 8859/1 Latin 1 Symbol Set
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
@
P
‘
p
!
1
A
Q
a
q
“
2
B
R
b
r
#
3
C
S
c
s
$
4
D
T
d
t
%
5
E
U
e
u
&
6
F
V
f
v
‘
7
G
W
g
w
(
8
H
X
h
x
)
9
I
Y
i
y
*
:
J
Z
j
z
+
;
K
[
k
{
,
<
L
\
l
|
=
M
]
m
}
.
>
N
^
n
~
/
?
O
o
▒
°
À
Ð
à
ð
¡
±
Á
Ñ
á
ñ
¢
²
Â
Ò
â
ò
£
³
Ã
Ó
ã
ó
¤
´
Ä
Ô
ä
ô
¥
µ
Å
Õ
å
õ
¦
¶
Æ
Ö
æ
ö
§
·
Ç
×
ç
÷
¨
¸
È
Ø
è
ø
©
¸
É
Ù
é
ù
ª
¹
Ê
Ú
ê
ú
«
»
Ë
Û
ë
û
¬
¼
Ì
Ü
ì
ü
½
Í
Ý
í
ý
®
¾
Î
Þ
î
þ
¯
¿
Ï
ß
ï
ÿ
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
00
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
A0
0
@
P
‘
p
!
1
A
Q
a
q
“
2
B
R
b
r
#
3
C
S
c
s
$
4
D
T
d
t
%
5
E
U
e
u
&
6
F
V
f
v
‘
7
G
W
g
w
(
8
H
X
h
x
)
9
I
Y
i
y
*
:
J
Z
j
z
+
;
K
[
k
{
,
<
L
\
l
|
=
M
]
m
}
.
>
N
^
n
~
/
?
O
o
▒
˘
§
¨
°
Š
·
Z
º
Ł
ł
¤
B0
´
·
¸
¹
š
“
z
Ç
×
ç
÷
ü
Í
Ý
í
ý
Î
ó
Ä
Ô
ä
ô
00
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
A0
B0
C0
D0
E0
F0
(E2) ISO 8859/2 Latin 2 Set
C0
D0
E0
F0
Á
Â
Ð
Ó
á
â
Ö
ö
É
Ø
Ë
Ú
é
Ü
ë
ú
ß
î
(E5) ISO 8859/5 Latin 5 Set
00
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
A0
B0
C0
D0
E0
F0
168
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
@
P
‘
p
!
1
A
Q
a
q
“
2
B
R
b
r
#
3
C
S
c
s
$
4
D
T
d
t
%
5
E
U
e
u
&
6
F
V
f
v
‘
7
G
W
g
w
(
8
H
X
h
x
)
9
I
Y
i
y
*
:
J
Z
j
z
+
;
K
[
k
{
,
<
L
\
l
|
=
M
]
m
}
.
>
N
^
n
~
/
?
O
o
▒
¡
±
Á
Ñ
á
ñ
¢
²
Â
Ò
â
ò
£
³
Ã
Ó
ã
ó
¤
´
Ä
Ô
ä
ô
¥
µ
Å
Õ
å
õ
¦
¶
Æ
Ö
æ
ö
§
·
Ç
×
ç
÷
¨
¸
È
Ø
è
ø
©
¹
É
Ù
é
ù
ª
º
Ê
Ú
ê
ú
«
»
Ë
Û
ë
û
¬
¼
Ì
Ü
ì
ü
½
Í
®
¾
Î
í
I
î
¯
¿
Ï
ß
ï
ÿ
º
À
à
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
Appendix E – Single Byte Symbol Sets
(FR) ISO 69: French Symbol Set
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
à
P
µ
p
!
1
A
Q
a
q
“
2
B
R
b
r
£
3
C
S
c
s
$
4
D
T
d
t
%
5
E
U
e
u
&
6
F
V
f
v
‘
7
G
W
g
w
(
8
H
X
h
x
)
9
I
Y
i
y
*
:
J
Z
j
z
+
;
K
º
k
é
,
<
L
ç
l
ù
=
M
§
m
è
.
>
N
^
n
¨
/
?
O
_
o
▒
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
!
“
#
$
%
&
(
)
*
+
.
/
1
A
Q
a
q
2
B
R
b
r
3
C
S
c
s
4
D
T
d
t
5
E
U
e
u
6
F
V
f
v
8
H
X
h
x
9
I
Y
i
y
:
J
Z
j
z
;
K
Ä
k
ä
̗
<
L
Ö
l
ö
-
0
§
P
‘
p
̓
7
G
W
g
w
=
M
Ü
m
ü
>
N
^
n
ß
?
O
_
o
▒
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
§
P
ù
p
!
1
A
Q
a
q
“
2
B
R
b
r
£
3
C
S
c
s
$
4
D
T
d
t
%
5
E
U
e
u
&
6
F
V
f
v
‘
7
G
W
g
w
(
8
H
X
h
x
)
9
I
Y
i
y
*
:
J
Z
j
z
+
;
K
º
k
à
,
<
L
ç
l
ò
=
M
é
m
è
.
>
N
^
n
ì
/
?
O
_
o
▒
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
00
10
20
30
!
1
“
2
#
3
$
4
%
5
&
6
‘
7
(
8
)
9
*
:
+
;
,
=
=
.
0
/
?
40
50
60
70
@
P
°
p
A
Q
a
q
B
R
b
r
C
S
c
s
D
T
d
t
E
U
e
u
F
V
f
v
G
W
g
w
H
X
h
x
I
Y
i
y
J
Z
j
z
K
[
k
§
L
®
l
¶
M
]
m
†
00
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
(GR) ISO 21: German Symbol Set
00
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
(IT) ISO 15: Italian Symbol Set
00
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
(LG) Legal Symbol Set
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
¢
N
©
n
™
O
_
o
▒
169
Appendix E – Single Byte Symbol Sets
(MC) Macintosh Symbol Set
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
00
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
A0
0
@
P
`
p
Ä
ê
†
!
1
A
Q
a
q
Å
ë
º
“
2
B
R
b
r
Ç
í
$
4
D
T
d
t
Ñ
î
§
%
5
E
U
e
u
Ö
ï
•
&
6
F
V
f
v
Ü
ñ
¶
‘
7
G
W
g
w
á
ó
ß
(
8
H
X
h
x
à
ò
®
)
9
I
Y
i
y
â
ô
©
*
:
J
Z
j
z
ä
ö
™
+
;
K
[
k
{
ã
õ
´
,
<
L
\
l
|
å
ú
¨
.
>
N
^
n
~
é
û
Æ
B0
∞
±
≥
Σ
∏
π
∫
ª
°
æ
Ø
¿
–
‡
¡
—
`
Ò
¬
“
‚
Ú
µ
≈
‘
Â
∂
C0
D0
E0
F0
¥
=
M
]
m
}
ç
ù
≠
Ω
/
?
O
_
o
¢
≤
#
3
C
S
c
s
É
ì
£
«
»
ÿ
Ë
¯
…
Ÿ
È
À
Ã
<
Ï
¸
Õ
>
Ì
¨
Œ
fi
Ó
˛
œ
fl
Ô
ˇ
√
“
„
Û
f
‘
‰
Ù
⎢
∆
÷
Ê
ˆ
◊
Á
˜
˘
/
Í
˙
¤
Î
º
è
ü
Ø
(PC) PC-8 Code Page 437 Symbol Set
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
¦
♥
!!
♦
¶
♣
§
♠
-
7
↨
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
♂
♀
∟
,
<
L
\
l
|
↔
♫
V
W
=
M
]
m
}
.
>
N
^
n
~
ï
¢
½
╗
╦
█
δ
√
î
£
¼
╝
╠
▄
∞
ì
¥
¡
╜
═
▌
n
Å
ƒ
»
┐
╧
▀
∩
2
Ä
Pt
«
╛
╬
▐
є
■
B
C
D
E
F
♂
♀
W
00
10
☺
↑
↓
→
←
20
30
40
50
60
70
0
@
P
`
p
!
1
A
Q
a
q
“
2
B
R
b
r
#
3
C
S
c
s
$
4
D
T
d
t
%
5
E
U
e
u
&
6
F
V
f
v
‘
7
G
W
g
w
(
8
H
X
h
x
)
9
I
Y
i
y
*
:
J
Z
j
z
+
;
K
[
k
{
80
90
A0
B0
C0
D0
E0
F0
Ç
É
á
░
└
╨
a
≡
ü
æ
í
▒
┴
╤
ß
±
é
Æ
ó
▓
┬
╥
└
≥
â
ô
ú
│
├
╙
ä
ö
ñ
┤
─
╘
∑
⌠
à
ò
Ñ
╡
┼
╒
å
û
ª
╢
╞
╓
ç
ù
°
╖
╟
╫
σ
µ
Τ
⌡
÷
≈
ê
ÿ
¿
╕
╚
╪
ф
○
ë
Ö
⌐
╣
╔
┘
Θ
▪
è
Ü
¬
║
╩
┌
Ω
▪
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
¦
♥
!!
♦
¶
♣
§
♠
▬
↨
π
≤
ф
/
?
O
_
o
⌂
(PD) PC-8 D/N, Code Page 437N Symbol Set
7
8
9
A
00
10
☺
↑
↓
→
←
↔
20
30
40
50
60
70
0
@
P
`
p
!
1
A
Q
a
q
“
2
B
R
b
r
#
3
C
S
c
s
$
4
D
T
d
t
%
5
E
U
e
u
&
6
F
V
f
v
‘
7
G
W
g
w
(
8
H
X
h
x
)
9
I
Y
i
y
*
:
J
Z
j
z
+
;
K
[
k
{
∟
,
<
L
\
l
|
♫
V
=
M
]
m
}
.
>
N
^
n
~
⌂
80
90
Ç
É
ü
æ
é
Æ
â
ô
ä
ö
à
ò
å
û
ç
ù
ê
ÿ
ë
Ö
è
Ü
ï
ø
î
£
ì
Ø
Ä
Å
A0
B0
C0
D0
E0
F0
á
░
└
╨
a
≡
í
▒
┴
╤
ß
±
ó
▓
┬
╥
└
≥
ú
│
├
╙
ñ
┤
─
╘
∑
⌠
Ñ
╡
┼
╒
õ
╢
╞
╓
Õ
╖
╟
╫
µ
Τ
≈
ℓ
╗
╦
█
δ
√
ŀ
¤
┐
╧
▀
∩
÷
Ã
║
╩
┌
Ω
▪
ʼn
╝
╠
▄
∞
⌡
ã
╣
╔
┘
Θ
▪
¡
╜
═
▌
σ
¿
╕
╚
╪
ф
○
Ŀ
³
╛
╬
▐
є
■
170
π
≤
n
ф
2
/
?
O
_
o
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
Appendix E – Single Byte Symbol Sets
(PE) PC-852 Latin 2 Symbol Set
0
00
10
1
2
3
4
5
6
¦
♥
!!
♦
¶
♣
§
♠
▬
↨
↑
↓
→
←
%
5
E
U
e
u
&
6
F
V
f
v
‘
7
G
W
g
w
(
8
H
X
h
x
)
9
I
Y
i
y
*
:
J
Z
j
z
+
;
K
[
k
{
ç
ł
ë
☺
20
30
40
50
60
70
0
@
P
`
p
!
1
A
Q
a
q
“
2
B
R
b
r
#
3
C
S
c
s
$
4
D
T
d
t
80
Ç
ü
é
â
ä
ô
ö
90
É
A0
B0
á
░
í
▒
ó
▓
ú
│
C0
D0
E0
F0
└
ð
Ó
┴
Ð
ß
“
┬
╸
7
Ž
Â
ž
Í
Š
÷
Î
š
┤
Á
├
Ë
─
┼
ͅ
̌
˘
2
3
4
5
6
7
„
‚
“
“
‘
‘
Ô
§
8
A
B
C
D
E
♂
♀
♫
∟
,
<
L
\
l
|
↔
V
W
=
M
]
m
}
.
>
N
^
n
~
/
?
O
_
o
î
°
F
⌂
Ä
Ö
Ü
╣
║
╗
╝
╔
┘
Ú
¨
╩
┌
╦
█
╠
▄
ý
═
Ł
×
«
╚
̧
9
╬
Ý
»
┓
¤
▀
´
´
(PI) PI Font Symbol Set
0
1
00
10
20
30
¯
40
::
˘
∆
̌
̇
8
9
A
B
C
D
〈
〉
℠
<
©
>
™
®
∆
«
§
ℒ
ℓ
h
f
60
℘
℘
┌
└
╭
╰
┼
├
─
┃┃
U
I
70
┐
┘
╯
╯
┬
┤
┴
│
⊔
⊓
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
s
!!
x
¶
w
§
z
O
50
∇
∑
∥
□
◊
╜
■
X
B
C
D
♂
♀
╓
╙
╖
E
F
»
¶
‹
›
▒
(PM) PC-850 Multilingual Symbol Set*
00
10
☺
8
9
A
E
F
V
W
#
$
%
‘
(
)
*
+
‚
¨
·
/
30
40
50
60
70
0
@
P
`
p
1
A
Q
a
q
“
2
B
R
b
r
▂
&
3
C
S
c
s
4
D
T
d
t
5
E
U
e
u
6
F
V
f
v
7
G
W
g
w
8
H
X
h
x
9
I
Y
i
y
:
J
Z
j
z
;
K
[
k
{
<
L
\
l
|
=
M
]
m
}
>
N
^
n
~
?
O
_
o
⌂
80
90
A0
Ç
É
á
ü
æ
í
é
Æ
ó
â
ô
ú
ä
ö
ñ
à
ò
Ñ
å
û
ª
ç
ù
°
ê
ÿ
¿
ë
Ö
®
è
Ü
ï
ø
½
î
£
¼
ì
Ø
¡
Ä
×
«
Å
ƒ
»
B0
░
▒
▓
│
┤
Á
Â
À
║
╗
╝
¢
┼
Ã
╣
¥
ã
©
╔
╩
╦
╠
═
╬
ĺ

þ
╚
Î
┐
¤
Þ
┘
┐
█
Ù
“
Û
Ú
¹
▄
ý
╎
Ý
Ì
¯
³
²
▪
20
C0
!
D0
└
ð
┴
Ð
┬
Ê
├
Ë
─
È
E0
Ó
ß
Ô
Ò
õ
ı
Õ
F0
-
±
=
¾
¶
§
*Default Symbol Set
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
µ
÷
¸
º
┑
.
▀
´
171
Appendix E – Single Byte Symbol Sets
(PT) PC-8 TK, Code Page 437T Symbol Set
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
♥
x
w
z
O
◘
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
(
8
H
X
h
x
)
9
I
Y
i
y
*
:
J
Z
j
z
+
;
K
[
k
{
‚
<
L
\
l
|
=
M
]
m
}
V
·
>
N
^
n
~
W
/
?
O
_
o
ê
ÿ
⌐
╕
╚
╪
ф
○
ë
Ö
¬
╣
╔
┘
Θ
▪
è
Ü
½
║
╩
┌
Ω
▪
ï
¢
¼
╗
╦
█
δ
√
î
£
¡
╝
╠
▄
∞
ì
¥
¡
╜
═
▌
ф
Ä
Pt
«
╛
╬
▐
є
■
Å
ƒ
»
┐
╧
▀
∩
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
(
8
H
X
h
x
)
9
I
Y
i
y
*
:
J
Z
j
z
+
;
K
[
k
{
,
<
L
\
l
|
=
M
]
m
}
.
>
N
^
n
~
/
?
O
o
▒
΄
¡
à
Ä
Ò
½
`
¿
è
ì
Õ
ª
ˆ
¤
ò
Ö
õ
°
“
£
ù
Ü
Š
«
˜
¥
ä
É
š
Q
Ù
§
ë
Ï
Ú
»
Û
ƒ
ö
ß
Ÿ
±
£
¢
ü
Ô
ÿ
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
)
9
I
Y
i
y
*
:
J
Z
j
z
+
;
K
¡
k
º
,
<
L
Ñ
l
ñ
=
M
¿
m
ç
.
>
N
^
n
~
/
?
O
_
o
▒
00
☺
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
0
@
P
`
p
!
1
A
Q
a
q
″
2
B
R
b
r
!!
#
3
C
S
c
s
¶
$
4
D
T
d
t
§
%
5
E
U
e
u
—
&
6
F
V
f
v
‘
7
G
W
g
w
80
90
A0
B0
C0
D0
E0
F0
Ç
É
á
░
└
╨
a
≡
ü
æ
í
▒
┴
╤
ß
±
é
Æ
ó
▓
┬
╥
└
≥
â
ô
ú
│
├
╙
π
≤
ä
ö
ñ
┤
─
╘
∑
⌠
à
ò
Ñ
╡
┼
╒
σ
⌡
å
û
ª
╢
╞
╓
µ
÷
ç
ù
°
╖
╟
╫
Τ
≈
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
0
@
P
‘
p
!
1
A
Q
a
q
“
2
B
R
b
r
#
3
C
S
c
s
$
4
D
T
d
t
%
5
E
U
e
u
&
6
F
V
f
v
‘
7
G
W
g
w
â
Å
Á
Þ
À
Ý
ê
î
Ã
þ
Â
ý
ô
Ø
ã
·
È
º
û
Æ
Ð
µ
Ê
Ç
á
å
ð
¶
Ë
ç
é
Í
Í
¾
Î
Ñ
ó
ø
Ì
—
Ï
ñ
ú
æ
Ó
¼
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
0
§
P
`
p
!
1
A
Q
a
q
“
2
B
R
b
r
£
3
C
S
c
s
$
4
D
T
d
t
%
5
E
U
e
u
&
6
F
V
f
v
´
7
G
W
g
w
(
8
H
X
h
x
n
2
⌂
(R8) Roman-8 Symbol Set
00
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
A0
B0
C0
D0
E0
F0
(SP) ISO 17: Spanish Symbol Set
00
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
172
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
Appendix E – Single Byte Symbol Sets
(SW) ISO 11: Swedish Symbol Set
00
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
É
P
é
p
!
1
A
Q
a
q
“
2
B
R
b
r
#
3
C
S
c
s
¤
4
D
T
d
t
%
5
E
U
e
u
&
6
F
V
f
v
‘
7
G
W
g
w
(
8
H
X
h
x
)
9
I
Y
i
y
*
:
J
Z
j
z
+
;
K
Ä
k
ä
,
<
L
Ö
l
ö
=
M
Å
m
å
.
>
N
Ü
n
ü
/
?
O
_
o
▒
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
@
P
`
p
!
1
A
Q
a
q
“
2
B
R
b
r
#
3
C
S
c
s
$
4
D
T
d
t
%
5
E
U
e
u
&
6
F
V
f
v
‘
7
G
W
g
w
(
8
H
X
h
x
)
9
I
Y
i
y
*
:
J
Z
j
z
+
;
K
[
k
{
,
<
L
\
l
|
=
M
]
m
}
.
>
N
^
n
~
/
?
O
_
o
¡
`
¢
†
´
£
‡
ˆ
/
·
˜
¥
ƒ
¶
˘
§
•
·
¤
,
¨
‘
„
“
“
°
«
»
¸
‹
…
›
‰
“
fi
˛
fl
¿
ˇ
Ł
ł
Ø
Œ
º
ø
œ
ß
(TS) PS Text Symbol Set
00
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
A0
B0
C0
D0
E0
¯
—
Æ
F0
ª
⎢
æ
(UK) ISO 4: United Kingdom Symbol Set
00
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
@
P
`
p
!
1
A
Q
a
q
“
2
B
R
b
r
£
3
C
S
c
s
$
4
D
T
d
t
%
5
E
U
e
u
&
6
F
V
f
v
‘
7
G
W
g
w
(
8
H
X
h
x
)
9
I
Y
i
y
*
:
J
Z
j
z
+
;
K
[
k
{
,
<
L
\
l
|
=
M
]
m
}
.
>
N
^
n
⎯
/
?
O
_
o
▒
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
@
P
‘
p
!
1
A
Q
a
q
“
2
B
R
b
r
#
3
C
S
c
s
$
4
D
T
d
t
%
5
E
U
e
u
&
6
F
V
f
v
‘
7
G
W
g
w
(
8
H
X
h
x
)
9
I
Y
i
y
*
:
J
Z
j
z
+
;
K
[
k
{
,
<
L
\
l
|
·
=
M
]
m
}
.
>
N
^
n
~
/
?
O
o
▒
(US) ISO 6: ASCII Symbol Set
00
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
173
Appendix E – Single Byte Symbol Sets
(VI) Ventura International Symbol Set
00
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
A0
B0
C0
D0
E0
F0
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
@
P
`
p
!
1
A
Q
a
q
“
2
B
R
b
r
#
3
C
S
c
s
$
4
D
T
d
t
%
5
E
U
e
u
&
6
F
V
f
v
‘
7
G
W
g
w
(
8
H
X
h
x
)
9
I
Y
i
y
*
:
J
Z
j
z
+
;
K
[
k
{
,
<
L
\
l
|
=
M
]
m
}
.
>
N
^
n
~
/
?
O
_
o
↵
­
™
¤
ò
Ö
õ
º
‹
£
ù
Ü
Š
«
›
¥
ä
É
š
•
⊔
©
¡
à
Ä
Ò
®
¿
è
ì
Õ
ª
„
‰
â
Å
Á
Œ
À
“
ê
î
Ã
œ
Â
“
ô
Ø
ã
¶
È
º
û
Æ
Ê
Ç
á
å
†
‡
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
0
@
P
‘
p
!
1
A
Q
a
q
“
2
B
R
b
r
#
3
C
S
c
s
$
4
D
T
d
t
%
5
E
U
e
u
&
6
F
V
f
v
‘
7
G
W
g
w
(
8
H
X
h
x
)
9
I
Y
i
y
*
:
J
Z
j
z
Ë
ç
é
í
Í
—
Î
Ñ
ó
ø
Ì
–
Ï
ñ
ú
æ
Ó
■
□
Ú
§
ë
ï
Ú
»
Û
ƒ
ö
ß
Ÿ
C
D
E
F
+
;
K
[
k
{
,
<
L
\
l
|
=
M
]
m
}
.
>
N
^
n
~
/
?
O
_
o
↵
→
⊔
¢
ü
Ô
ÿ
…
(VU) Ventura US Symbol Set
00
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
A0
B0
C0
D0
E0
F0
„
‰
©
“
®
™
■
□
¢
“
º
¶
†
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
!
1
A
Q
a
q
“
2
B
R
b
r
‚
‘
¢
²
Â
Ò
â
ò
#
3
C
S
c
s
ƒ
“
£
³
Ã
Ó
ã
ó
$
4
D
T
d
t
„
“
¤
´
Ä
Ô
ä
ô
%
5
E
U
e
u
…
•
¥
µ
Å
Õ
å
õ
&
6
F
V
f
v
†
–
¦
¶
Æ
Ö
æ
ö
‘
7
G
W
g
w
‡
—
§
·
Ç
×
ç
÷
(
8
H
X
h
x
ˆ
˜
¨
¸
È
Ø
è
ø
)
9
I
Y
i
y
‰
™
©
¹
É
Ù
é
ù
*
:
J
Z
j
z
Š
š
ª
º
Ê
Ú
ê
ú
+
;
K
[
k
{
‹
›
«
»
Ë
Û
ë
û
,
<
L
\
l
|
Œ
œ
¬
¼
Ì
Ü
ì
ü
=
M
]
m
}
.
>
N
^
n
~
/
?
O
_
o
▒
½
Í
Ý
í
ý
®
¾
Î
Þ
î
þ
Ÿ
¯
¿
Ï
ß
ï
ÿ
§
‡
—
•
–
…
(W1) Windows 3.1 Latin 1 Symbol Set
0
00
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
A0
B0
C0
D0
E0
F0
174
0
@
P
`
p
€
°
À
Ð
à
ð
‘
¡
±
Á
Ñ
á
ñ
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
Appendix E – Single Byte Symbol Sets
(WE) Windows 3.1 Latin 2 Symbol Set
0
00
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
A0
B0
C0
D0
E0
F0
0
@
P
`
p
€
º
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
!
1
A
Q
a
q
#
3
C
S
c
s
$
4
D
T
d
t
„
“
¤
%
5
E
U
e
u
…
•
&
6
F
V
f
v
†
–
¦
‘
7
G
W
g
w
‡
—
§
(
8
H
X
h
x
)
9
I
Y
i
y
‰
™
©
*
:
J
Z
j
z
Š
š
+
;
K
[
k
{
‹
›
«
,
<
L
\
l
|
=
M
]
m
}
.
>
N
^
n
~
Ž
ž
/
?
O
_
o
▒
‘
ˇ
“
2
B
R
b
r
‚
‘
˘
-
®
±
˛
´
µ
¶
·
¸
Á
Â
Ð
“
Ł
ł
Ó
á
â
ó
Ä
Ô
ä
ô
Ö
ö
¨
Ç
×
ç
÷
¬
»
É
“
Ë
Ú
é
ü
Í
Ý
í
ý
Ü
ë
ú
Î
ß
î
(WO) Windows 3.0 Latin 1 Symbol Set
00
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
A0
B0
C0
D0
E0
F0
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
@
P
`
p
!
1
A
Q
a
q
“
2
B
R
b
r
#
3
C
S
c
s
$
4
D
T
d
t
%
5
E
U
e
u
&
6
F
V
f
v
‘
7
G
W
g
w
(
8
H
X
h
x
)
9
I
Y
i
y
*
:
J
Z
j
z
+
;
K
[
k
{
,
<
L
\
l
|
=
M
]
m
}
.
>
N
^
n
˜
/
?
O
_
o
▒
°
À
Ð
à
ð
`
¡
±
Á
Ñ
á
ñ
’
¢
²
Â
Ò
â
ò
£
³
Ã
Ó
ã
ó
¤
´
Ä
Ô
ä
ô
¥
µ
Å
Õ
å
õ
¦
¶
Æ
Ö
æ
ö
§
·
Ç
×
ç
÷
¨
¸
È
Ø
è
ø
©
¹
É
Ù
é
ù
ª
º
Ê
Ú
ê
ú
«
»
Ë
Û
ë
û
¬
¼
Ì
Ü
ì
ü
½
Í
Ý
í
ý
®
¾
Î
Þ
î
þ
¯
¿
Ï
ß
ï
ÿ
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
!
1
A
Q
a
q
˜
2
B
R
b
r
,
‘
¢
²
Â
Ò
â
ò
#
3
C
S
c
s
ƒ
“
£
³
Ã
Ó
ã
ó
$
4
D
T
d
t
„
“
¤
´
Ä
Ô
ä
ô
%
5
E
U
e
u
…
•
¥
µ
Å
Õ
å
õ
&
6
F
V
f
v
†
–
¦
¶
Æ
Ö
æ
ö
‘
7
G
W
g
w
‡
—
§
·
Ç
×
ç
÷
(
8
H
X
h
x
ˆ
˜
¨
¸
È
Ø
è
ø
)
9
I
Y
i
y
‰
™
©
¹
É
Ù
é
ù
*
:
J
Z
j
z
Š
š
ª
º
Ê
Ú
ê
ú
+
;
K
[
k
{
‹
›
«
»
Ë
Û
ë
û
‚
<
L
\
l
|
Œ
œ
¬
¼
Ì
Ü
ì
ü
=
M
]
m
}
.
>
N
^
n
~
/
?
O
_
o
▒
½
Í
®
¾
Î
í
l
î
(WT) Windows 3.1 Latin 5 Symbol Set
00
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
A0
B0
C0
D0
E0
F0
0
@
P
`
p
€
°
À
à
‘
¡
±
Á
Ñ
á
ñ
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
Ÿ
¯
¿
Ï
ß
ï
ÿ
175
Appendix E – Single Byte Symbol Sets
176
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
Appendix F
Bar Code Summary Data
Bar code fonts have alpha names (left column, below). Uppercase alpha names will print bar codes with human-readable interpretations, if
supported. Lowercase alpha names will print bar codes only. Place the ID in field b of the Format Record header to cause the printer to encode the
data field using the associated bar code symbology, see Appendix G for details. See Table F-2 for default values. The column labeled “Linear
Scanner Supported” provides an indication that printers equipped with a Linear Scanner are capable of recognizing the associated symbology.
Bar
Code
ID
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
L / l
M / m
N / n
O / o
p
Q / q
R / r
S / s
T / t
U
Symbology
Length
Checksum
Code 39
UPC-A
UPC-E
Interleaved 2 of 5 (I2 of 5)
Code 128
EAN-13
EAN-8
HBIC
Codabar
Interleaved 2 of 5 w/ a modulo 10 checksum
Plessey
Varies
11
6
Varies
Varies
12
7
Varies
Varies
Varies
Up to 14
No
Yes
Yes
No
M-103
Yes
Yes
M-43
No
M-10
M-10
Interleaved 2 of 5 w/ modulo 10 checksum &
bearer bars
2 digit UPC addendum
5 digit UPC addendum
Code 93
Postnet
UCC/EAN 128
UCC/EAN 128 K-Mart non-EDI
UCC/EAN 128 Random Weight
Telepen
UPS MaxiCode
13
M-10
2
5
Varies
Varies
19
18
34 +
Varies
84
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Valid ASCII Characters, decimal value representation
Linear
Scanner
Supported
32, 36, 37, 42, 43, 45-57, 65-90
48-57 Numeric only. Option V used in the 6th & 7th position
48-57 Numeric only
48-57 Numeric only
32-127
48-57 Numeric only. Option V used in 7th & 8th position
48-57 Numeric only
32, 36-39, 42, 43, 45-57, 65-90
36, 43, 45-58, 65-68
48-57 Numeric only
48-57 Numeric only. Option + is last character for 2nd M-11
chksum
48-57 Numeric only
48-57 Numeric only
48-57 Numeric only
35-38, 42-58, 65-90, 97-122
48-57 Numeric only
48-57 Numeric only
48-57 Numeric only
48-57 Numeric only
Alphanumeric
Alphanumeric
[1]
[1]
Table F-1: Bar Code Characteristics
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
177
Appendix F – Barcode Summary Data
Bar
Code
ID
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
Symbology
Length
Checksum
Valid ASCII Characters, decimal value representation
Linear
Scanner
Supported
u
UPS MaxiCode w/ Byte Count
Specified
Yes
Alphanumeric
v
FIM
1
No
A, B, C, D
z
PDF417
Varies
Yes
All
Z
PDF417 w/ Byte Count
Specified
Yes
All
W1c
DataMatrix
Varies
Yes
All 8-bit values
W1C
DataMatrix w/ Byte Count
Specified
Yes
All 8-bit values
W1d
QR Code – Auto format
Varies
Yes
Alphanumeric
W1D
QR Code – Manual format
Varies
Yes
Single-byte or Kanji double-byte
W1f
Aztec
Varies
Yes
All 8-bit values
W1F
Aztec w/ Byte Count
Specified
Yes
All 8-bit values
W1G / g
USD-8 (Code 11)
Varies
Yes
45, 48-57
W1I
EAN 128 w/auto subset switching [2]
Varies
Yes
32-127
W1J
Code 128 w/auto subset switching [3]
Varies
Yes
32-127
W1k
GS1 DataBar [2]
Varies
Yes
Numeric / Alphanumeric (type dependant)
W1p
USPS 4CB [4]
Varies
No
48-57 Numeric only
W1R
UCC/EAN Code 128 K-MART NON EDI
18
Yes
48-57 Numeric only
W1t
TCIF Linked Bar Code 3 of 9 (TLC39)
Varies
Yes
Alphanumeric
W1z
MicroPDF417
Varies
Yes
All 8-bit values
W1Z
MicroPDF417 w/ Byte Count
Specified
Yes
All 8-bit values
Readable with the Linear Scanner Option only when using ‘Barcode Count’ method (see <STX>KcSN for details).
Available for display-equipped printers and EX2 models only.
Unavailable for the E-Class.
Unavailable for the E-Class and M-4206 model printers.
Table F-1: Bar Code Characteristics
178
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
Appendix F – Barcode Summary Data
Bar Code Default Widths and Heights
Font
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
p
Q
R
S
T
203 DPI Resolutions
Height
Ratio/
(inches)
Module Size
.40
6:2
.80
3
.80
3
.40
5:2
.40
2
.80
3
.80
3
.40
6:2
.40
6:3
.40
5:2
.40
5:2
1.30
5:2
.90
3
.80
3
.40
6:3
.08
N/A
1.40
2
1.40
2
1.40
2
.80
1
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
300 DPI Resolutions
400 DPI Resolutions
Height
Ratio/
Height
Ratio/
(inches)
Module Size
(inches)
Module Size
.40
9:4
.40
12:4
.80
4
.80
6
.80
4
.80
6
.40
9:4
.40
10:4
.40
4
.40
4
.80
4
.80
6
.80
4
.80
6
.40
9:4
.40
12:4
.40
9:4
.40
12:6
.40
9:4
.40
10:4
.40
9:4
.40
10:4
1.30
9:4
1.30
10:4
.90
4
.90
6
.80
4
.80
6
.40
8:4
.40
12:6
.08
N/A
.08
N/A
1.40
4
1.40
4
1.40
4
1.40
4
1.40
3
1.40
4
.80
1
.80
2
Table F-2: Bar Code Default Data
600 DPI Resolutions
Height
Ratio/
(inches)
Module Size
.40
18:6
.80
9
.80
9
.40
15:6
.40
6
.80
9
.80
9
.40
18:6
.40
18:6
.40
15:6
.40
15:6
1.30
15:6
.90
9
.80
9
.40
18:9
.08
N/A
1.40
6
1.40
6
1.40
6
.80
3
179
Appendix F – Barcode Summary Data
Font
U/u
v
z
Z/z
W1C/W1c
W1D/W1d
W1F/W1f
W1I
W1J
W1k
W1p
W1G/W1g
W1R
W1T
W1Z/W1z
203 DPI Resolutions
Height
Ratio/
(inches)
Module Size
1.00
N/A
.5
1
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
.40
2
.40
2
N/A
2
N/A
N/A
.5
5:2
1.40
2
.40
6:2
N/A
N/A
300 DPI Resolutions
Height
Ratio/
(inches)
Module Size
1.00
N/A
.5
1
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
.40
4
.40
4
N/A
3
N/A
N/A
.5
7:3
1.40
4
.40
9:4
N/A
N/A
400 DPI Resolutions
Height
Ratio/
(inches)
Module Size
1.00
N/A
.5
2
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
.40
4
.40
4
N/A
4
N/A
N/A
.5
9:4
1.40
4
.40
12:4
N/A
N/A
600 DPI Resolutions
Height
Ratio/
(inches)
Module Size
1.00
N/A
.5
3
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
.40
6
.40
6
N/A
6
N/A
N/A
.5
14:6
1.40
6
.40
18:6
N/A
N/A
Table F-2: Bar Code Default Data
Note:
180
Some bar codes will be sensitive to Label Command ‘D’ (set dot width and height size); see Label Formatting Commands for details.
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
Appendix G
Bar Code Details
Unless otherwise noted all bar codes depicted here were produced using the ratio/module values of 00 and
height fields of 000 to cause the printer to produce symbols using default bar widths and height fields. See
Appendix F for the default values.
A:
Code 3 of 9
Valid Characters: 0-9, A-Z, - . * $ / + % and the space character.
Variable Length.
Valid bar widths: The expected ratio of wide to narrow bars can range from 2:1 to 3:1.
The following example prints a code 3 of 9 bar code with a wide to narrow bar ratio of 3:1:
<STX>L
D11<CR>
1A00000001501000123456789<CR>
121100000000100Barcode A<CR>
E
B:
UPC-A
Valid Characters: 0-9
Length: 12 digits. If the user provides 11 digits, the printer will compute the checksum. If the user
provides the checksum, the printer will check that it matches the expected checksum. If it does not
match, the printer will print out all zeros and the expected checksum. See Appendix P.
Valid bar widths: The fourth character of record is the width of the narrow bar in dots. All other bars
are a ratio of the narrow bar (2 times, 3 times, and 4 times the narrow bar width).
The following example prints a UPC-A bar code:
<STX>L
D11<CR>
1B000000015010001234567890<CR>
121100000000100Barcode B<CR>
E
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
181
Appendix G – Barcode Details
C:
UPC-E
Valid Characters: 0-9
Length: Seven digits. If the user provides six digits, the printer will compute the checksum. If the user
provides the checksum, the printer will check that it matches the expected checksum. If it does not
match, the printer will print out all zeros and the expected checksum.
Valid bar widths: The fourth character of record is the width of the narrow bar in dots. All other bars
are a ratio of the narrow bar (2 times, 3 times, and 4 times the narrow bar width).
The following example prints a UPC-E bar code:
<STX>L
D11<CR>
1C0000000150100012345<CR>
121100000000100Barcode C<CR>
E
D:
Interleaved 2 of 5 (I 2 of 5)
Valid Characters: 0-9
Variable Length.
Valid bar widths: The expected ratio of wide to narrow bars can range from 2:1 to 3:1.
The following example prints an Interleaved 2 of 5 bar code with a wide to narrow bar ratio of 3:1:
<STX>L
D11<CR>
1D000000015010001234567890<CR>
121100000000100Barcode D<CR>
E
E:
Code 128
Valid Characters: The entire 128 ASCII character set.
Variable Length
Valid bar widths: The fourth character of record is the width of the narrow bar in dots. All other bars
are a ratio of the narrow bar (2 times the narrow bar width, 3 times the narrow bar width, and 4 times
the narrow bar width).
This printer supports the Code 128 subsets A, B, and C. The printer can be selected to start on any
code subset and switch to another within the data stream. The default code subset is B; otherwise, the
first character (A, B, C) of the data field determines the subset. Subset switching is only performed in
response to code switch command. These commands are placed in the data to be encoded at
appropriate locations, see Table G-1.
Note: It is recommended to use a B as the first character to prevent an A or C from changing the subset.
182
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
Appendix G – Barcode Details
Subset A: Includes all of the standard uppercase alphanumeric keyboard characters plus the control
and special characters. To select Code 128 Subset A, place an ASCII A (DEC 65, HEX 41) before the
data to be encoded.
Subset B: Includes all of the standard uppercase alphanumeric keyboard characters plus the
lowercase alphabetic and special characters. To select Code 128 Subset B, place an ASCII B (DEC
66, HEX 42) before the data to be encoded. If no start character is sent for the Code 128 font, Code
128 Subset B will be selected by default.
Subset C: Includes the set of 100 digit pairs from 00 through 99 inclusive, as well as special
characters. Code 128 Subset C is used for double density encoding of numeric data. To select Code
128 Subset C, place an ASCII C (DEC 67, HEX 43) before the data to be encoded. Subset C can only
encode an even number of numeric characters. When the data to be encoded includes an odd number
of numeric characters, the last character causes the printer to automatically generate a ‘switch to
subset B’ and encode the last character appropriately in subset B.
Special Character Handling: Characters with an ASCII value greater than 95 are considered special
characters. To access these values, a two-character reference table is built into the printer (see below).
For example, to encode FNC2 into a Code 128 Subset A bar code, send the ASCII “&” (DEC 38,
HEX 26) followed by the ASCII “B” (DEC 66, HEX 41).
Sample: ATEST&B123
ASCII
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
Encoded: TEST<FNC2>123
2 CHAR
&A
&B
&C
&D
&E
&F
&G
CODE A
FNC3
FNC2
SHIFT
CODEC
CODEB
FNC4
FNC1
CODE B
FNC3
FNC2
SHIFT
CODEC
FNC4
CODEA
FNC1
CODE C
-NA-NA-NA-NACODEB
CODEA
FNC1
Table G-1: Special Character Handling
Control Codes: By sending these control codes, control characters can be encoded into a Code 128
Subset A bar code (e.g., ABC{DE will be encoded as ABC<ESC>DE):
Control Code in the Bar Code Data Stream
`
a through z
{
|
}
~
ASCII 127
Encoded Control Character Result
NUL
1 - 26
ESC
FS
GS
RS
US
The following example prints a Code 128 bar code:
<STX>L
D11<CR>
1E000000015010001234567890<CR>
121100000000100Barcode E<CR>
E
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
183
Appendix G – Barcode Details
F:
EAN-13
Valid Characters: 0-9
Length: 13 digits. If the user provides 12 digits, the printer will compute the checksum. If the user
provides the checksum, the printer will check that it matches the expected checksum. If it does not
match, the printer will print all zeros and the expected checksum. See Appendix P.
Valid bar widths: The fourth character of record is the width of the narrow bar in dots. All other bars
are a ratio of the narrow bar (2 times, 3 times, and 4 times the narrow bar width).
The following example prints an EAN-13 bar code:
<STX>L
D11<CR>
1F0000000150100012345678901<CR>
121100000000100Barcode F<CR>
E
G:
EAN-8
Valid Characters: 0-9
Length: 8 digits. If the user provides 7 digits, the printer will compute the checksum. If the user
provides the checksum, the printer will check that it matches the expected checksum. If it does not
match, the printer will print all zeros and the expected checksum.
Valid bar widths: The fourth character of record is the width of the narrow bar in dots. All other bars
are a ratio of the narrow bar (2 times, 3 times, and 4 times the narrow bar width).
The following example prints an EAN-8 bar code:
<STX>L
D11<CR>
1G00000001501000123456<CR>
121100000000100Barcode G<CR>
E
184
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
Appendix G – Barcode Details
H:
Health Industry Bar Code (HBIC)
Valid Characters: 0-9, A-Z, -$ /. %
Variable Length.
Valid bar widths: The expected ratio of wide to narrow bars can range from 2:1 to 3:1.
The host must supply leading “+”’s
The following example prints a HBIC bar code with a wide to narrow bar ratio of 3:1:
<STX>L
D11<CR>
1H0000000150050+0123456789<CR>
121100000000100Barcode H<CR>
E
I:
Codabar
Valid Characters: 0-9, A-D, -, ., $, :, /, + (comma is not valid)
Variable Length but requires at least three characters.
Valid bar widths: The expected ratio of wide to narrow bars can range from 2:1 to 3:1.
Valid Codabar symbols require start and stop characters (A–D). These characters should be placed in
the data field along with other data to be included in the symbol.
The following example prints a Codabar bar code with a wide to narrow bar ratio of 3:1:
<STX>L
D11<CR>
1I63040001501000A1234567890D<CR>
121100000000100Barcode I<CR>
E
J:
Barcode I
Interleaved 2 of 5 with a modulo 10 checksum.
Valid Characters: 0-9
Variable Length.
Valid bar widths: The expected ratio of wide to narrow bars can range from 2:1 to 3:1.
The following example prints an Interleaved 2 of 5 bar code with a modulo 10 checksum added and
with a wide to narrow bar ratio of 3:1:
<STX>L
D11<CR>
1J000000015010001234567890<CR>
121100000000100Barcode J<CR>
E
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
185
Appendix G – Barcode Details
K:
Plessey
Valid Characters: 0-9
Length: 1 to 14 digits
Valid bar widths: The expected ratio of wide to narrow bars can range from 2:1 to 3:1.
If a + character is the last data character, an additional MSI checksum will be added to the bar code in
place of the + character.
The following example prints a Plessey bar code with a wide to narrow bar ratio of 3:1:
<STX>L
D11<CR>
1K000000015010001234567890<CR>
121100000000100Barcode K<CR>
E
L:
Interleaved 2 of 5 with a modulo 10 checksum and shipping bearer bars.
Valid Characters: 0-9
Variable Length: For the bearer bars to be printed, 13 characters are required.
Valid bar widths: The expected ratio of wide to narrow bars can range from 2:1 to 3:1.
The following example prints an Interleaved 2 of 5 bar code with a modulo 10 checksum with a wide
to narrow bar ratio of 3:1 and bearer bars:
<STX>L
D11<CR>
1L00000001501000123456789012<CR>
121100000000100Barcode L<CR>
E
186
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
Appendix G – Barcode Details
M:
2-digit UPC addendum
Valid Characters: 0-9
Length: 2 digits.
Valid bar widths: The fourth character of record is the width of the narrow bar in dots. All other bars
are a ratio of the narrow bar (2 times, 3 times, and 4 times the narrow bar width). Human readable
characters for this bar code symbology are printed above the symbol.
The following example prints a 2 digit UPC bar code addendum:
<STX>L
D11<CR>
1M000000015010042<CR>
121100000000100Barcode M<CR>
E
N:
5-digit UPC addendum
Valid Characters: 0-9
Length: 5 digits.
Valid bar widths: The width multiplier is the width of the narrow bar in dots. All other bars are a ratio
of the narrow bar (2 times, 3 times, and 4 times the narrow bar width). Human readable characters for
this bar code symbology are printed above the symbol.
The following example prints a 5 digit UPC bar code addendum:
<STX>L
D11<CR>
1N000000015010001234<CR>
121100000000100Barcode N<CR>
E
O:
Code 93
Valid Characters: 0-9, A-Z, -.$/+% and the space character.
Variable Length.
Valid bar widths: The width multiplier is the width of the narrow bar in dots. All other bars are a ratio
of the narrow bar (2 times, 3 times, and 4 times the narrow bar width).
The following example prints a Code 93 bar code:
<STX>L
D11<CR>
1O0000000150100Datamax42<CR>
121100000000100Barcode O<CR>
E
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
187
Appendix G – Barcode Details
p:
Postnet
Valid Characters: 0-9
Length: 5, 9 or 11 digits
Valid bar widths: The width and height multiplier values of 00 will produce a valid Postnet symbol.
Usage: The bar code height field is ignored since the symbol height is United States Postal Service
specific. This bar code is to display the zip code on a letter or package for the US Postal Service.
The following example prints a Postnet bar code:
<STX>L
D11<CR>
1p000000015010032569<CR>
121100000000100Barcode p<CR>
E
Q:
UCC/EAN Code 128
Valid Characters: 0-9
Length: 19 digits.
Valid bar widths: The fourth character of record is the width of the narrow bar in dots. All other bars
are a ratio of the narrow bar (2 times, 3 times, and 4 times the narrow bar width). Human readable
characters for this bar code symbology are printed above the symbol.
The printer spreads a weighted module 103 check sum.
The following example prints a UCC/EAN Code 128 bar code:
<STX>L
D11<CR>
1Q00000001501000123456789012345678<CR>
121100000000100Barcode Q<CR>
E
188
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
Appendix G – Barcode Details
R:
UCC/EAN Code128 K-MART NON EDI
Valid Characters: 0-9
Length: 18 digits
Valid bar widths: The fourth character of record is the width of the narrow bar in dots. All other bars
are a ratio of the narrow bar (2 times, 3 times, and 4 times the narrow bar width). Human readable
characters for this bar code symbology are printed above the symbol. (See W1R for an alternate.)
This bar code is set up according to K-MART specifications.
The following example prints a KMART bar code.
<STX>L
D11<CR>
1R0000000150100012345678901234567<CR>
121100000000100Barcode R<CR>
E
S:
UCC/EAN Code 128 Random Weight
Valid Characters: 0-9
Length: At least 34 digits.
Valid bar widths: The fourth character of record is the width of the narrow bar in dots. All other bars
are a ratio of the narrow bar (2 times, 3 times, and 4 times the narrow bar width).
This bar code is commonly used by the food and grocery industry.
The following example prints a UCC/EAN Code 128 Random Weight bar code:
<STX>L
D11<CR>
1S000000015005001100736750292601193042032020018002110123456<CR>
121100000000100Barcode S<CR>
E
Barcode S
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
189
Appendix G – Barcode Details
T:
Telepen
Valid Characters: All 128 ASCII characters.
Variable Length
Valid bar widths: The fourth character of the record is the width of the narrow bar in dots. All other
bars are a ratio of the narrow bar (2 times, 3 times, and 4 times the narrow bar width).
The following example prints a Telepen bar code:
<STX>L
D11<CR>
1T0000000150100ABCDEF<CR>
121100000000100Barcode T<CR>
E
u:
Barcode T
UPS MaxiCode, Modes 2&3
The printer supports MaxiCode as defined in the AIM Technical Specification. The following
examples illustrate various label format record message syntaxes for encoding data as MaxiCode. In
the following examples, special formatting is used to denote special ASCII characters as shown:
Symbol
R
S
G
S
E
OT
Hexadecimal Value
1E
1D
04
Printer message syntax allows for EOT to be substituted with
<CR> or the use of both EOT and <CR>.
UPS Modes 2 & 3 Explicit
The data stream can force Mode 2 or 3 encoding by placing #2 or #3, respectively, before the data,
as shown in the example below. If this is not specified, the printer chooses the best mode.
1u0000001200120#3[)>RS01GS96123456GS068GS001GS1Z12345675GSUPSNGS12345EGS0
89GSGS1/1GS10.1GSYGSGSGSUTRSEOT
This example will print encoding the MaxiCode symbol in Mode 3.
<STX>L
D11<CR>
1u0000001200120#3[)>RS01GS96123456GS068GS001GS1Z12345675GSUPSNGS12345EGS0
89GSGS1/1GS10.1GSYGSGSGSUTRSEOT
121100000000100Barcode u<CR>
E
190
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
Appendix G – Barcode Details
Where:
#3
[)>RS01GS96
123456
068
001
G
S1Z1...
...TRSEOT
Forces Mode 3 encoding
Message Header
Maximum 9 alphanumeric ASCII, postal code
Country Code
Class
Primary Message
Secondary Message
UPS 3.0 Examples
In the UPS 3.0 protocol examples that follow, Primary Message control characters GS will not be
encoded in the MaxiCode symbol. All characters, the Secondary Message, with the exception of the
leading GS, in are encoded.
An example of the UPS 3.0 zip + 4 with Message data format and message header:
1u0000001200120[)>RS01GS96841706672GS840GS001GS1Z12345675GSUPSNGS12345EGS0
89GSGS1/1GS10.1GSYGSGSGSUTRSEOT
Where:
[)>RS01GS96
841706672
840
001
G
S1Z1...
...TRSEOT
Message Header
Maximum 9 alphanumeric ASCII, postal code
Country Code
Class
Primary Message
Secondary Message
An example of the UPS 3.0 international postal “V6C3E2” with Message data format and message
header:
1u0000001200120[)>RS01GS96V6C3E2GS068GS001GS1Z12345675GSUPSNGS12345EGS089G
G
G
G
G G G
R E
S S1/1 S10.1 SY S S SUT S OT
Where:
[)>RS01GS96
V6C3E2
068
001
G
S1Z1...
Message Header
Maximum 6 alphanumeric ASCII, international zip code
Country Code
Class
Primary Message
Secondary
Message
...TRSEOT
An example of the UPS 3.0 international zip “V6C3E2” without Message data format and message
header:
1u0000001200120V6C3E2GS068GS001GS1Z12345675GSUPSNGS12345EGS089GSGS1/1GS10.1
G
G G G
R E
SY S S SUT S OT
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
191
Appendix G – Barcode Details
Where:
V6C3E2
068
001
G
S1Z1...
...TRSEOT
Maximum 6 alphanumeric ASCII, international zip code
Country Code
Class
Primary Message
Secondary Message
An example of the UPS 3.0 zip + 4 “32707-3270” without Message data format and message header:
1u0000001200120327073270GS068GS001GS1Z12345675GSUPSNGS12345EGS089GSGS1/1GS1
0.1GSYGSGSGSUTRSEOT
Where:
32707
3270
068
001
G
S1Z1...
...TRSEOT
U:
5 digit ASCII, Zip code
4 digit ASCII, +4 Zip code (not required)
Country Code
Class
Primary Message
Secondary Message
UPS MaxiCode, Modes 2 & 3 with Byte Count Specifier
Specified Length – The upper case U identifies a UPS MaxiCode bar code with a 4-digit string length
specifier. This allows values 0x00 through 0xFF to be included within the data strings without
conflicting with the DPL format record terminators. The four-digit decimal data byte count
immediately follows the 4-digit column position field. This value includes all of the data following
the byte count field, but does not include itself.
<STX>L
D11<CR>
1U00000010001000051327895555840666this package<0x0D>is going to
Datamax<CR>
121100000000100Barcode U<CR>
E
From the example above, the bar code’s data stream,
1U00000010001000051327895555840666this
package<0x0D>is going to Datamax, now includes a Byte Count
Specifier (the portion in bold), where 0051 equals the four-digit decimal data
byte count and includes all bytes that follow until the end of the bar code
data. Field termination is set by the byte count. <STX>, <CR>, and <0x0D>
all represent single byte values of hexadecimal 02, 0D, and 0D, respectively.
The UPS MaxiCode bar code produced encodes “327895555840666this
package<CR>is going to Datamax”, and prints a line of text: Barcode U.
192
Barcode U
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
Appendix G – Barcode Details
v:
FIM
Valid Characters: A, B, C, or D
Length: 1 character
Valid bar widths: The width and height multiplier works the same as for fonts on this bar code.
This bar code is used to display the Facing Identification Mark (FIM) that is carried on certain types
of letter mail for the U S Postal Service:
FIM A: Courtesy reply mail with Postnet.
FIM B: Business reply, penalty or franked mail without Postnet.
FIM C: Business reply, penalty or franked mail with Postnet.
FIM D: OCR readable mail without Postnet (typically for envelopes with a courtesy reply window).
The following example prints an FIM A bar code:
<STX>L
D11<CR>
1v0000000150100A<CR>
121100000000100Barcode v<CR>
E
z:
PDF-417
Valid Characters: All ASCII characters.
Variable Length – This two dimensional bar code holds large amounts of data in a small area, while
providing a high level of redundancy and error checking, if specified.
<STX>L
D11<CR>
1z0000000150100F1000000PDF417<CR>
121100000000100Barcode z<CR>
E
Barcode z
The example above prints a normal, security level one, PDF-417 bar code with a 1:2 aspect ratio and
best-fit rows and columns. The (bolded) bar code’s data stream
1z0000000150100F1000000PDF417<CR> decodes as follows:
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
193
Appendix G – Barcode Details
Example Data
F
1
00
00
00
PDF417
<CR>
Note:
Z:
Explanation
1-character specifying a normal or truncated bar code (T to truncate, F for normal).
1-digit security level ranging from 0 to 8.
2-digit aspect ratio specified as a fraction, with the first digit being the numerator
and the second digit the denominator. Use “00” for the default ratio of 1:2. Valid
range is from “00” to “99.”
2-digit number specifying the number of rows requested. Use “00” to let the printer
find the best fit. Valid range is from “03” to “90”. Row values less than 3 are set to
3, while row values greater than 90 are set to 90.
2-digit number specifying the number of columns requested. Use “00” to let the
printer find the best fit. Valid range is from “01” to “30”. Column values greater
than 30 are set to 30.
The data stream to be encoded.
Terminates the data stream.
Format Record header fields c and d should both be zero.
PDF-417 with Byte Count Specifier
Specified Length – The upper case Z identifies a PDF-417 bar code with a string 4-digit length
specifier. This allows values 0x00 through 0xFF to be used within the data strings without conflicting
with the DPL format record terminators. The four-digit decimal data byte count immediately follows
the 4-digit column position field. This value includes all of the data following the byte count field, but
does not include itself.
<STX>L
D11<CR>
1Z00000001501000015F1000000pdf<0x0D>417<CR>
121100000000100Barcode Z<CR>
E
Barcode Z
From the example above, the bar code’s data stream,
1Z00000001501000015F1000000pdf<CR>417, now includes a Byte Count Specifier (the
portion in bold), where 0015 equals the four-digit decimal data byte count and includes all bytes that
follow until the end of the bar code data. Field termination is set by the byte count. <STX>, <CR>,
and <0x0D> all represent single byte values of hexadecimal 02, 0D, and 0D, respectively. The PDF417 bar code produced encodes “pdf<CR>417”, and prints a line of text: Barcode Z.
194
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
Appendix G – Barcode Details
W1c:
DataMatrix
Valid Characters: Any 8-bit byte data
Variable Length
DataMatrix is a two-dimensional matrix symbology, which is comprised of square modules arranged
within a perimeter finder pattern. There are two basic types: ECC 000-140 and ECC 200.
ECC 000 - 140 symbols:
These square symbols can be any odd size from 9x9 to 49x49, which may be specified in fields jjj and
kkk. If an ECC 000-140 symbol is specified with even numbers of rows or columns, the next largest
odd value will be used. Input values greater than 49 or less than 9 will cause the symbol to be
automatically sized for the input character stream. The record format is shown here, expanded with
spaces.
a W b[b] c d eee ffff gggg hhh i jjj kkk ll…l
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
195
Appendix G – Barcode Details
Where:
Field
a
W
b[b]
Valid Inputs
1,2,3, and 4
W
c, 1c
c
d
eee
ffff
gggg
hhh
1 to 9, A to Z, and a to z
1 to 9, A to Z, and a to z
000 to 999
0000 to 9999
0000 to 9999
000, 050, 080, 100, 140
Meaning
Rotation
Fixed value, extended bar code set
Selects the DataMatrix bar code - the two differing values
have no other significance.
Module size horizontal multiplier
Module size vertical multiplier
No effect; Must be numeric
Label position, row
Label position, column
A 3-digit convolutional error correction level.
If any number other than one of these options is entered then
the nearest lesser value from the valid entries is used.
i
0-6
Example: Selecting an ECC value of 099 will cause the actual
ECC value of 080 to be used.
1 digit format identification:
0 - Automatically choose the encodation scheme based on
the characters to be encoded.
1 - Numeric data.
2 - Upper-case alphabetic.
3 - Upper-case alphanumeric and punctuation characters
(period, comma, hyphen, and slash).
4 - Upper-case alphanumeric.
5 - ASCII, the full 128 ASCII character set.
6 - Any 8-bit byte.
If a format identifier is selected which will not encode the
input character stream then the bar code symbol will not be
printed.
jjj
9,11,13…49. ECC 140
minimum is 15.
kkk
9,11,13…49. ECC 140
minimum is 15.
ll…l
8-bit data, followed by a
termination character.
It is recommended to use the auto-encodation format
identification since it will select the best possible encodation
scheme for the input stream.
A 3 digit odd number (or 000) of rows requested. 000 causes
rows to be automatically determined. If the rows and columns
do not match, the symbol will be sized to a square using the
greater of the two values.
A 3 digit odd number (or 000) of columns requested. 000
causes columns to be automatically determined. If the rows
and columns do not match, the symbol will be sized to a
square using the greater of the two values.
Data to be encoded.
Table G-2: DataMatrix ECC 000 – 140 Record Structure
196
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
Appendix G – Barcode Details
ECC 200 symbols:
There are 24 square symbol sizes available, with both row and column dimensions, which may be
specified in fields jjj and kkk, measured in modules as indicated in the following list - 10, 12, 14, 16,
18, 20, 22, 24, 26, 32, 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 64, 72, 80, 88, 96, 104, 120, 132, and 144. If an ECC 200
symbol is specified with odd numbers of rows or columns, the next largest even value will be used.
Input values greater than 144 or less than 10 will cause the symbol to be automatically sized for the
input character stream. The record format is shown here, expanded with spaces.
a W b[b] c d eee ffff gggg hhh i jjj kkk ll…l
Where:
Field
a
W
b[b]
c
d
eee
ffff
gggg
hhh
i
jjj
kkk
ll…l
Valid Inputs
1,2,3, and 4
W
c, 1c
1 to 9, A to Z, and a to z
1 to 9, A to Z, and a to z
000 to 999
0000 to 9999
0000 to 9999
200
0
10, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20,
22, 24, 26, 32, 36, 40,
44, 48, 52, 64, 72, 80,
88, 96, 104, 120, 132,
144
10, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20,
22, 24, 26, 32, 36, 40,
44, 48, 52, 64, 72, 80,
88, 96, 104, 120, 132,
144
8-bit data
Meaning
Rotation
Fixed value, extended bar code set
Selects the DataMatrix bar code - the two differing values
have no other significance.
Module size horizontal multiplier
Module size vertical multiplier
No effect; Must be numeric
Label position, row
Label position, column
ECC 200 uses Reed-Solomon error correction.
Fixed value, not used
A 3 digit even number (or 000) of rows requested.
000 causes rows to be automatically determined. The symbol
will be sized to a square if the rows and columns do not match
by taking the larger of the two values.
A 3 digit even number (or 000) of columns requested.
000 causes columns to be automatically determined. The
symbol will be sized to a square if the rows and columns do
not match by taking the larger of the two values.
Data to be encoded in the symbol
Table G-3: DataMatrix ECC 200 Record Structure
Example:
<STX>L
D11<CR>
1W1c44000010001002000000000DATAMAX<CR>
121100000000100Barcode W1c<CR>
E
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
Barcode W1c
197
Appendix G – Barcode Details
W1C:
DataMatrix with Byte Count Specifier
Specified Length – The upper case C identifies a DataMatrix bar code with a string 4-digit length
specifier. This allows values 0x00 through 0xFF to be included within the data strings without
conflicting with the DPL format record terminators. The four-digit decimal data byte count
immediately follows the four-digit column position field. This value includes all of the data following
the byte count field, but does not include itself.
<STX>L
D11<CR>
1W1C440000100010000292000000000Datamax<0x0D>prints best<CR>
121100000000100Barcode W1C<CR>
E
From the example above, the bar code’s data stream,
1W1C440000100010000292000000000
Datamax<0x0D>prints best, includes a Byte Count Specifier (the
portion in bold), where 0029 equals the four-digit decimal data byte count
and includes all bytes that follow until the end of the bar code data. Field
termination is set by the byte count. <STX>, <CR>, and <0x0D> all
represent single byte values of hexadecimal 02, 0D, and 0D, respectively.
The DataMatrix bar code produced encodes “Datamax<CR>prints best,”
and prints a line of text: Barcode W1C.
198
Barcode W1C
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
Appendix G – Barcode Details
W1d / W1D: QR Code
Valid Characters: Numeric Data, Alphanumeric Data, 8-bit byte data, and Kanji characters
Variable Length: The two-dimensional bar code (as documented in AIM, Version 7.0).
Syntax: a W1 b c d eee ffff gggg hh…h
Where:
Field
Valid Inputs
1,2,3 and 4
W1
D and d
a
W1
b
Meaning
Rotation
Fixed value, extended bar code set
Selects the QR bar code formatting mode, where:
D = Manual formatting. Allows the data string (hh…h) to be
entered with a comma (,) as a field separator; fields are
optional per QR Code specifications, and the first field
indicates Model 1 or Model 2 QR Code (Model 2 is the
default).
c
1 to 9, A to Z, and a to z
d
eee
ffff
gggg
hh…h
1 to 9, A to Z, and a to z
000 to 999
0000 to 9999
0000 to 9999
Valid ASCII character
string, followed by (a)
termination character(s).
d = Automatic formatting. Allows the data string (hh…h) to
be data only.
Module size horizontal multiplier Each cell in the bar code is
square, therefore ‘c’ and ‘d’ must be equal. Depending on the
conversion mode (<STX>n or <STX>m), each unit indicates a
cell dimension of .01 inch or .1 mm.
Module size vertical multiplier. (See explanation for ‘c’, above.)
No effect; must be numeric
Label position, row
Label position, column (see Appendix J)
QR Code data string (see Generation Structure, below).
Generation Structure
The data input structure (hh…h) is as follows:
Auto Format (W1d)
With bar code identifier ‘d’, the data begins after the last character of the column position field,
and does not include any command characters. The data string is terminated with a termination
character, usually a 0x0d hex that occurs twice in succession. The bar code symbol will have the
following characteristics:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Model 2
Error Correction Code Level = ‘M’ (Standard Reliability Level)
Mask Selection = Automatic
Data Input Mode = Automatic [1]
Example:
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
199
Appendix G – Barcode Details
<STX>L
D11<CR>
1W1d4400000100010This is the data portion<CR><CR>
121100000000100Barcode W1D<CR>
E
[3]
(Two termination
characters
required.)
Manual Formatting (W1D)
With bar code identifier ‘D’, minor changes allow flexibility for data entry. (Spaces have been
added for readability.)
[q,] [e [m] i,]
cdata cdata cdata…cdata term
[2]
Where:
Field
Valid Inputs
q
e
1, 2
H, Q, M, L
m
0 – 8, none
I
A, a, M, m
cdata
N, A, B, K
immediately followed
by data
term
<CR>, <CR><CR> [3]
[1]
[2]
[3]
Meaning
QR Code Model number, optional. Model 2 is the default.
Error Correction Level (Reed-Solomon) – Four levels
allowing recovery of the symbol code words:
H
= Ultra Reliability Level (30%)
Q
= High Reliability Level (25%)
M
= Standard Reliability Level (15%)
L
= High Density Level (7%)
Mask Number, optional:
None = Automatic Selection
0-7 = Mask 0 to Mask 7
8
= No Mask
Data Input Mode:
A
= Automatic setting, ASCII [1]
a
= Automatic, hex-ASCII [1]
M
= Manual Setting, ASCII[2]
m
= manual, hex-ASCII[2]
Character Mode:
N = Numeric, N data
A = Alphanumeric, A data
B = Binary , Bnnnn data (where nnnn = data bytecount, 4 decimal digits; byte-count /2 for hexASCII
K = Kanji, K data
The data string is terminated with a termination character,
generally a 0x0d hex, but can be changed by the operator. If
the Data Input Mode is Automatic, the data string is
terminated with two successive termination characters.
When Data Input Mode = Automatic – Kanji data cannot be used; Manual data input is required.
When using manual formatting commas are required between format fields and data types.
<CR> represents the line termination character as defined by the current control code set or after use of
Txx, line field terminator label format command.
If HEX/ASCII mode is selected in manual Data Input Mode, only the data for Kanji or Binary
data types will be converted, therefore the other data types and all command characters must be
entered in ASCII format. If HEX/ASCII is selected in automatic Data Input Mode, all of the data
must be entered in HEX/ASCII format.
200
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
Appendix G – Barcode Details
Data Append Mode String Format, Manual Formatting – Bar Code W1D
D aa tt pp I
Where:
Field
D
aa
tt
pp
e
m
i
cdata
term
Valid Inputs
D
00, 99
H, Q, M, L
0 – 8, none
A, a, M, m
N, A, B, K
immediately
followed by data
<CR>, <CR><CR>
Meaning
Data Append Mode String Format indicator
QR Code Number in Append Series, 2 decimal digits
The total number of QR Codes in series, 2 decimal digits
Value of Parity, 2 digits, 8 LSBs of data parity
As above
As above
As above
As above
As above
Characteristics
Models:
Model 1 (original version), bar code versions 1 through 14
A. ECC Levels ‘H’, ‘M’, ‘Q’, and ‘L’
B. Mask Selection Automatic or 0 through 8
C. Data Input Modes Automatic and Manual
D. Data Append Mode
Model 2 (enhanced version), bar code versions 1 through 40
A. ECC Levels ‘H’, ‘M’, ‘Q’, and ‘L’
B. Mask Selection Automatic or 0 through 8
C. Data Input Modes Automatic and Manual
D. Data Append Mode
Representation of data:
Dark Cell = Binary 1
Light Cell = Binary 0
Symbol Size (not including quiet zone, 4 cells on each of the 4 sides):
Model 1: 21 X 21 cells to 73 X 73 cells (Versions 1 to 14, increase in steps of 4 cells per side)
Model 2: 21 X 21 cells to 177 X 177 cells (Versions 1 to 40, increase in steps of 4 cells per side)
Data Characters per symbol (maximum for symbol size):
Numeric Data
Model 1; Version 14; ECC = L: 1,167 characters
Model 2; Version 40; ECC = L: 7,089 characters
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
201
Appendix G – Barcode Details
Alphanumeric Data
Model 1; Version 14; ECC = L: 707 characters
Model 2; Version 40; ECC = L: 4,296 characters
Binary Data
Model 1; Version 14; ECC = L: 486 characters
Model 2; Version 40; ECC = L: 2,953 characters
Kanji Data
Model 1; Version 14; ECC = L: 299 characters
Model 2; Version 40; ECC = L: 1,817 characters
Code Type: Matrix
Orientation Independence: Yes
Example
<STX>L
D11<CR>
1W1D44000001000102HM,AThis is the data portion also
with binary,B0003<0xfe><0xca><0x83><0x0D>
121100000000100Barcode W1D<CR>
E
Barcode W1D
Where:
QR Code bar code, Cell Size = 0.1 inch square, positioned at X =. 1” and Y = .1”, ECC=H, Mask =
Automatic, Data Input Mode = Manual.
Other examples:
DPL field record, QR Code bar code, Cell Size = 0.04 inch square, positioned at X = .1” and Y =
.1”, ECC = H, Mask = 3, Data Input Mode = Manual:
1W1D4400000100010H3M,AThis is the data portion also with
binary,B0003<0xfe><0xca><0x83><0x0D>
DPL field record, QR Code bar code, Cell Size = 0.08 inch square, positioned at X = .1” and Y =
.1”, ECC = L, Mask = Automatic, Data Input Mode = Manual - Kanji:
1W1D88000001000102,LM,K<0x81><0x40><0x81><0x41><0x81><0x42><0x0
D>
DPL field record, QR Code bar code, Cell Size = 0.04 inch square, positioned at X = .1” and Y =
.1”, ECC = L, Mask = Automatic, Data Input Mode = Manual - Kanji (in Hex/ASCII format):
1W1D4400000100010L8m,K814081418142<0x0D>
DPL field record, QR Code bar code, Cell Size = 0.01 inch square, positioned at X = .1” and Y =
.1”, ECC = M, Mask = Automatic, Data Input Mode = Automatic:
1W1d1100000100010Pallet 35FGA, Box 55367, Datamax Corp,
Orlando, Florida 32707<0x0D><0x0D>
202
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
Appendix G – Barcode Details
W1f / W1F: Aztec
Valid Characters: All ASCII characters, depending upon the selected options.
Variable Length (W1f): This two dimensional bar code holds a large amount of data in a small area
and can provide a high level of error checking.
Specified Length (W1F): With a string four-digit length specifier, values 0x00 through 0xFF to be
included within the data strings without conflicting with the DPL format record terminators.
Syntax: a W1 b c d eee ffff gggg [hhhh] i jjj kk…k
Where:
Field
a
W1
b
Valid Inputs
1,2,3, and 4
W1
f and F
c
1 to 9, A to Z,
and a to z
d
1 to 9, A to Z,
and a to z
000
0000 to 9999
0000 to 9999
0000 to 9999
eee
ffff
gggg
[hhhh]
i
0, 1
jjj
000 to 300
kk…k
8-bit data,
followed by a
termination
character
Meaning
Rotation
Fixed value, extended bar code set
Lowercase selects the Aztec bar code, variable length
Uppercase selects the Aztec bar code with a Byte Count Specifier
Module size horizontal multiplier, 0 = default size. The c/d module
size parameters should be equal to produce a square symbol. When the
label command (Dwh) is used to generate larger text, then c and d may
be used to compensate and ensure a square symbol.
Module size vertical multiplier, 0 = default size (See explanation for
‘c’, above.)
No Effect
Label position, row
Label position, column
Optional string length specifier. Field termination is set by this byte
count. This decimal value includes all of the data following this byte
count field, but does not include itself.
Extended Channel Interpretation (ECI) mode; 0 = Disabled,
1 = Enabled
Error Correction (EC) / Amount (see table below), where:
000 – Default EC, approximately 23%
001 – 099 EC fixed value, expressed as a percent.
101 – 104 Compact core, 1 to 4 layers respectively.
201 – 232 Full size core, 1 to 32 layers respectively.
300 – Rune format, encodes three ASCII decimal digits 0-256;
scanner decode output is decimal number 0-256
Data to be encoded.
The error correction or size selection determines the symbol size and other characteristics of the
symbol, as shown in the following table. Attempting to encode more data that has been made
available will result in no symbol printed.
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
203
Appendix G – Barcode Details
jjj
[1]
[2]
Error Correction (EC) / Size Implications
Maximum[2]
Maximum[2]
Symbol
Symbol
Binary Data
Alphabetic
Size[1]
Format
Bytes
Characters
Maximum[2]
Numeric
Characters
000
001 to 099
variable
variable
data dependant
data and EC
dependant
1914
1914
3067
3067
3832
3832
101
102
102
103
104
15
19
19
23
27
compact
compact
compact
compact
compact
6
19
19
33
53
12
33
33
57
89
13
40
40
70
110
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
19
23
27
31
37
41
45
49
53
57
61
67
71
75
79
83
87
91
95
101
105
109
113
117
121
125
131
135
139
143
147
151
full size
full size
full size
full size
full size
full size
full size
full size
full size
full size
full size
full size
full size
full size
full size
full size
full size
full size
full size
full size
full size
full size
full size
full size
full size
full size
full size
full size
full size
full size
full size
full size
8
24
40
62
87
114
145
179
214
256
298
343
394
446
502
559
621
687
753
824
898
976
1056
1138
1224
1314
1407
1501
1600
1702
1806
1914
15
40
68
104
144
187
236
291
348
414
482
554
636
718
808
900
998
1104
1210
1324
1442
1566
1694
1826
1963
2107
2256
2407
2565
2728
2894
3067
18
49
84
128
178
232
294
362
433
516
601
691
793
896
1008
1123
1246
1378
1511
1653
1801
1956
2116
2281
2452
2632
2818
3007
3205
3409
3616
3832
300
11
Rune
1
1
1
Measured in module size x, assuming default module size (cd=00).
Maximum sizes are approximate and data dependant, and may be less than indicated.
Table G-4: Aztec Characteristics Index
Error Correction
Size 001 to 099: This value specifies the percent of
correction. Actual error correction word percentage will
approximately 23%, is recommended. Any other value
Some minimum-security code word may be generated
204
symbol code words to be used for error
vary depending on data. The default value,
may be selected to meet the user’s needs.
depending on the data sent for encoding,
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
Appendix G – Barcode Details
particularly when the volume of that data is small. It the data capacity is exceeded no symbol is
printed.
Size 101 to 104: Values 101 through 104 results in 1 through 4 layers (two modules thick)
respectively, around the center finder pattern. Data volume constraints apply as indicated in the table
above. Symbols will be of the compact form. All available code word will be used for error
correction. It the data capacity is exceeded no symbol is printed.
Size 201 to 232: Values 201 through 232 result in 1 through 32 layers (two modules thick)
respectively, around the center finder pattern. Data volume constraints apply as indicated in the table
above. Symbols will be of the full-size form. All available codewords will be used for error
correction. It the data capacity is exceeded no symbol is printed.
Size 300: Value 300 informs the printer that the data, which follows will be used to encode one
RUNE symbol. The data consists of one to three ASCII digits with value range of 0 to 256. The data
may include leading zeros. Data streams longer than three digits or data that includes non-numeric
characters may have unpredictable results.
Extended Channel Interpretation Mode: A value of 1 provides for extended channel codewords to
be inserted into the bar code symbol, using escape sequences in the datastream. This mode also
provides for effective Code 128 and UCC/EAN 128 emulations, when used in with appropriately
configured bar code readers. The valid values for escape sequences are of the form <ESC>n, where:
<ESC> – 1 byte with value 2710 = 1B16
n – 1 ASCII digit, range 0 through 6
These escape sequences are encoded as FLG(n) character pairs described in the International
Symbology Specification – Aztec Code, AIM, 1997-11-05, and the meanings of the values for n are
the same in both.
<ESC>0 – Is encoded as FLG(0), and interpreted as FNC1 or <GS> depending on its location in
the data stream. The printer does not validate <ESC>0 locations in the data stream.
When <ESC>0 is the leading data in the stream, it is interpreted as a FNC1 as used in
the Code 128 symbology, and specifically for UCC/EAN 128 applications. For
appropriately configured scanners this will be interpreted/transmitted as a ]C1
symbology identifier preamble. The printer does not validate UCC/EAN 128 data
syntax.
When <ESC>0 follows a single alphabetic or two numeric characters respectively,
then it also interpreted as a FNC1. For appropriately configured scanners this would
be interpreted/transmitted as a ]C2 symbology identifier preamble, and the alpha or
numeric characters preceding the FNC1 are Application Indicators assigned by AIM
International. The printer does not check AI validity.
When <ESC>0 is anywhere else in the data stream, a <GS> replaces it in the bar code
symbol, as with UCC/EAN 128 field separators.
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
205
Appendix G – Barcode Details
<ESC>n –
Is encoded as FLG(n), and is interpreted as signaling Extended Channel
Interpretation. When the value of n is from 1 to 6, it signals that the following n
digits comprise an extended channel identifier for use with ECI compliant bar code
scanners. An erroneous bar code symbol may result from failing to follow <ESC>n
with n digits. Any <ESC>0 following <ESC>n and not within the n digits will be
encoded as FLG(0). In the context of a FLG(n), any backslash ‘\’ (9210) will be
interpreted by the scanner as two backslashes ‘\\’.
Example 1: The variable length example encodes “AZTEC” with no ECI input, and 23% error
correction, and prints the bar code. A line of text is also printed.
<STX>L
D11<CR>
1W1f00000001501000000AZTEC<CR>
121100000000100Barcode W1f<CR>
E
Barcode W1f
Example 2: The specified length example includes a byte count field for all bytes that follow until the
end of the bar code data. The byte count is 17. The symbology encodes
“AZTEC<CR>barcode”, and prints the bar code. Notice that a <CR> does not terminate
the bar code format record. A line of text is also printed.
<STX>L
D11<CR>
1W1F000000015010000170000AZTEC<0x0D>barcode
121100000000100Barcode W1F<CR>
E
Barcode W1F
Functions Not Supported
•Structured Append
•Reader Initialization Symbol Generation
•Module shaving
206
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
Appendix G – Barcode Details
W1g / W1G: USD-8 (Code 11)
Valid Characters: 0-9,Bar Code Data String Length: Variable, typical max 41 characters
Non-Human Readable: W1g
Human Readable:
W1G
USD-8 (Code 11) is a bar code that encodes the ten digits and the dash (-) character. An additional
character serves as the start and stop indicator. Each character has three bars and two spaces for a
total of five elements. Of these five elements, two are of medium width and three are narrow, except
for the “0”, “9”, and “-“ characters, which have only one wide element and four narrow elements.
The narrow bar size is specified in DPL by the narrow bar parameter, the medium is specified in DPL
by the wide bar parameter and the wide bar is fixed at 2 times the medium bar minus the narrow bar.
DPL calculates two checksum characters, C and K, and automatically places them prior to the stop
character. The following example prints a Code11 bar code:
<STX>L
D11
1W1G00000015001500123456789-<CR>
121100000000100Barcode W1G<CR>
E
W1I:
Barcode W1G
EAN128 with Auto Subset Switching
Valid characters: The entire 128 ASCII character set.
Variable length, minimum 4 characters
Valid bar widths: The fourth character of record is the width of the narrow bar in dots. All other bars
are a ratio of the narrow bar (2 times the narrow bar width, 3 times the narrow bar width, and 4 times
the narrow bar width).
This printer supports the Code 128 subsets A, B, and C. If the data begins with at least four numeric
characters the default start code is subset C. If there is a non-numeric in the first four characters then
the default start code is subset B. The next character after start is always FNC1. Subset switching
between B and C is performed based on rules as below:
1. If in subset C and there are an odd number of numeric digits, subset B will be set prior to the last
digit.
2. If four or more numeric digits appear consecutively while in subset B, the character code C will be
set prior to the digits.
3. When in subset C and a non-numeric occurs, subset B will be inserted prior to the character.
Note that there is no auto-switching from or to Subset A. Standard switches are still used (see table
below).
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
207
Appendix G – Barcode Details
Subset A: Includes all of the standard uppercase alphanumeric keyboard characters plus the control
and special characters.
Subset B: Includes all of the standard uppercase alphanumeric keyboard characters plus the
lowercase alphabetic and special characters.
Subset C: Includes the set of 100 digit pairs from 00 through 99 inclusive, as well as special
characters. EAN128 Subset C is used for double density encoding of numeric data.
Special Character Handling: Characters with an ASCII value greater than 95 are considered special
characters. To access these values, a two-character reference table is built into the printer, see table
below. As an example, to encode FNC2 into an EAN128 Subset A bar code, send the ASCII & (DEC
38, HEX 26) followed by an ASCII B (DEC 66, HEX 41). Code FNC2 will be encoded.
ASCII
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
2 CHAR
&A
&B
&C
&D
&E
&F
&G
CODE A
FNC3
FNC2
SHIFT
CODEC
CODEB
FNC4
FNC1
CODE B
FNC3
FNC2
SHIFT
-NAFNC4
CODEA
FNC1
CODE C
-NA-NA-NA-NA-NACODEA
FNC1
Table G-8: Special Character Handling
Control Codes: Control character encoding into Code 128 Subset A by sending these control codes:
`
a through z
{
|
}
~
ASCII 127
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
NUL
1 - 26
ESC
FS
GS
RS
US
The following example prints an EAN128 bar code:
<STX>L
D11<CR>
1W1I000000025002512345&G10Z2133021AK<CR>
121100000000100Barcode W1I<CR>
E
Barcode W1I
When scanned this bar code will decode as:
[C][FNC1]1234[B]5[F1]10Z[C]213302[B]1AK(81)
208
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
Appendix G – Barcode Details
W1J:
Code 128 with Auto Subset Switching
Valid characters: The entire 128 ASCII character set.
Variable length
Valid bar widths: The fourth character of record is the width of the narrow bar in dots. All other bars
are a ratio of the narrow bar (2 times the narrow bar width, 3 times the narrow bar width, and 4 times
the narrow bar width).
This printer supports the Code 128 subsets A, B, and C. If the data begins with at least four numeric
characters the default start code is subset C. If there is a non-numeric in the first four characters or
there are less than four then the default start code is subset B. Subset switching between B and C is
based on the following rules:
1. If in subset C and there are an odd number of numeric digits, subset B will be set prior to the last
digit.
2. If four or more numeric digits appear consecutively while in subset B, the character code C will
be set prior to the digits. If there is an odd number of numerics already in B, the first numeric will
be placed in B with the others in C.
3. When in subset C and a non-numeric occurs, subset B will be inserted prior to the character.
Note that there is no auto switching from, or to, subset A. Standard switches are still used. See table
below.
Subset A: Includes all of the standard uppercase alphanumeric keyboard characters plus the control
and special characters.
Subset B: Includes all of the standard uppercase alphanumeric keyboard characters plus the
lowercase alphabetic and special characters.
Subset C: Includes the set of 100 digit pairs from 00 through 99 inclusive, as well as special
characters. Code128 Subset C is used for double density encoding of numeric data.
Special Character Handling: Characters with an ASCII value greater than 95 are considered special
characters. To access these values, a two-character reference table is built into the printer, see table
below. As an example, to encode FNC2 into a Code128 Subset A bar code, send the ASCII & (DEC
38, HEX 26) followed by an ASCII B (DEC 66, HEX 41). Code FNC2 will be encoded.
ASCII
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
2 CHAR
CODE A
CODE B
&A
FNC3
FNC3
&B
FNC2
FNC2
&C
SHIFT
SHIFT
&D
CODEC
-NA&E
CODEB
FNC4
&F
FNC4
CODEA
&G
FNC1
FNC1
Table G-9: Special Character Handling
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
CODE C
-NA-NA-NA-NA-NACODEA
FNC1
209
Appendix G – Barcode Details
Control Codes: Control character encoding into Code 128 Subset A by sending these control codes:
`
a through z
{
|
}
~
ASCII 127
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
NUL
1 - 26
ESC
FS
GS
RS
US
The following example prints a Code128 Auto bar code:
<STX>L
D11<CR>
1W1J000000025002512345&G10Z2133021AK<CR>
121100000000100Barcode W1J<CR>
E
Barcode W1J
When scanned this bar code will decode as:
[C]1234[B]5[F1]10Z2 [C]133021[B]AK(95)
210
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
Appendix G – Barcode Details
W1k:
GS1 DataBar (formerly RSS)
Valid Characters: Type dependant
Bar Code Data String Length: Type dependant
GS1 DataBar is a continuous, linear bar code symbology used for identification in EAN.UCC
systems. There are six different types:
GS1 DataBar Type
GS1 DataBar
GS1 DataBar Truncated
GS1 DataBar Stacked
GS1 DataBar Stacked Omni-directional
GS1 DataBar Limited
Overview*
Encodes a full 14-digit EAN.UCC item identification
within a linear symbol that can be scanned omnidirectionally.
The encodable character set is 0 through 9.
The maximum numeric data capacity is the
application identifier plus 14-digit numeric item
identification.
Error detection is mod 79 checksum.
Encodes a 14-digit EAN.UCC item identification with
indicator digits of zero or one within a linear symbol.
The encodable character set is 0 through 9.
The maximum numeric data capacity for is the
application identifier plus 14-digit numeric item
identification.
Data must begin with indicator 0 or 1. Any higher
number results in discarded data.
Error detection is mod 89 checksum.
GS1 DataBar Expanded
Encodes EAN.UCC item identification plus
supplementary AI element strings.
The encodable character is a subset of ISO 646,
consisting of upper and lower case letters, digits and
20 selected punctuation characters, plus the special
function character FNC1, (#).
The maximum numeric data capacity is 74 numeric or
41 alphanumeric.
Error detection is mod 211 checksum.
*Additional data can be encoded in a two-dimensional composite as per specification.
Syntax for GS1 DataBar, GS1 DataBar Truncated, GS1 DataBar Stacked, GS1 DataBar Stacked
Omni-Directional and GS1 DataBar Limited (spaces shown for readability):
a W1 k c d eee ffff gggg h
i j m n…n | p…p
Where:
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
211
Appendix G – Barcode Details
Field
[1]
[2]
a
W1
k
c
d
eee
ffff
gggg
h
Valid Inputs
1,2,3, and 4
W1
k
1 to 9, A to Z, and a to z
1 to 9, A to Z, and a to z
000
0000 to 9999
0000 to 9999
R, T, S, D, L
i
j
m
n…n
|
1-9
0 to (i-1)
0 to (i-1)
0 to 9
| (optional)
p…p
2-D data (optional)
Meaning
Rotation
Fixed value, extended bar code set
Selects GS1 DataBar bar code
Wide bar ratio, default = 2
Narrow bar ratio, default = 2
No effect
Label position, row
Label position, column
GS1 DataBar Type: R = GS1 DataBar,
T = GS1 DataBar Truncated,
S = GS1 DataBar Stacked,
D = GS1 DataBar Omni-Directional,
L = GS1 DataBar Limited
Pixel Multiplier
X pixels to undercut
Y pixels to undercut
Numeric linear data, length 13 [1]
Vertical bar separates primary linear data from secondary
2-D data
Additional 2-D data [2]
The application identifier is not encoded in the symbol nor is the last check digit; the user should enter in a
13-digit value. The decoding system will display the application identifier and calculate the check digit.
The separator row height for two-dimensional composite is fixed at one times the pixel multiplier.
Table G-5: GS1 DataBar, Truncated, Stacked, Stacked Omni-Directional, & Limited Record
Structures
Examples:
The following example prints an GS1 DataBar bar code.
<STX>L
D11
1W1k0000001500150R1002001234567890
121100000000100Barcode W1k<CR>
E
Barcode W1k
The following example prints an GS1 DataBar bar code with 2-D data.
<STX>L
D11
1W1k0000001500150R1002001234567890|123456-99/99/99
121100000000100Barcode W1k<CR>
E
212
Barcode W1k
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
Appendix G – Barcode Details
The following example prints an GS1 DataBar Truncated bar code.
<STX>L
D11
1W1k0000001500150T1002001234567890
121100000000100Barcode W1k<CR>
E
Barcode W1k
The following example prints an GS1 DataBar Stacked bar code.
<STX>L
D11
1W1k0000001500150S1002001234567890
121100000000100Barcode W1k<CR>
E
Barcode W1k
The following example prints an GS1 DataBar Stacked Omni-Directional
bar code.
<STX>L
D11
1W1k0000001500150D1002001234567890
121100000000100Barcode W1k<CR>
E
Barcode W1k
The following example prints an GS1 DataBar Limited bar code.
<STX>L
D11
1W1k0000001500150L1001501234567890
121100000000100Barcode W1k<CR>
E
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
Barcode W1k
213
Appendix G – Barcode Details
Syntax for the GS1 DataBar Expanded bar code (spaces shown for readability):
a W1 k c d eee ffff gggg h
Where:
Field
a
W1
k
c
d
eee
ffff
gggg
h
i
j
m
nn
p…p
|
Valid Inputs
1,2,3, and 4
W1
k
1 to 9, A to Z, and a to z
1 to 9, A to Z, and a to z
000
0000 to 9999
0000 to 9999
E
1-9
0 to (i-1)
0 to (i-1)
2-22, even only[2]
0 to 9
| (optional)
q…q
2-D data (optional)
i j m nn p…p | q…q
Meaning
Rotation
Fixed value, extended bar code set
Selects GS1 DataBar bar code
Wide bar ratio, default = 2
Narrow bar ratio, default = 2
No effect
Label position, row
Label position, column
GS1 DataBar Type: E= GS1 DataBar Expanded
Pixel Multiplier
X pixels to undercut
Y pixels to undercut
Segments per row
Subset of ISO646, including alphanumerics
Vertical bar separates primary linear data from secondary 2-D
data
Additional 2-D data [1]
[1]
The separator row height for two-dimensional composite is fixed at one times the pixel multiplier.
[2]
When using additional 2-D composite data, the sequence width must be at least 4.
Table G-6: GS1 DataBar Expanded Record Structure
Example:
The following example prints an GS1 DataBar Expanded bar code.
<STX>L
D11
1W1k0000001500150E100022001234567890
121100000000100Barcode W1k<CR>
E
Barcode W1k
214
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
Appendix G – Barcode Details
W1p:
USPS 4-State Customer Barcode
Valid Characters: 0-9
Length: 20, 25, 29 or 31 digits
Valid bar widths: The width and height multiplier values of 00 will produce a valid USPS 4CB
symbol.
Usage: The bar code height field is ignored since the symbol height is United States Postal Service
specific. This bar code represents a 20 digit tracking code and a zero, five, nine, or eleven digit
routing code on a letter or package for the USPS.
The following example prints a USPS 4CB bar code:
<STX>L
D11<CR>
1W1p00000005000500123456709498765432101234567891<CR>
E
W1R:
Barcode W1p
UCC/EAN Code 128 K-MART NON EDI
Valid Characters: 0-9
Length: 18 digits
Valid bar widths: The fourth character of record is the width of the narrow bar in dots. All other bars
are a ratio of the narrow bar (2 times, 3 times, or 4 times the narrow bar width). Human readable
characters for this bar code symbology are printed above the symbol.
This bar code produces the same symbology as bar code ID “R”, except that the human readable field
has been modified to print on the bottom of the bar code (see below).
The following example prints a KMART bar code:
<STX>L
D11<CR>
1W1R0000000150100012345678901234567<CR>
121100000000100Barcode W1R<CR>
E
34 567890 123 4567
Barcode W1R
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
215
Appendix G – Barcode Details
W1t:
TCIF Linked Bar Code 3 of 9 (TLC39)
Valid Characters: All ASCII characters.
Variable Length: Encodes a 25-character alphanumeric serial number in MicroPDF417 symbol.
Specified Length: Encodes a six-digit sequence in a standard 3 of 9 bar code (Code 39) followed by a
link flag character in Code 3 of 9.
Syntax: a W1 t c d eee ffff gggg hhhhhh ; ii…i
Where:
Field
a
W1
t
c
Valid Inputs
1,2,3, and 4
W1
t
1 to 9, A to Z, and a to z
d
eee
ffff
gggg
hhhhhh
;
1 to 9, A to Z, and a to z
001 to 999
0000 to 9999
0000 to 9999
ECI Data
Fixed
i…i
S/N Data
Meaning
Rotation
Fixed value, extended bar code set
Selects TLC39 bar code
Wide bar of Code 39, ratio of wide to narrow must be
between 2:1 and 3:1
Narrow bar of Code 39
Height of Code 39
Label position, row
Label position, column
Six digit ECI number
Parses data. (If the seventh character is not a semi colon
then only a six-digit code 39 will print.)
Up to 25 alphanumeric serial number characters to be
encoded in the MicroPDF417 symbol. This symbol is fixed
at four columns. The number of rows is determined by the
amount of data, as follows:
Number of Alphanumeric
Characters
Number of Rows
1-14
15-22
23-25
4
6
8
The link flag is the character “T” in code 39 without a start/stop indicator. The location of this flag is
based on the ECI code location, length and height. The location of the MicroPDF417 symbol is based
on the location of ECI bar code. The symbol’s module width and height are fixed at the default. The
following example prints a TLC39 bar code:
<STX>L
D11
1Wt0000001500150123456;ABCD12345678901234
1911A0801300170A1B2C3DAAA
121100000000100Barcode W1t<CR>
E
216
Barcode W1t
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
Appendix G – Barcode Details
W1z:
MicroPDF417
Valid Characters: All ASCII characters, depending on the selected options.
Variable Length
Syntax: a W z c d eee ffff gggg h i j k 0 m…m
Where:
Field
a
W1
z
c
d
eee
ffff
gggg
h
i
j
k
0
Valid Inputs
1,2,3, and 4
W1
z
1 to 9, A to Z, and a to z
1 to 9, A to Z, and a to z
000
0000 to 9999
0000 to 9999
1 to 4
0 to 9 and A
0, 1
0, 1
0
m…m
8-bit data
Meaning
Rotation
Fixed value, extended bar code set
Selects the MicroPDF417 bar code
Module size horizontal multiplier, 0 – default size
Module size vertical multiplier, 0 – default size
No Effect
Label position, row
Label position, column
Number columns
Row / Error Correction index
Byte Compaction Mode (1), best compression for binary data
Macro Character Substitution Disable (1)
Fixed ASCII digit 0.
Reserved for future use.
Data to be encoded
This is a 2 dimensional bar code capable of holding large amounts of data in a small area. It provides
a high level of redundancy and error checking. Please reference the following specifications for
details: International Symbol Specification – MicroPDF417, AIM International Technical
Specification, version 1.0 1998-06-18; International Symbol Specification Code 128, AIM
International Technical Specification, version 1.0 1999-11-4; UCC/EAN-128 Application Identifier
Standard, Uniform Code Council, Inc, January 1993, revised July 1995; Application Standard for
Shipping Container Codes, Uniform Code Council, 1996. The following example prints a
MicroPDF417 bar code, default module size (cd = 00), with 1 column, 24 rows, error correction of
33%, no byte compaction, macro character substitution enabled.
<STX>L
D11<CR>
1W1z000000015010014000PDF417<CR>
121100000000100Barcode W1z<CR>
E
Barcode W1z
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
217
Appendix G – Barcode Details
The number of columns (h) and the row / error correction index (i) combine to form a
row/column/error correction selection index (hi) which determines other characteristics of the symbol
as shown in the following table.
Row/Column/Error Correction Selection Index (h, i) Implications
hi Columns Rows Maximum
Symbol Symbol
Maximum
Maximum
Maximum
Width[2] Height[3] Binary Data
Errors
Alphabetic
Numeric
Corrected[1]
Bytes[4]
Characters[5] Characters[5]
10
1
11
4
40
24
3
6
8
11
1
14
4
40
30
7
12
17
12
1
17
4
40
36
10
18
26
13
1
20
5
40
42
13
22
32
14
1
24
5
40
50
18
30
44
15
1
28
5
40
58
22
38
55
20
2
8
5
57
18
8
14
20
21
2
11
6
57
24
14
24
35
22
2
14
6
57
30
21
36
52
23
2
17
7
57
36
27
46
67
24
2
20
8
57
42
33
56
82
25
2
23
10
57
48
38
67
93
26
2
26
12
57
54
43
72
105
30
3
6
9
84
14
6
10
14
31
3
8
11
84
18
10
18
26
32
3
10
13
84
22
15
26
38
33
3
12
15
84
26
20
34
49
34
3
15
18
84
32
27
46
67
35
3
20
23
84
42
39
66
96
36
3
26
29
84
54
54
90
132
37
3
32
35
84
66
68
114
167
38
3
38
41
84
78
82
138
202
39
3
44
47
84
90
97
162
237
40
4
4
5
101
10
8
14
20
41
4
6
9
101
14
13
22
32
42
4
8
11
101
18
20
34
49
43
4
10
13
101
22
27
46
67
44
4
12
15
101
26
34
58
85
45
4
15
18
101
32
45
76
111
46
4
20
23
101
42
63
106
155
47
4
26
29
101
54
85
142
208
48
4
32
35
101
66
106
178
261
49
4
38
41
101
78
128
214
313
4A
4
44
47
101
90
150
250
366
[1]
Can be any combination of 1∗erasures + 2∗substitutions (e.g. 13 maximum number of errors corrected might
include 7 erasures and 3 substitutions).
[2]
Includes 1 module width of quiet zone on either side.
[3]
Assumes the module height is 2∗module width, and includes one module width quiet zones on top and
bottom.
[4]
Assumes Binary Compaction.
[5]
Assumes Text Compaction.
Table G-7: MicroPDF417 Characteristics Index
Note: In the table above, row/column/error correction selection index (hi) values increasingly large do not
necessarily result in the ability to encode more data.
218
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
Appendix G – Barcode Details
Byte Compaction Mode (j = 1)
A value of 1 forces Byte Compaction. The compaction ratio is six 8-bit bytes of data compressed into
a 5-symbol codeword. See the table above for the maximum data allowed for any row/column/error
correction selection index (hi).
Macro Character Substitution Disable (k=1)
By default Macro Character Substitution is enabled (k=0). When enabled, Byte Compaction has
priority over Macro Character Substitution. When Macro Character Substitution is enabled, the data
stream header and trailer are compacted when they conform to the following forms:
[)>RS05GS data RS EoT
or
[)>RS06GS
data RS EoT
where:
data may not contain adjacent bytes with values RS or
G
S
( RS = 3010 , 1E16 and GS = 2910 , 1D16 and EoT = 410 ,416)
Functions Not Supported
•General Purpose Extended Channel Interpretations, including Code-128 emulations
•Structured Append
•Reader Initialization Symbol Generation
•Module shaving
W1Z:
Micro PDF417 with Byte Count Specifier
Specified Length – The upper case Z identifies a Micro PDF417 bar code with a 4-digit string length
specifier. This allows values 0x00 through 0xFF to be included within the data strings without
conflicting with the DPL format record terminators. The four-digit decimal data byte count
immediately follows the four-digit column position field. This value includes all of the data following
the byte count field, but does not include itself.
<STX>L
D11<CR>
1W1Z0000000150100001214000pdf<0x0D>417
121100000000100Barcode W1Z<CR>
E
Barcode W1Z
From the example, the bar code’s data stream,
1W1Z0000000150100001214000PDF<0x0D>417, includes a Byte Count Specifier (the
portion in bold), where 0012 equals the four-digit decimal data byte count and includes all bytes that
follow until the end of the bar code data. Field termination is set by the byte count. <STX>, <CR>,
and <0x0D> all represent single byte values of hexadecimal 02, 0D, and 0D, respectively. The Micro
PDF417 bar code produced encodes “pdf<CR>417”, and prints a line of text: Barcode W1Z.
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
219
Appendix G – Barcode Details
220
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
Appendix H
Single and Double Byte Character Font Mapping
Label format records with font code 9 in the b field of the Format Record header can specify any of the
following bit-mapped or scalable fonts with the associated specification in the font size/selection (eee
height) field, as shown in the tables on the following pages.
Example: 1911u4000100010A0215134<CR>
The example above will produce a printed string consisting of the two Kanji characters referenced by the
two HEX ASCII pairs A0, 21, and 51, 34, on appropriately equipped printers.
Example: 1911U4001000100P012P012<0x38><0x77><0x00>
The above example will produce a printed string consisting of the one 12 point Kanji character referenced
by the byte pair with hex values 38 and 77 on appropriately equipped printers.
Note: Double byte hex representation character strings terminate with two null bytes and a <CR>, i.e., 0x 00
00 0D. The Hex-ASCII representation is terminated with <CR>.
The alphanumeric portion (nn) of the scalable font specifiers, Snn, Unn, unn, numbering system is a base
62 numbering system, 0, 1, 2…8, 9, A, B, C...X, Y, Z, a, b, c...x, y, z. For scalable fonts the S designation
signifies single byte characters and U designates double byte. The lower case U counterpart signifies that
print data in the label format record is in a hex-ASCII format. Fonts that have been downloaded with
designators of the form nn, where nn are alphanumeric, as seen in the font size specifier (eee height)
column below, may be referenced in label format records by their upper or lower case specifiers as
available. However, fonts created for double-byte access cannot be accessed using Snn as the font
designator, and vice versa, single-byte fonts cannot be accessed using Unn or unn.
Note: Downloading scalable fonts require specifying the font ID, a two character alphanumeric. The S, or U, u
used in referencing the font within label format records is not used in the download specification.
Attempting to utilize a scalable font with an inappropriate byte-size designation (e.g. S on double byte or
U, u on single byte) will have unpredictable results.
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
221
Appendix H – Font Mapping
Font 9, Font Specifications (eee Height) and Associated Characteristics
Font
Name
Character
Mapping
Font Size Specifier
(eee Height)
Point
Size
Font 9 Bit-Mapped Resident Fonts (E-Class and M-4206, only)
CG Triumvirate[1]
Single Byte
CG Triumvirate[1]
Single Byte
000 - 010
5, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 18, 24, 30,
36, 48, respectively.
A04, A05, A06, A08, A10,
4, 5, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 18, 24,
A12, A14, A18, A24, A30,
30, 36, 48, 72, respectively.
A36, A48, A72
Font 9 Bit-Mapped Downloaded Fonts
User-downloaded
typeface
Single Byte
100 - 999
user defined
Font 9 Scalable Resident Fonts Specifications (unavailable for E-Class and M-4206 )
CG Triumvirate
Bold Condensed [1]
Single Byte
S00
CG Triumvirate[1]
Single Byte
S01
scalable
scalable
Font 9 Scalable Resident Fonts Specifications (optional)
CG Times
Single Byte
SA0
scalable
CG Times Italic
Single Byte
SA1
scalable
CG Times Bold
Single Byte
SA2
scalable
CG Times Bold
Italic
Single Byte
SA3
scalable
Gothic B Kanji
Double Byte (Binary)
U40
scalable
Gothic B Kanji
Double Byte (Hex ASCII)
u40
scalable
GB Simplified
Chinese
Double Byte (Binary)
UC0
scalable
GB Simplified
Chinese
Double Byte (Hex ASCII)
uC0
scalable
Korean Hangul
Double Byte (Binary)
UH0
scalable
Korean Hangul
Double Byte (Hex ASCII)
uH0
scalable
Font 9 Scalable Downloaded Fonts
User-downloaded
typeface
Single Byte (Binary)
User-downloaded
Double Byte (Binary)
typeface
User-downloaded
Double Byte (Hex ASCII)
typeface
[1]
Standard internal fonts
S50 - S5z...,
S90 - S9z
U50...,U5z...,
U90...U9z
u50...,u5z...,
u90...u9z
scalable
scalable
scalable
Table H-1: Font 9 Specifications
222
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
Appendix I
Symbol Sets and Character Maps
Symbol Set Selection
Scalable fonts are mapped through a symbol set sometimes referred to as a ‘code page’. This mapping
allows the host application to select a variety of characters to match the application. For example in the
code page (CP), character code 0xE4 causes character Φ to be printed. In CP E7, the character code 0xE4
causes δ to be printed. Each of the CPs allows the host application to “emulate” a character set for their
application. Datamax printers that support scalable fonts contain either a standard or an enhanced group
of CPs as defined below. The CP (symbol set) is selected using a DPL Command, <STX>ySxx, where xx
is the two letter CP Identifier.
Note: In the following table, “√” indicates a full compliment of characters, “Part” indicates a partial compliment of
characters, and “X” indicates an absence of characters for the given code page.
Single Byte Code Pages
Code Page Identifier
Datamax
HP (PCL)
AR
CP
D1
D2
D3
DN
DS
DT
E1
E2
E5
E6
E7
E9
EG
EH
ER
FR
G8
GK
GR
H0
H8
IT
L$[3]
LG
8V
3R
11L
12L
13L
0D
10L
7J
0N
2N
5N
6N
12N
9N
12N
7H
10N
1F
8G
12G
1G
0H
8H
0I
14L
1U
Intellifont [1]
CG
CG
Triumvirate
Times
X
√
Part
√
X
X
X
X
X
X
Part
Part
X
X
√
√
√
√
Part
√
√
√
Part
√
Part
√
X
X
Part
√
Part
√
Part
√
Part
Part
Part
√
Part
√
Part
Part
Part
√
Part
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
Font Format
MicroType [2]
CG
CG
Triumvirate
Times
X
√
Part
√
X
X
X
X
X
X
Part
Part
X
X
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
X
X
√ [4]
√ [4]
Part
√
Part
√
Part
√
Part
Part
Part
√
Part
√
Part
Part
Part
√
Part
√
√
√
X
X
√
√
TrueType
√ [3]
√ [3]
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√ [4]
√ [3]
√ [3]
√ [3]
√
√ [3]
√ [3]
√
√ [3]
√ [3]
√
√
√
Description
Arabic-8
PC Cyrillic
ITC Zapf Dingbats/100
ITC Zapf Dingbats/200
ITC Zapf Dingbats/300
ISO 60 Danish / Norwegian
PS ITC Zapf Dingbats
DeskTop
ISO 8859/1 Latin 1
ISO 8859/2 Latin 2
ISO 8859/9 Latin 5
ISO 8859/10 Latin 6
ISO 8859/7 Latin/Greek
ISO 8859/15 Latin 9
ISO 8859/7 Latin/Greek
ISO 8859/8 Latin/Hebrew
ISO 8859/5 Latin/Cyrillic
ISO 69: French
Greek-8
PC-8 Greek
ISO 21: German
Hebrew-7
Hebrew-8
ISO 15: Italian
HP4000 ITC Zapf Dingbats
Legal
223
Appendix I – Symbol Sets and Character Maps
Single Byte Code Pages
Code Page Identifier
Datamax
HP (PCL)
M8
MC
MS
P9[3]
PB
PC
PD
PE
PG
PH
PI
PM
PR
PT
PU
PV
PX
PY
R8
R9[3]
SP
SW
SY
TK
TS
UK
US
VI
VM
VU
W1[4]
WA
WD
WE[4]
WG[4]
8M
12J
5M
13U
6J
10U
11U
17U
10G
15H
15U
12U
10V
9T
9J
26U
12U
3Y
8U
4U
2S
0S
19M
8T
10J
1E
0U
13J
6M
14J
19U
9V
579L
9E
9G
WL[4]
19L
[2]
[3]
[4]
Part
√
Font Format
MicroType [2]
CG
CG
Triumvirate
Times
√
√
√ [4]
√
√ [4]
√
√ [4]
√
Part
Part
√
√
√
√
√
√
Part
√
√
√
Part
Part
√ [4]
√ [4]
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
X
X
X
X
√
√
[4]
√
√
√
√
√
√
X
X
X
X
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
Part
Part
√
√
√
√
X
X
√
√
Part
√
√
TrueType
√
√
√ [4]
√ [4]
√ [4]
√
√
√
√
√ [3]
√ [3]
√
√ [4]
√
√
√
√
√ [3]
√
√ [4]
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√ [3]
√
√
√ [3]
√
√
√ [3]
√
X
X
√
√
[4]
√
√ [4]
√ [4]
√
√
[4]
Part
√
√ [3]
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
Supported in the E-Class, M-4206, and EX2 models.
Supported in the A-Class, H-Class, I-Class, W-Class, M-4208, M-4306, and EX2 models.
Not supported in the E-Class and EX2 models.
Contains the Euro currency symbol ( ).
WN
WO
WR[4]
WT[4]
[1]
Intellifont [1]
CG
CG
Triumvirate
Times
√
√
√
√
√
√
X
X
Part
Part
√
√
√
√
Part
√
Part
√
√
√
Part
Part
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
Part
√
√
√
X
X
√
√
X
X
√
√
√
√
X
X
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
Part
Part
Part
√
Part
√
X
X
Part
√
Part
√
9U
9U
9R
5T
Description
Math-8
Macintosh
PS Math
PC-858 Multilingual
Microsoft Publishing
PC-8, Code Page 437
PC-8 D/N, Code Page 437N
PC-852 Latin 2
PC-851 Latin/Greek
PC-862 Latin/Hebrew
Pi Font
PC-850 Multilingual
PC-864 Latin/Arabic
PC-8 TK, Code Page 437T
PC-1004
PC-775 Baltic
PTXT3000
Non-UGL, Generic Pi Font
Roman-8
Roman-9
ISO 17: Spanish
ISO 11: Swedish
Symbol
Turkish-8
PS Text
ISO 4: United Kingdom
ISO 6: ASCII
Ventura International
Ventura Math
Ventura US
Windows 3.1 Latin 1
Windows Latin/Arabic
Wingdings
Windows 3.1 Latin 2
Windows Latin/Greek
Windows 3.1 Baltic (Latv,
Lith)
Windows
Windows 3.0 Latin 1
Windows Latin/Cyrillic
Windows 3.1 Latin 5
Table I-1: Single Byte Code Pages
224
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
Appendix I – Symbol Sets and Character Maps
Double-Byte Symbols, Chinese, Kanji, and Korean
Character Map Selection
Double byte scalable fonts are mapped through a ‘character map’. This mapping allows the host
application to select a variety of characters to match the application. Each of the code pages allows the
host application to emulate a character set for the application.
Double Byte Character Map
Character Map ID TrueType Font
Description
B5
√
BIG 5 (Taiwan) Encoded*
EU
√
EUC (Extended UNIX Code)
GB
√
Government Bureau Industry Standard; Chinese (PRC) ; default
JS
√
JIS (Japanese Industry Standard); default
SJ
√
Shift JIS
UC
√
Unicode (including Korean)
* Unavailable for E-Class and EX2 models
Table I-2: Double Byte Character Map
The double-byte symbol set is selected using <STX>yUxx command. The single-byte symbol set is
selected using the same command, <STX>ySxx. Each affects an independent database selection and has
no impact on the other.
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
225
Appendix I – Symbol Sets and Character Maps
226
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
Appendix J
General Purpose Input Output (GPIO) Port Applications
GPIO and Applicator Interface Card equipped printers can easily interface with most external controlling
devices. Function and setting preferences can be stored in non-volatile memory for subsequent power-ups
using the menu system of the printer, or via <STX>Kc commands.
Printing with GPIO: When the GPIO functions are enabled, the printer will not print a label until the
“Start of Print” signal goes active.
Note: When a label is ready to print but awaiting a Start of Print signal, the prompting operation differs slightly
depending upon equipment:
• Non-Display Models – The STOP LED will flash.
• Display-Equipped Models – The display will indicate “WAITING FOR SIGNAL.”
Always wear a wrist strap and follow ESD prevention measures when handling the GPIO or
Applicator Interface Card. For specification information, reference the printer Maintenance Manual.
CAUTION
Functions vary according to printer model and card type, as discussed below.
M-Class GPIO
The connection to the GPIO signals can be accessed via the Option Port connector on the front of the
printer, or via the Main CCA:
Option Port Connector
(as viewed when facing the front of the printer)
8
6
4
2
7
5
3
1
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
Main CCA Connector J6
(as viewed when facing the component side of the
Main CCA)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
227
Appendix J – General Purpose Input Output Ports
Each GPIO pin function is detailed in the table below:
M-Class GPIO Port Overview
Pin
Number(s)
Signal
Name
Signal
State
Signal
Direction[1]
1
Vcc
+5 VDC @
2.5 Amp (fused )
Output
Printer +5 VDC
Goes low if the printer detects a fault and
applies only when not equipped with a
cutter. To activate set the GPIO Equipped
to “A” and Cutter Equipped to “NO”.
[1]
[2]
Signal Description [2]
2
Printer Fault
Low
Output
3
Spare
Reserved
Input
Must be pulled high (see sample SOP
circuit, below).
4
Start of Print
(SOP)
Programmable
Input
When active, will begin print. Recommend
only setting this signal to ACTIVE LOW.
When ready to print a label, the applicator
should hold this signal low for at least
50ms – or until EOP goes not active. See
sample SOP circuit, below.
5
End of Print
(EOP)
Programmable
Output
Signifies the end of the print process. Can
be monitored to initiate next Start of Print
sequence. Minimum signal time 30ms.
6&8
Signal Ground
Ground
N/A
7
+24 VDC
+24 VDC @
1.6 Amp (fused )
Output
Ground
Printer +24 VDC
Given relative to the printer.
The operation of this multi-function port is configuration dependent: Non-Display models use the <STX>Kc or program the
selections via the “Printer Setup Menu List,” disable all unused optional functions (i.e., present sensor, cutter, etc.), and set
GPIO to “YES”; or, for Display-Equipped models via the “Menu System” go to Options / GPIO / Applicator and select
Enable. See the Operator’s Manual for more details.
M-Class Sample SOP Circuit
GPIO Connector Pin Number
Pin 3 should be pulled to +5VDC. In additional, connections for the
external Start of Print control can either be directly made to Pin 4 of
Vcc 1
1K O
Spare 3
1K O
the Option Port (or via the Main CCA) using a TTL-level input, or
via an interface circuit (similar to the one shown).
SOP 4
Gnd 8
228
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
Appendix J – General Purpose Input Output Ports
I & W-Class GPIO
GPIO pin functions are detailed in the table below:
I-Class and W-Class GPIO Overview
Pin
Number
Signal
Name
Signal
State
Signal
Direction *
1
Vcc
+5 VDC
Output
+5 VDC power supply.
2
Ribbon Fault
Low
Output
Goes low when a ribbon out condition is
detected.
3
Paper Fault
Low
Output
Goes low when an out of stock condition is
detected.
4
Printer Fault
Low
Output
Goes low when any printer fault is detected.
5
Ribbon Low
Programmable
Output
Goes high (or low) when a low ribbon supply
is detected.
6
End of Print
Programmable
Output
Goes high (or low) when printing is complete,
typically monitored to initiate the next Start of
Print sequence.
7
Backup Label
Programmable
Input
When received, will position a presented label
for printing, provided that the programmed
present distance is greater than zero.
8
Start of Print
Signal (SOP)
Programmable
Input
When received, begins printing. (If the printer
awaits the SOP signal, WAITING FOR
SIGNAL will be displayed).
9
Signal Ground
Ground
N/A
Ground return.
Description
GPIO pin configuration (illustrated right), as viewed from the rear of the printer:
I-Class and W-Class Sample SOP Circuit
Connections for an external Start of Print/Backup Label control can be made (1)
directly to Pin 8 / 7 using a TTL-level input or (2) with an interface circuit similar
to the one shown right. For additional interfacing requirements, see the table
above.
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
229
Appendix J – General Purpose Input Output Ports
Applicator Interface Card (Version 1)
The Applicator Interface Card (Version 1) is equipped with a GPIO Port, an Auxiliary (Serial B) Port and
two LEDs.
Applicator Interface Card
1
2
3
4
5
Connector
Pin-Outs
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
6
7
8
Auxiliary Port, J1
9
Green and Yellow LEDs
9
10
GPIO Port, J2
11
12
13
14
15
Applicator Interface Card Location and Connector Pin-outs (as found in some A-Class models)
Applicator Interface Card Jumper Locations
230
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
Appendix J – General Purpose Input Output Ports
The GPIO Port allows convenient printer to applicator integration. Functions can be configured using the
menu system or via <STX>Kc commands. All configuration settings are saved in non-volatile memory.
Jumper settings are critical:
•
Jumper settings allow internal or external power distribution to the applicator circuitry.
•
Jumper settings allow + 5 or +24 VDC output signal levels.
WARNING
Failure to configure the card for the device(s) you are connecting may result in damage to the printer
and/or the applicator.
The table below details the GPIO Port functions, and configurable settings:
Applicator Interface Card GPIO Port (J2) Overview
Pin
#
Signal
Name
1
Ground (Configurable)
2
+5 VDC (Configurable)
[3]
Signal
Direction
Active
Setting
Jumper
Placement
Function /
Description
Ground
Ground
JMP 7 ‘On’
Printer chassis ground is used
Open
Open
JMP 7 ‘Off’
Ground return must be supplied
Output
+5 VDC
JMP 8 ‘On’
Printer +5 VDC is used
(.5 amp max.)
Open
Open
JMP 8 ‘Off’
+5 VDC must be supplied
Input
Programmable
N/A
N/A
3
Start Of Print
4
Slew Label
Input
Programmable
5
Pause Toggle
Input
Low
Input
Low
6
Reprint
[2]
7
+24 VDC (1.0 amp max.)
Output
+24 VDC
8
Ground
Ground
Ground
9
Ribbon Low
Output
Programmable
Output
Low
10
Service Required
[1]
JMP 9:
See the WARNING
message, above.
11
End Of Print
Output
Programmable
Pins 1 & 2 =
+5 VDC
12
Media Out
Output
Low
– OR –
13
Ribbon Out
Output
Low
14
Data Ready (DRDY)
Output
Low
Pins 2 & 3 =
+24 VDC
When inactive, all output pins
will be pulled up to the voltage
determined by this jumper
setting.
15
Spare
Output
N/A
N/A
N/A
[1]
Evoked by occurrences listed under ‘Fault Messages’ in the A-Class Operator’s Manual.
[2]
Reprints the last label exactly, with no increment or time stamp changes; use it for error conditions. Always keeping this signal
LOW will result in non-stop printing.
[3]
If active with no current print job, “WAITING FOR DATA” is displayed. Specifying a quantity of 9999 while always
keeping this signal ‘ON’ will cause non-stop label printing, except in single label mode (see Imaging Mode, Section 4.2.5 of
the A-Class Operator’s Manual), which will cause the printer to stop between labels.
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
231
Appendix J – General Purpose Input Output Ports
The Applicator Start of Print Circuit will depend upon the applicator system’s requirements:
J2 - GPIO PORT
•
For applicator interface circuitry that will use the
printer’s +5 VDC, follow the schematic shown right.
3 Start of Print
4 Slew Label
5 Pause Toggle
6 Reprint
1 Ground
Vcc = 5 VDC External Power Source
•
For applicator interface circuitry that will supply an
external +5 VDC and ground, remove JMP 7 and JMP 8
from the Applicator Interface Card and follow the
schematic shown right.
J2 -GPIO PORT
2 Vcc
3 Start of Print
4
Slew Label
5 Pause Toggle
6 Reprint
Ground
The Auxiliary Port (J1) is an RS-232 interface. Serial data transfer settings (such as baud rate, word
length, and parity) can be made using <STX>KcSP commands. These settings must match the device that
you are connecting. Jumpers JMP 1 – JMP 4 should be in installed.
Applicator Interface Card Auxiliary Data Port
Pin Number(s)
Signal
1
2
3
4
5
6&9
7
8
+5 VDC (0.5 Amp )
RX
TX
DTR
Ground
N/C
RTS
CTS
Indicators: The Green and Yellow LEDs provide a visual indication of printer/applicator signal activity:
Applicator Interface Card Indicators
• Yellow LED
• Green LED
232
Flash at power-up and when the card’s outputs change state.
Flash at power-up and when the card’s inputs change state.
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
Appendix J – General Purpose Input Output Ports
Applicator Interface Card (Version 2)
The Applicator Interface Card (Version 2) has two GPIO Ports, two Auxiliary Ports (Serial C & D) and
two indicator LEDs.
Applicator Interface Card (Version 2) Port Pin outs:
15
14
J2
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
9
8
7
J4
6
5
13
4
12
3
11
2
10
1
9
5
8
J1
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
1
4
3
2
J3
8
1
Hardware jumper locations:
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
233
Appendix J – General Purpose Input Output Ports
GPI/O A (J1)
Four dedicated inputs are available for control of printer functions. These inputs require no external
pull-ups, are designed to interface to open-collector outputs and accept totem pole outputs from +4.5 to +
26 VDC. Optical isolators are available to provide isolation. Two print control circuit examples are given
below.
GPI/O A - J1
For direct inputs –
3 Start of Print
Use the printer’s +5VDC and Ground to supply the devices
interfacing to the GPI/O A inputs (as shown, right).
4
Slew Label
5 Toggle/Pause
6 Reprint
1 Ground
For isolated inputs –
+5 VDC External Source
GPI/O A - J1
To provide galvanic isolation for the GPI/O A inputs, remove
jumper JMP 9 then supply an external +5VDC source voltage
to Pin 2, and remove jumper JMP 8 then supply an external
Ground to Pin 1 (as shown, right).
2 Vcc
3 Start of Print
4 Slew Label
5 Toggle/Pause
6 Reprint
1
Ground
Seven dedicated outputs are available for control, warning, and error functions. These open-collector
outputs are slew-limited. Optional 10K ohm pull-up resistors, tied to a common point for use at either +5
or +24 VDC, are available via jumper JMP 1.
Note:
To avoid damage if external pull-up resistors are used (that is, without jumper JMP1 installed), ensure that
the external voltage does not exceed +30VDC.
The table below details the GPI/O A pin assignments, settings and functions:
234
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
Appendix J – General Purpose Input Output Ports
Failure to properly configure the GPIO Port can result in damage to the printer and / or connected devices.
WARNING
Applicator Interface Card (Version 2) GPI/O Port A Overview
Pin
Number
1
Signal Name
Signal
Direction [1]
Ground
Jumper
Position
JMP 8
+5 VDC
Installed
Printer chassis is used.
Removed
Ground must be supplied.
Printer +5VDC is used (.5 amp maximum)
N/A
2
Installed
JMP 9
Removed
3
Start Of Print
4
Slew Label
5
[2]
Toggle / Pause
Reprint
7
+24 VDC
8
Ground
9
Ribbon Low
10
Service Required
11
End Of Print
12
Media Out
13
Ribbon Out
14
Data Ready
15
Option Fault
Note:
Drawing more than .5 amps can cause unreliable printer operation.
+5VDC must be supplied.
Programmable
Programmable
Input
The printer pauses when the signal is taken LOW.
N/A
6
Function / Description
N/A
The last label is reprinted exactly, with no increment or time stamp changes;
recommended for use during error conditions. Always keeping this signal LOW results
in non-stop printing.
Printer +24 VDC (1.5 amp maximum)
N/A
Printer chassis.
Programmable [1]. Signifies a RIBBON LOW DIAMETER warning condition.
When inactive, outputs will be pulled up to
a voltage determined by this jumper setting,
where:
Output
JMP 1
•
•
•
Pins 1 – 2 = +5VDC;
Evoked by occurrences listed under ‘Fault Messages.’[1] Active LOW.
Programmable [1]. Signifies the End of Print (EOP) process.
Evoked during an Out of Stock condition. Active LOW.
Pins 2 – 3 = +24VDC; or,
Evoked during an Out of Ribbon condition. Active LOW.
None = A common external voltage (not
to exceed +30VDC) via external pull-ups
(providing a 20K ohm feedback path
through any two outputs).
Evoked when a label is waiting to be printed. Then after the printer receives the Start of
Print signal, printing will begin. For synchronization with the print cycle, the End Of
Print signal indicates the completion of the print process. Active LOW.
Evoked during a Linear Scanner or RFID fault condition. Active LOW.
[1]
Signal directions are given relative to the printer.
[2]
If active with no current print job, “WAITING FOR DATA” will be displayed. Specifying a quantity of 9999 while keeping this signal ON will cause non-stop label printing, except in single label
“Imaging Mode”, which will cause the printer to stop between labels.
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
235
Appendix J – General Purpose Input Output Ports
GPI/O B (J2)
Six unassigned inputs are designed to interface to open-collector outputs. These inputs require no
external pull-ups and blocking diodes allow the use of totem pole outputs from +4.5 to + 26 VDC. Optical
isolators are available to provide isolation. Two print control interface circuit examples are given below.
GPI/O B - J2
13 Input 1
For direct inputs:
8 Input 2
3 Input 3
Use the printer’s +5VDC and Ground to supply the devices
interfacing to the GPI/O B inputs (as shown, right).
12 Input 4
7 Input 5
2 Input 6
6 Ground
+5 VDC External Source
GPI/O B - J2
For electrically-isolated inputs:
1 Vcc
13 Input 1
To provide galvanic isolation for the GPI/O B inputs, remove
jumper JMP 11 then supply an external +5VDC source
voltage to Pin 1, and remove jumper JMP 10 then supply an
external Ground to Pin 6 (as shown, right).
8 Input 2
3 Input 3
12 Input 4
7 Input 5
2 Input 6
6 Ground
Six unassigned outputs are programmable and slew-limited. Optional 10K ohm pull-up resistors, one for
each of the output lines, can be used at either +5 or +24 VDC via jumpers JMP 2 – 7.
Note:
To avoid damage if external pull-up resistors are used (that is, when Jumpers JMP 2 - 7 are not installed),
ensure that the external voltage does not exceed +30VDC.
The table below details the GPI/O B pin assignments, settings and functions:
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
236
Appendix J – General Purpose Input Output Ports
Failure to properly configure the GPIO Port can result in damage to the printer and / or connected devices.
WARNING
Applicator Interface Card (Version 2) GPI/O Port B Overview
Pin Number
Signal Name / Direction
[1]
Jumper
Position
Installed
1
+5 VDC
JMP 11
2
Input 6
N/A
N/A
3
Input 3
N/A
N/A
Removed
4
Output 6
JMP 7
JMP 4
+5VDC must be supplied.
Programmed input function.
Programmed input function.
Installed: Pins 2 – 3
Programmed output function pulled-up to +24VDC.
Installed: Pins 2 – 3
An external voltage via external pull-ups will determine this level, not exceed +30VDC.
Programmed output function pulled-up to +5VDC.
Programmed output function pulled-up to +24VDC.
Removed
An external voltage via external pull-ups will determine this level, not exceed +30VDC.
Installed
Printer chassis is used.
Removed
Ground must be supplied.
6
Ground
JMP 10
7
Input 5
N/A
N/A
Programmed input function.
8
Input 2
N/A
N/A
Programmed input function.
9
Output 5
JMP 6
Installed: Pins 2 – 3
Installed: Pins 1 – 2
Removed
10
Output 2
JMP 3
11
+24 VDC
Programmed output function pulled-up to +5VDC.
Programmed output function pulled-up to +24VDC.
An external voltage via external pull-ups will determine this level, not exceed +30VDC.
Installed: Pins 1 – 2
Programmed output function pulled-up to +5VDC.
Installed: Pins 2 – 3
Programmed output function pulled-up to +24VDC.
Removed
An external voltage via external pull-ups will determine this level, not exceed +30VDC.
N/A
N/A
Printer +24 VDC (1.5 amp maximum).
12
Input 4
N/A
N/A
Programmed input function.
13
Input 1
N/A
N/A
Programmed input function.
14
Output 4
JMP 5
Installed: Pins 1 – 2
Programmed output function pulled-up to +5VDC.
Installed: Pins 2 – 3
Programmed output function pulled-up to +24VDC.
Removed
Installed: Pins 1 – 2
15
Output 1
JMP 2
Installed: Pins 2 – 3
Removed
[1]
Drawing more than .5 amps can cause unreliable printer operation.
Programmed output function pulled-up to +5VDC.
Removed
Output 3
Note:
Installed: Pins 1 – 2
Installed: Pins 1 – 2
5
Function / Description
Printer +5VDC is used (.5 amp maximum).
An external voltage via external pull-ups will determine this level, not exceed +30VDC.
Programmed output function pulled-up to +5VDC.
Programmed output function pulled-up to +24VDC.
An external voltage via external pull-ups will determine this level, not exceed +30VDC.
Signal directions are given relative to the printer.
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
237
Appendix J – General Purpose Input Output Ports
COM C (J4)
Serial Port C functions as an RS-232 interface or as a dedicated device interface, according to jumper
setting configurations indicated below:
COM C Jumper Setting Functions
Function
Note:
Position
RS-232 Communications
JMP 12
On
JMP 13
On
JMP 14
On
JMP 15
On
RFID
Off
On
On
On
Linear Scanner
On
Off
On
On
Remote Display
On
On
Off
On
Jumper settings will override most printer menu settings; however, if COM C jumpers are set for RS-232
communications with both the RFID and Linear Scanner options menu-enabled the printer will
automatically assign the Linear Scanner to COM C (J4).
COM D (J3)
Serial Port D is an RS-232 communications interface.
Applicator Interface Card (Version 2) Indicators:
Verification of settings and activity monitoring of the GPIO ports is available via displayed and printed information;
see the printer Operator’s Manual for menu information:
Note:
Unused, non-connected inputs and outputs will have an indeterminate state and assume a value of 1 or 0.
Indicators: Real-time incoming (IN) and outgoing (OUT) signal activity can be observed via LEDs on the card
bracket. Sampled every millisecond, these LEDs change color with a corresponding change of signal state.
Signal In
Signal Out
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
238
Appendix K
Print Resolutions; Maximum Field, Row, Column, & Character Values; and, Memory Module Identifiers and Allocations
Note:
The tables in this section use the following standards: X = Supported; ND = Non-Display
Printer
[1]
Maximum Format Fields [1]
Total Characters All Fields
A-Class,
H-Class,
I-4210, I-4212, I-4308, I-4406, I-4604,
M1, M2, M-4208, M-4306, &
W-Class
E-Class
700
32768
450
16,000
I-4206 & I-4208
500
32768
M-4206
450
16,000
When the product of the number of fields and characters in each field exceeds the available printer memory (the limiting factor), portions of the label may not print.
Table K-1: Maximum Label Format Fields & Characters
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
239
Appendix K – Print Resolutions; Module Identifiers; Maximum Field, Column & Character Values
A-4212
Print Resolution
DPI
DPMM
203
8.0
Dot Dimensions (nominal)
Inches
Millimeters
.0043 x .0052
.11 x .13
A-4310
300
11.8
.0027 x .0043
.07 x .11
1248
105.7
416
1057
A-4408
406
16.0
.0013 x .0018
.03 x .05
1664
104.1
410
1041
A-4606
600
23.6
.0008 x .0015
.02 x .04
2496
105.7
416
1057
A-6212
203
8.0
.0043 x .0052
.11 x .13
1344
168.1
662
1680
A-6310
300
11.8
.0027 x .0043
.07 x .11
1920
162.6
640
1626
EX2, E-4203 & E-4204
203
8.0
.0043 x .0052
.11 x .13
832
104.1
410
1041
E-4304
300
11.8
.0028 x .0056
.07 x .14
1248
105.7
416
1057
H-4212 & H-4212X
203
8.0
.0043 x .0052
.11 x .13
832
104.1
410
1041
Model
Maximum Print Width
Dots
Millimeters
832
104.1
Maximum “gggg” Value
Inch
Metric
410
1041
H-4310 & H-4310X
300
11.8
.0027 x .0043
.07 x .11
1248
105.7
416
1046
H-4408
406
16.0
.0013 x .0018
.03 x .05
1664
104.1
410
1041
H-4606 & H-4606X
600
23.6
.0008 x .0015
.02 x .04
2496
105.7
416
1057
H-6210 & H-6212X
203
8.0
.0043 x .0052
.11 x .13
1344
168.1
662
1680
H-6308 & H-6310X
300
11.8
.0027 x .0043
.07 x .11
1920
162.6
640
1626
H-8308X
300
11.8
.0027 x .0043
.07 x .11
2560
216.7
853
2167
I-4206, I-4208, I-4210 & I-4212
203
8.0
.0043 x .0052
.11 x .13
832
104.1
410
1041
I-4308
300
11.8
.0027 x .0043
.07 x .11
1248
105.7
416
1046
I-4406
406
16.0
.0013 x .0018
.03 x .05
1664
104.1
410
1041
I-4604
600
23.6
.0008 x .0015
.02 x .04
2496
105.7
416
1057
M1, M2, M-4206 & M-4208
203
8.0
.0043 x .0052
.11 x .13
864
108.0
425
1080
M-4306
300
11.8
.0027 x .0043
.07 x .11
1248
105.7
416
1057
W-6208
203
8.0
.0043 x .0052
.11 x .13
1344
168.1
662
1681
W-6308
300
11.8
.0027 x .0043
.07 x .11
1920
162.6
640
1626
300
11.8
.0027 x .0043
.07 x .11
2560
216.7
853
2167
W-8306
Table K-2: Print Widths, Resolutions, and Record Column Field Values
240
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
Appendix K – Print Resolutions, Module Identifiers, Maximum Field, Column, & Character Values
Printer Resolution (DPI)
Row/Column/Present Adjust Fine Tune <STX>KcRF <STX>KcCF <STX>KcPJ
Parameter Range (+/– dots)
203
-100 – 100 dots
300
-150 – 150 dots
400
-200 – 200 dots
600
-300 – 300 dots
Table K-3: Row Adjust Range per Print Resolution
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
241
Appendix K – Print Resolutions; Module Identifiers; Maximum Field, Column & Character Values
F
G
X
Y
Z [6]
M1
M2
M -Class
(ND)
I-Class
EX2 [10]
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
SDIO
4 MB Flash – Option, configurable. [6]
256 KB Flash, Main CCA [2, 5]
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
128 KB Flash, Main CCA, configurable up to 6.25 MB with Flash option
X
X
X
X
[3, 6]
[3, 6]
X
X
≈ 5.0 MB Flash, Main CCA
USB Host Ports (as equipped)
USB Host Ports (as equipped)
64 MB option (as equipped)
ILPC Module, configurable 256 KB to 6.5 MB (as equipped).
64 KB Flash – Menu / EFIGS – protected
128 KB Flash – Menu / EFIGS – protected
4 MB Flash – Option ILPC – protected
X
H-Class
X
[6, 7]
H
I
J
X
X
X
DRAM (default 1MB), configurable.
512 KB Flash, Main CCA, configurable up to 6.5 MB with Flash option
X
X
DRAM (512 KB - default size), configurable.
D
X
W-Class
C
DRAM (512 KB - default size)
Flash (256 KB available to user)
Flash (512 KB available to user)
Default, as assigned by <STX>X
M-Class
B [1]
Description
E-Class
A
A-Class
Module ID
Printer
X[9]
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X[3,6]
X[8]
X
X[8]
[7]
[4]
X[3,6]
[4]
X
X
X
X
X
X
[7]
X[7]
X[7]
X[7]
X[7]
X
[1]
Dependent upon options and available memory; see the configuration label or <STX>KC; ≈ 100,000 writes for semi-or-permanent storage of images, fonts and formats.
[2]
Not available for the I-4206 and I-4208.
[3]
Modules G and X are partitioned to equal the sum of the total space available: 6.5MB A-Class; and, 6.25MB M-Class.
[4]
Module X hosted the ILPC template for a short period.
[5]
Decreased due to added features.
[6]
Configurable; see <STX>KcMCC.
[7]
Modules X and Y are factory allocated and locked; space is used / removed from Module G.
[8]
Modules X and Y are treated as folders or subdirectories within B, and space is used / removed from Module B.
[9]
Size dependent on main board flash size, and options installed, up to 6.0MB
[10]
Queries report modules A and B, X and Y only.
Table K-5: Memory Module Identifiers and Default Memory Allocations
242
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
Appendix L
Speed Ranges
Printer Speed Command*
Speed Value:
Inches per Second
Millimeters per Second
1.0
1.5
2.0
2.5
3.0
3.5
4.0
4.5
5.0
5.5
6.0
6.5
7.0
7.5
8.0
8.5
9.0
9.5
10.0
10.5
11.0
11.5
12.0
13.0
14.0
15.0
16.0
17.0
18.0
19.0
20.0
25
38
51
63
76
89
102
114
127
140
152
165
178
191
203
216
227
241
254
267
279
292
305
330
356
381
406
432
457
483
508
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
a
b
c
d
e
*Applicable speed values are printer dependent. See Table L-2, below.
Table L-1: Speed Command Values
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
243
Appendix L – Speed Ranges
Model
Print Speed
Range
Default
Feed Speed
Range
Default
Reverse Speed
Range
Default
A-4212
C – W
O
C – W
O
C – I
G
C – a
O
A-4310
C – S
O
C – W
O
C – I
G
C – a
O
A-4408
C – O
K
C – S
K
C – I
G
C – a
K
A-4606
C – K
G
C – O
G
C – I
G
C – a
G
A-6212
C – W
O
C – W
O
C – I
G
C – Y
O
A-6310
C – S
O
C – W
O
C – I
G
C – Y
O
E-4203
A – G
G
A – G
G
A – E
C
N/A
N/A
E-4204
A – G
G
A – G
G
A – E
C
N/A
N/A
E-4304
A – G
G
A – G
G
A – E
C
N/A
N/A
EX2
A – G
G
A – G
G
A – E
C
N/A
N/A
H-4212 &
H-4212X
C – W
O
C – W
O
C – G
G
C – a
O
H-4310 &
H-4310X
C – S
O
C – W
O
C – G
G
C – a
O
H-4408
H-4606 &
H-4606X
H-6210
C – O
K
C – S
K
C – G
G
C – a
K
C – K
G
C – O
G
C – G
G
C – a
G
C – S
K
C – W
K
C – G
G
C – W
K
H-6212X
C – W
O
C – W
O
C – G
G
C – Y
O
H-6308
C – O
K
C – S
K
C – G
G
C – S
K
H-6310X
C – S
O
C – W
O
C – G
G
C – Y
O
H-8308X
C – O
K
C – S
K
C – G
G
C – W
K
I-4206
C – K
K
C – O
K
C – G
G
C – K
K
I-4208
C – O
O
C – O
O
C – G
G
C – O
O
I-4210
C – S
O
C – S
O
C – G
G
C – W
O
I-4212
C – W
O
C – W
O
C – G
G
C – W
O
I-4308
C – O
K
C – O
K
C – G
G
C – O
K
I-4406
C – K
I
C – K
I
C – G
G
C – K
I
I-4604
C – G
E
C – G
E
C – G
G
C – G
E
M1
C – K
K
C – K
K
C – G
G
C – K
K
M2
C – S
O
C – S
O
C – G
G
C – S
O
M-4206
C – K
G
C – K
G
C – G
C
C – K
G
M-4208
C – O
O
C – O
O
C – G
G
C – O
O
M-4306
C – K
G
C – K
G
C – G
C
C – K
G
W-6208
C – O
K
C – S
K
C – G
G
C – S
K
W-6308
C – O
K
C – S
K
C – G
G
C – S
K
W-8306
C – K
K
C – O
K
C – G
G
C – O
K
[1]
[1]
Slew Speed (GPIO)
Range
Default
Maximum speed is limited to ‘E’ unless the optional regulated power supply is attached.
Table L-2: Speed Ranges and Defaults
244
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
Appendix M
Commands by Function
Commands by Function
Function
Command
Backup speed
Batch quantity request
Cancel
Character bit-mapped data
Character code
Character dump mode
Column offset amount
Configuration label and dot pattern print
Configuration Set (See Table 5-1 for individual listings)
Continuous paper length
Count by
Cut
Cut by
Cut by
Decrement alphanumerically
Decrement numerically
DIP switch, host controlled settings
Dot size height and width
Edge sensor enable
Feed rate
Feedback characters enable
Field data line terminator
File delete from module
Firmware version request
Font descriptor
Font ID number
Form feed
Set Present Distance
Format attribute
Graphics image download
Heat setting
Inches
Increment alphanumerically
Increment numerically
Label format field replacement
Label formatting start
Label length maximum
pa
<SOH>E
<SOH>C
<ESC>(snnnWdata
<ESC>*cnnnE
<STX>P
Cnnnn
<STX>Z
<STX>Kc
<STX>cnnnn
^nn
<STX>o
:nnnn
cnn
<fii
- fii
<STX>Vn
Dwh
<STX>e
<STX>Sa
<STX>a
Tnn
<STX>xmfname
<STX>v
<ESC>)snnnW
<ESC>*cnnnD
<STX>F
<STX>Kfnnnn
An
<STX>Iabfnamecr
Hnn
<STX>n
>fii
+fii
<STX>Unnstring
<STX>L
<STX>Mnnnn
Table M-1: Commands (A-L)
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
245
Appendix M – Commands By Function
Commands by Function
Function
Command
Memory query
Memory query (new format)
Metric
Metric
Mirror
Module clear
Module, compress
Module, directory request
Module, set default
Module, FLASH memory Test
Module, RAM memory Test
Modules, clear all
Pause for each label
Pause toggle
Pause, controlled
Place data in global register
Print last label format
Print speed
Print time and date
Print head dot pattern test label
Quantity labels printed
Quantity of labels
Recall global data and place in field
Recall stored label
Reflective sensor select
Replacement field tag
Reset
Resettable counters reset
Ribbon saver
Row offset amount
RS-232 port test
Scalable font download
Sensor values request
Feed speed
Status ASCII string request
Status byte request
Store label in module & terminate formatting
Symbol set select
Symbol set select
Terminate formatting - print label format
Terminate label formatting, do not print label
Time and date request
Time and date set
Update system database with current database
Zero (Ø) conversion to “0”
<STX>KQ
<STX>Kq
<STX>m
m
M
<STX>qm
<STX>zm
<STX>Wa
<STX>Xm
<STX>w
<STX>t
<STX>Q
<STX>J
<SOH>B
<STX>p
G
<STX>G
Pa
<STX>Tstring
<STX>T
<STX>Ennnn
Qnnnn
<STX>Sa
rname
<STX>r
U
<SOH>#
<STX>Kr
<STX>Rx
Rnnnn
<STX>k
<STX>imtaabbb...bcrxxxxxxxxfff...f
<STX>Y
Sa
<SOH>A
<SOH>F
smname
<STX>ySaa
ySaa
E
X
<STX>B
<STX>AwMMddyearhhmmjjj
<SOH>U
z
Table M-1: Commands (M-Z)
246
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
Appendix N
Class Series DPL Constraint Cross-Reference
Note:
Throughout the tables below, the following standards are used:
X = Supported Command
ND = Non-Display
<SOH> Constraints
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
A-Class
W-Class
I-Class
X
M-Class
H-Class,
M1, & M2
X
M-Class
(ND)
E-Class
Printer
#
Reset
X
*
Reset
X
A
Send ASCII Status String
X
B
Toggle Pause
C
Stop/Cancel
D
SOH Shutdown
E
Send Batch Quantity
X
X
X
X
F
Send Status Byte
X
X
X
U
Update System Database with Current
Database
X
X
X
Command
Description
X
X
Table N-1: <SOH> Constraints
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
247
Appendix N – DPL Constraint Cross Reference
<STX> Constraints
A-Class
E-Class
H-Class,
M1, & M2
I-Class
M-Class
(ND)
M-Class
W-Class
Printer
A
Set Time and Date
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
a
Enable Feedback Characters
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
B
Get Printer Time and Date Info
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
b
Set Cutter signal time
C
Copy Module
c
Set Continuous Paper Length
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
D
Memory Dump
d
Set Printer to Double Buffer Mode
E
Set Quantity for Stored Label
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
e
Select Edge Sensor
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
F
Form Feed
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
f
Set Form Stop Position
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
G
Print Last Label Format
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
g
Internal Batch Software Mode
H
Set Cutter Signal Time
I
Input Graphics Data
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
i
Download Scalable Font
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
J
Set Pause
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
k
Test RS-232 Port
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
L
Enter Label Formatting Mode
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
M
Set Maximum Label Length
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
m
Set Printer to Metric
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
N
Enter Internal Batch
n
Set Printer to Inches
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
O
Set Start of Print Position
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
o
Cycle Cutter
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
P
Enter Character Dump Mode
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Command
Description
X
X
Table N-2: <STX> Constraints
248
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
Appendix N – DPL Constraint Cross Reference
A-Class
E-Class
H-Class,
M1, & M2
I-Class
M-Class
(ND)
M-Class
W-Class
Printer
p
Controlled Pause
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Q
Clear All Modules
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
q
Clear Module
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
R
Ribbon Saver
X
r
Select Reflective Sensor
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
S
Set Feed Rate
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
s
Set Printer to Single Buffer Mode
T
Print head Dot Pattern Test Label
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
t
Test DRAM Memory Module
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
U
Label Format Field Replacement
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
V
Software Switch Settings
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
V
Firmware Version Information
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
W
Request Module Information
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
W
Test FLASH Memory Module
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Set Default Module
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Delete Module File
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Y
Output Sensor Values
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Y
Select Font Symbol Set
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Z
Print Configuration and Dot Pattern
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
z
Pack Module
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Command
Description
X
X
X
Table N-2: <STX> Constraints (continued)
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
249
Appendix N – DPL Constraint Cross Reference
Extended System-Level Command Constraints
W-Class
Get Configuration
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Kc
Set Configuration
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
KD
Database Configuration
Kd
Set File as Factory Defaults
X
X
X
KE
Character Encoding
X
KF
Select Factory Defaults
Kf
X
M-Class
(ND)
KC
I-Class
Backfeed Time Delay
Description
E-Class
Kb
Command
A-Class
M-Class
H-Class,
M1, & M2
Printer
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Set Present Distance
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
KI
GPIO Input
X
X
X
KM
Memory Configuration, Internal Module
KO
GPIO Output
X
KQ
Query Memory Configuration
X
Kq
Query Memory Configuration
(new format)
X
KP
Module Protection
X
KR
Reset Memory Configuration
Kr
Reset Internal Counters
KS
Memory Configuration, Scalable Font
Cache
KV
Verifier Enable/Disable
KW
Memory Configuration, Printable Label
Width
Kx
Delete Configuration File
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Table N-3: Extended System-Level Command Constraints
250
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
Appendix N – DPL Constraint Cross Reference
Label Formatting Command Constraints
M-Class
(ND)
M-Class
W-Class
- (<)
Make Last Field Entered Increment
Numeric (Alphanumeric)
Make Last Field Entered Decrement
Numeric (Alphanumeric)
I-Class
+ (>)
Set Cut by Amount
H-Class,
M1, & M2
:
Description
E-Class
Command
A-Class
Printer
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
^
Set Cut by Amount
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
A
Set Format Attribute
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
B
Bar Code Magnification
X
X
X
X
X
C
Set Column Offset Amount
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
c
Set Cut by Amount
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
D
Set Dot Size Width and Height
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
E
Terminate Label Formatting Mode and
Print Label
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
e
Recall Printer Configuration
X
X
X
X
X
F
Advanced Font Attributes
X
X
X
X
X
f
Set Present Speed
G
Place Data in Global Register
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
H
Enter Heat Setting
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
J
Justification
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
M
Select Mirror Mode
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
m
Set Metric Mode
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
n
Set Inch Mode
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
P
Set Print Speed
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
p
Set Backfeed Speed
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Q
Set Quantity of Labels to Print
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
R
Set Row Offset Amount
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
r
Recall Stored Label Format
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
S
Set Feed Speed
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
s
Store Label Format in Module
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Table N-4: Label Formatting Command Constraints
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
251
Appendix N – DPL Constraint Cross Reference
A-Class
E-Class
H-Class,
M1, & M2
I-Class
M-Class
(ND)
M-Class
W-Class
Class Printer Model
T
Set Field Data Line Terminator
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
U
Mark Previous Field as a String
Replacement Field
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
W
Wait Mode
X
Terminate Label Formatting Mode
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
y
Select Font Symbol Set
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Z
Zip Mode
z
Zero (Ø) Conversion to “O”
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
<STX>S
Recall Global Data
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
<STX>T
Print Time and Date
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Command
Description
Table N-4: Label Command Constraints (continued)
Internal Font Constraints
A-Class
E-Class
H-Class,
M1, & M2
I-Class
M-Class
(ND)
M-Class
W-Class
Class Printer Model
X [2]
X [1]
X [2]
X [2]
X [1]
X [2]
X [2]
(S00) CG Triumvirate Bold Condensed
Scalable Font. (Standard)
X
[3]
X
X
[3]
X
X
(S01) CG Triumvirate Scalable Font.
(Standard)
X
[3]
X
X
[3]
X
X
Font
Description
9
(Ann) Smooth Internal CG Triumvirate
Bitmap Font: Referencing the Font 9 to
Smooth CG Triumvirate Fonts
automatically converts to the CG
Triumvirate Scalable Font when installed.
The printed scalable font is slightly
smaller (measuring less than 1/16 inch
over three inches of print) than produced
by previous printers.
9
9
[1]
Bitmapped Fonts may or may not be used depending on installed fonts.
Scaleable Fonts are always used.
[3]
Optional.
[2]
Table N-5: Internal Font Constraints
252
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
Appendix O
Image Loading
The printer will accept four types of image files: .BMP, .IMG, .PCX and a special Datamax 7-bit ASCII
file (as defined in this section). Using the Datamax 7-bit ASCII format will require at least twice as much
data transmission time as the other formats, (see <STX>I). The Datamax ASCII image file format is
made up of a set of records with identical formats, each representing a dot row of the image; a terminator
follows the last of these records.
Dot-row record
•
•
•
•
Dot-row record
Terminator
Each dot-row record has the following format:
Syntax:
80nndd...d<CR>
Where:
nn
-
Is the number of character pairs in dd...d, represented in ASCII hex.
dd…d
-
Is dot data, character pairs, ASCII hex, 00-FF.
Duplicate records may be encoded using a repeat data record, following the data record that needs
duplicating. The repeat data record format is:
Syntax:
0000FFnn<CR>
Where:
nn
-
Is the number of duplicates, ASCII hex, 00-FF.
The terminator, last record, at the image download is: FFFF<CR>
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
253
Appendix O – Image Loading
^BqA(CR)
^BIAAFLOGO(CR)
8030FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFC00000007FFC0003FFFFC001FC0001FC0003FFFFC0018000FFC001FF8000C0003FFFFE000000FFFFE0001FFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFC00000000FFC0003FFFFC001FC0001FC0003FFFFC0018000FFC001FF800040001FFFFE0000007FFFC0001FFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFC000000003FC0001FFFFC001FC0001FC0001FFFFC0018000FFC001FF800040001FFFFE0000003FFFC0001FFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFC000000000FC0001FFFFC001FE0001FE0001FFFFC00180007FC000FF800060001FFFFE0000003FFFC0003FFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFE0000000007E0001FFFFC001FE0001FE0001FFFFC00180007FC000FFC00060000FFFFE0000001FFFC0003FFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFE0000000003E0000FFFFC001FE0000FE0000FFFFC00180007FC0007FC00020000FFFFE0000001FFF80003FFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFE0000000001E0000FFFFC001FE0000FF0000FFFFC001C0007FC0007FC00030000FFFFE0010000FFF80003FFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFE0000000000F0000FFFFC001FE0000FF0000FFFFC001C0007FC0007FC00030000FFFFE00180007FF80007FFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFE0000000000700007FFFC001FF0000FF80007FFFC001C0007FC0003FC000380007FFFE00180007FF80007FFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFF0000000000380007FFFC001FF0000FF80007FFFC001C0003FC0003FE000380007FFFE001C0003FF80007FFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFF0000000000380007FFFC001FF0000FF80007FFFC001C0003FC0003FE000380007FFFE001E0003FF80007FFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFF0000000000180003FFFC001FF00007FC0003FFFC001C0003FC0001FE0001C0003FFFE001E0001FF0000FFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFF00000000001C0003FFFC001FF00007FC0003FFFC001E0003FC0001FE0001C0003FFFE001F0000FF0000FFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFF00007C00000C0003FFFC001FF00007FE0003FFFC001E0003FC0000FF0001E0003FFFE001F0000FF0000FFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFF80007F80000E0001FFFC001FF80007FE0001FFFC001E0003FC0000FF0001E0001FFFE001F80007F0000FFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFF80007FC0000E00000000001FF80007FE00000000001E0001FC0000FF0001E00000000001FC0007F0000FFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFF80007FE0000600000000001FF80003FF00000000001E0001FC00007F0000F00000000001FC0003F0001FFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFF80003FF0000700000000001FF80003FF00000000001F0001FC00007F0000F00000000001FE0001E0001FFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFF80003FF0000700000000001FF80003FF00000000001F0001FC00007F8000F00000000001FE0001E0001FFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFFC0001FFC0003C0000000001FFE0001FFE0000000001F8000FC00000FC0007E0000000001FFE00000003FFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFFE0001FFC0001E0000000001FFE0001FFE0000000001F8000FC00000FC0007E0000000001FFF00000003FFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFFE0001FFC0001E0000000001FFE0001FFE0000000001F8000FC00000FC0007F0000000001FFF00000007FFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFFE0000FFC0001F0000000001FFE0000FFF0000000001F8000FC000007C0003F0000000001FFF80000007FFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFFE0000FFC0001F0000000001FFE0000FFF0000000001FC0007C000007E0003F0000000001FFF80000007FFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFFE0000FFE0001F0001FFC001FFE0000FFF8001FFC001FC0007C000003E0003F8000FFE001FFFC0000007FFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFFE0000FFE0000F8001FFC001FFF0000FFF8000FFC001FC0007C000003E0003F8000FFE001FFFE000000FFFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFFF0000FFE0000F8000FFC001FFF0000FFF8000FFC001FC0007C000003E0003F8000FFE001FFFE000000FFFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFFF0000FFE0000F8000FFC001FFF00007FFC000FFC001FC0007C000001F0001FC000FFE001FFFF000000FFFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFFF00007FE0000FC000FFC001FFF00007FFC0007FC001FE0007C002001F0001FC0007FE001FFFF000000FFFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFFF00007FF0000FC0007FC001FFF00007FFE0007FC001FE0003C002001F0001FE0007FE001FFFF800000FFFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFFF00007FF0000FE0007FC001FFF80007FFE0007FC001FE0003C003000F0001FE0007FE001FFFFC00001FFFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFFF80007FF00007E0007FC001FFF80007FFE0003FC001FE0003C003000F0001FE0003FE001FFFFC00001FFFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFFF80007FF00007E0003FC001FFF80003FFF0003FC001FE0003C00300078001FF0003FE001FFFFE00001FFFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFFF80003FF00007F0003FC001FFF80003FFF0003FC001FE0003C00380078000FF0003FE001FFFFE00001FFFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFFF80003FF80007F0003FC001FFF80003FFF0001FC001FF0003C00380078000FF8001FE001FFFFE00001FFFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFFF80003FF80007F0001FC001FFF80003FFF8001FC001FF0001C003C0038000FF8001FE001FFFFE00001FFFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFFFFFC0000000007FFC000001F80000000000FC000001FFF0000003FFE0000007FFC000001FFFC0003F80007FFF0000(CR)
8030FFFFFFE000000000FFFC000001F80000000000FE000001FFF8000003FFE0000007FFE000001FFFC0003FC0003FFF0000(CR)
8030FFFFFFF000000000FFFE000001F80000000000FE000001FFF8000003FFF0000007FFE000001FFFC0003FC0003FFF0000(CR)
8030FFFFFFFC00000000FFFE000001FC0000000000FE000001FFF8000003FFF0000007FFE000001FFFC0003FE0001FFF0000(CR)
8030FFFFFFFE00000000FFFE000001FC00000000007F000001FFF8000003FFF0000007FFF000001FFFC0003FE0001FFF0000(CR)
8030FFFFFFFF00000001FFFF000001FC00000000007F000001FFF8000003FFF8000007FFF000001FFF80003FF0000FFF0000(CR)
8030FFFFFFFFC0000001FFFF000001FC00000000007F000001FFF8000003FFF8000003FFF800001FFF80007FF0000FFF0000(CR)
8030FFFFFFFFE0000003FFFF800001FC00000000007F800001FFFC000003FFF8000003FFF800001FFF80007FF80007FF0000(CR)
8030FFFFFFFFF0000007FFFF800001FC00000000007F800001FFFC000003FFFC000003FFF800001FFF80007FF80007FF0000(CR)
8030FFFFFFFFF800000FFFFF800001FE00000000003FC00001FFFC000003FFFC000003FFFC00001FFF00007FFC0003FF0000(CR)
8030FFFFFFFFFE00001FFFFFC00001FE00000000003FC00001FFFC000003FFFE000003FFFC00001FFF00007FFC0003FF0000(CR)
8030FFFFFFFFFF00007FFFFFC00001FE00000000003FC00001FFFC000003FFFE000003FFFE00001FFF00007FFE0001FF0000(CR)
8030FFFFFFFFFF8003FFFFFFC00001FE00000000003FE00001FFFC000003FFFF000003FFFE00001FFF00007FFE0001FF0000(CR)
8030FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF0000(CR)
FFFF(CR)
^BL(CR)
1Y1100000000000LOGO(CR)
E(CR)
Figure O-1: Sample Datamax 7-bit ASCII File Image
Figure O-2: Sample Label
254
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
Appendix P
UPC-A and EAN-13: Variable Price/Weight Bar Codes
The EAN/UPC standard allows for an additional checksum to be generated in the middle of the bar code
based on the data. This is used when the price or weight of an item is embedded into the bar code data
(commonly used in the food industry).
For the printer to generate this checksum, a ‘V’ must be placed in the data stream in the position the
checksum is requested. If the ‘V’ is placed in the 6th position for UPC-A or the 7th position for EAN-13,
a checksum will be generated using the next five digits in the data stream. If the ‘V’ is placed in the 7th
position for UPC-A or the 8th position for EAN-13, a checksum will be generated using the next four
digits in the data stream. The checksum is generated per the EAN/UPC bar code standard.
Examples:
1B110000200020012345V01199
Prints the UPC-A bar code with the variable price checksum in the sixth position.
1B1100002000200123456V0150
Prints the UPC-A bar code with the variable price checksum in the seventh position.
1F1100002000200123456V01199
Prints the EAN-13 bar code with the variable price checksum in the seventh position.
1F11000020002001234567V0150
Prints the EAN-13 bar code with the variable price checksum in the eighth position.
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
255
Appendix P – UPC-A and EAN-13
256
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
Appendix Q
International Language Print Capability (ILPC) Programming Examples
ILPC, offered as a field upgrade or a factory installable option, allows the printing of non-English
character sets, available with European language support (CG TIMES), KANJI language support
(GOTHIC B and GOTHIC E [available on the E-Class and non-display M-Class printer models]), Chinese
language support (SIMPLIFIED GB) and Korean Hangul. All of the features are embedded in the printer
resident firmware and accessible through DPL thus eliminating excessive download time of bitmapped
characters. Using scalable technology licensed from AGFA, this firmware allows users to print smooth
characters in sizes from 4pt (1.4 mm) to 999pt (350 mm) in over 40 languages. Consult Appendix I for
code page selections. Specific details regarding which characters are supported in each option can be
obtained through Datamax Technical Support.
ILPC - CG® TIMES Option
The CG Times Option is a single-byte scalable font consisting of four typefaces in 38 Western European
languages. This option contains over 900 unique characters in each of the four typefaces from the CG
Times typeface family, Normal, Italic, Bold, and Bold Italic. Single-byte scalable fonts are selected using
a print format record (see Generating Label Formats and Appendix H for details).
Scalable CG® TIMES Font Code (‘eee’ field):
SA0 -CG TIMES
SA1 -CG TIMES ITALIC
SA2 - CG TIMES BOLD
SA3 - CG TIMES BOLD ITALIC
Sample Greek DPL file and resulting label:
<02>L<CR>
D11<CR>
ySWG<CR>
1911SA003600020P020P020(WG) Greek Characters from<CR>
1911SA003000085P020P020the internal Symbol Set,<CR>
1911SA002400085P020P020font code SA0<CR>
1911SA001500050P020P020<ca><e1><eb><f9><f3><ef><f1><df><f3><e1><f4><e5><20><d3><f5><ed>
<dd><e4><f1><e9><ef><20><CR>
1911SA001100100P020P020<f4><f9><e3><20><c5><f4><e1><df><f1><f9><e3><20><f4><e7><f2><CR>
1911SA000700140P020P020Datamax<CR>
1X1100000100020B365190005005<CR>
Q0002<CR>
E<CR>
Note:
The notation “<xx>” in this DPL file should be interpreted by the reader as representing the hexadecimal
value of the character sent to the printer.
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
257
Appendix Q – ILPC Programming Examples
Sample label created using the preceding
data:
ILPC-KANJI Option
The Kanji Option is a double byte scalable font supporting Kanji Gothic B (or Gothic E on E-Class and
non-display M-Class printers). In the double byte format, the printer recalls one character printed from
every two 8-bit bytes sent from the host. Double byte scalable fonts are selected using a print format
record (see Generating Label Formats and Appendix H for details).
eee
(Font Code)
U40
u40
UK1
uK1
u50 u5z…
u90 - u9z
U50 U5z...
U90 - U9z
Note:
258
Scalable Double-Byte Font Map - KANJI
Scalable
Binary
Hex ASCII
Font Name
Font Type
Addressing Addressing
Scalable Resident
HG-Gothic-B Kanji
√
Scalable
Scalable Resident
HG-Gothic-B Kanji
√
Scalable
Scalable Resident
HG-Gothic-E Kanji
√
Scalable
Scalable Resident
HG-Gothic-E Kanji
√
Scalable
Scalable Non-Resident User defined
√
(download)
Scalable Non-Resident
(download)
User defined
Code
Pages
EUC, JIS,
SJIS, UC
EUC, JIS,
SJIS, UC
EUC, JIS,
SJIS
EUC, JIS,
SJIS
√
Not all fonts contain an entire compliment of character codes for a given character map. Gothic E is
available only on E-Class and non-display M-Class printers.
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
Appendix Q – ILPC Programming Examples
Sample Kanji Gothic B DPL file (binary addressing) and the resulting label:
<02>L<CR>
D11<CR>
ySPM<CR>
1911S0003100010P020P015Scalable Kanji Gothic B Available<CR>
1B110000020017001234567890<CR>
yUJS<CR>
1X1100001900010b0392011000020002<CR>
112200002800030JIS CHARACTER’S IN ALL 4 ROTATION’S<CR>
112200002600030Rotation 1<CR>
1911U4002650150P012P012<4D><3F><21><21><21><21><4D><4F><21><21><21><21><4D><5F><21><21>
<21><21><4D><6F><00><00><CR>
112200002400030Rotation 2<CR>
2911U4002600150P012P012<4D><3F><00><00><CR>
2911U4002600205P012P012<4D><4F><00><00><CR>
2911U4002600250P012P012<4D><5F><00><00><CR>
2911U4002600300P012P012<4D><6F><00><00><CR>
112200002200030Rotation 3<CR>
3911U4002330315P012P012<4D><6F><21><21><21><21><4D><5F><21><21><21><21><4D><4F><21><21>
<21><21><4D><3F><00><00><CR>
112200002000030Rotation 4<CR>
4911U4001950165P012P012<4D><3F><00><00><CR>
4911U4001950215P012P012<4D><4F><00><00><CR>
4911U4001950265P012P012<4D><5F><00><00><CR>
4911U4001950315P012P012<4D><6F><00><00><CR>
1X1100001100010b0392007500020002<CR>
112200001650030SCALING JIS CHARACTER’S<CR>
1911U4001200020P010P020<21><6F><00><00><CR>
1911U4001200050P020P020<21><6F><00><00><CR>
1911U4001200080P030P020<21><6F><00><00><CR>
1911U4001200110P040P020<21><6F><00><00><CR>
1911U4001200145P040P030<21><6F><00><00><CR>
1911U4001200190P040P040<21><6F><00><00><CR>
1911U4001200250P040P050<21><6F><00><00><CR>
1911U4001200320P040P060<21><6F><00><00><CR>
112200000050010NORMAL
INVERSE<CR>
112200000050245 NORMAL
MIRROR<CR>
1911U4000250010P040P040<21><6F><00><00><CR>
1911U4000250245P040P040<4B><30><00><00><CR>
A5<CR>
1911U4000250090P040P040<21><6F><00><00><CR>
A1<CR>
M<CR>
1911U4000250390P040P040<4B><30><00><00><CR>
M<CR>
E<CR>
Note: The notation “<xx>” in this DPL file should be interpreted by the reader as representing the hexadecimal
value of the byte sent to the printer.
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
259
Appendix Q – ILPC Programming Examples
Sample Kanji Gothic E DPL file (Hex-ASCII addressing) and resulting label:
<02>L<CR>
D11<CR>
ySPM<CR>
1911S0003100010P020P015Scalable Kanji Gothic E Available<CR>
1B110000020017001234567890<CR>
yUJS<CR>
1X1100001900010b0392011000020002<CR>
112200002800030JIS CHARACTER’S IN ALL 4 ROTATION’S<CR>
112200002600030Rotation 1<CR>
1911uK102650150P012P0124D3F212121214D4F212121214D5F212121214D6F<CR>
112200002400030Rotation 2<CR>
2911uK102600150P012P0124D3F<CR>
2911uK102600205P012P0124D4F<CR>
2911uK102600250P012P0124D5F<CR>
2911uK102600300P012P0124D6F<CR>
112200002200030Rotation 3<CR>
3911uK102330315P012P0124D6F212121214D5F212121214D4F212121214D3F<CR>
112200002000030Rotation 4<CR>
4911uK101950165P012P0124D3F<CR>
4911uK101950215P012P0124D4F<CR>
4911uK101950265P012P0124D5F<CR>
4911uK101950315P012P0124D6F<CR>
1X1100001100010b0392007500020002<CR>
112200001650030SCALING JIS CHARACTER’S<CR>
1911uK101200020P010P020216F<CR>
1911uK101200050P020P020216F<CR>
1911uK101200080P030P020216F<CR>
1911uK101200110P040P020216F<CR>
1911uK101200145P040P030216F<CR>
1911uK101200190P040P040216F<CR>
1911uK101200250P040P050216F<CR>
1911uK101200320P040P060216F<CR>
112200000050010NORMAL
INVERSE<CR>
112200000050245 NORMAL
MIRROR<CR>
1911uK100250010P040P040216F<CR>
1911uK100250245P040P0404B30<CR>
A5<CR>
1911uK100250090P040P040216F<CR>
A1<CR>
M<CR>
1911uK100250390P040P0404B30<CR>
M<CR>
E<CR>
260
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
Appendix Q – ILPC Programming Examples
ILPC-CHINESE Option
The Chinese Option is a double byte scalable font supporting Simplified GB Chinese. In the double byte
format the printer recalls one character printed from every two 8-bit bytes sent from the host. Double byte
scalable fonts are selected using a print format record (see Generating Label Formats and Appendix H for
details).
DPL Big 5 Encoding Support: With the ILPC Chinese option, the printer firmware supports font files
that are encoded for the GB Character Map and the Big 5 Character Map. The resident Asian font in the
printer is encoded in the GB Character Map. To utilize the Big 5 Character Map, the user must download
a font file that is Big 5 encoded. The font file downloaded must be of a size compatible with the internal
module size available or of a size compatible with an external (plug in) module where applicable. Printing
characters from the Big 5 encoded font file is accomplished by:
1. Setting the character mapping with a System Command or Label Format Command (<STX>yUB5 or
yUB5, respectively).
2. Setting the ‘b’ field = ‘9’ and ‘eee’ field = ‘Unn’, where ‘nn’ is equal to the Font ID number selected
for the Big 5 encoded font file downloaded.
3. Selecting string data corresponding to the Big 5 Character Map.
eee
(Font Code)
UC0
uc0
U50 U5z...
U90 - U9z
u50 - u5z…
u90 - u9z
U50 U5z...
U90 - U9z
u50 - u5z…
u90 - u9z
Scalable Double-Byte Font Map - CHINESE
Scalable
Font
Binary
Font Type
Name
Addressing
Scalable Resident
Simplified
√
GB Chinese
Scalable Resident
Simplified
GB Chinese
Scalable Non-Resident (download) Big 5
√
Scalable Non-Resident (download) User defined
√
GB
B5
√
Scalable Non-Resident (download) Big 5
Scalable Non-Resident (download) User defined
Hex ASCII Code
Addressing Pages
GB
√
B5
–
√
–
Sample Simplified GB Chinese DPL file (binary addressing) and resulting label:
<02>L<CR>
D11<CR>
ySPM<CR>
1911S0003100010P020P015Scalable Chinese Available in GB Character Set<CR>
1B110000020017001234567890<CR>
yUGB<CR>
1X1100001900010b0392011000020002<CR>
112200002800030GB CHARACTER’S IN ALL 4 ROTATION’S<CR>
112200002600030Rotation 1<CR>
1911UC002650150P012P012<BD><D0>A1><A1><A1><A1><BD><D1><A1><A1><A1><A1><BD><D2><A1><A1>
<A1><A1><BD><D3><00><00><CR>
112200002400030Rotation 2<CR>
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
261
Appendix Q – ILPC Programming Examples
2911UC002600150P012P012<BD><D0><00><00><CR>
2911UC002600205P012P012<BD><D1><00><00><CR>
2911UC002600250P012P012<BD><D2><00><00><CR>
2911UC002600300P012P012<BD><D3><00><00><CR>
112200002200030Rotation 3<CR>
3911UC002330315P012P012<BD><D3><A1><A1><A1><A1><BD><D2><A1><A1><A1><A1><BD><D1><A1><A1>
<A1><A1><BD><D0><00><00><CR>
112200002000030Rotation 4<CR>
4911UC001950165P012P012<BD><D0><00><00><CR>
4911UC001950215P012P012<BD><D1><00><00><CR>
4911UC001950265P012P012<BD><D2><00><00><CR>
4911UC001950315P012P012<BD><D3><00><00><CR>
1X1100001100010b0392007500020002<CR>
112200001650030SCALING GB CHARACTER’S<CR>
1911UC001200020P010P020<BA><D0><00><00><CR>
1911UC001200050P020P020<BA><D0><00><00><CR>
1911UC001200080P030P020<BA><D0><00><00><CR>
1911UC001200110P040P020<BA><D0><00><00><CR>
1911UC001200145P040P030<BA><D0><00><00><CR>
1911UC001200190P040P040<BA><D0><00><00><CR>
1911UC001200250P040P050<BA><D0><00><00><CR>
1911UC001200320P040P060<BA><D0><00><00><CR>
112200000050010NORMAL
INVERSE<CR>
112200000050245 NORMAL
MIRROR<CR>
1911UC000250010P040P040<BD><E0><00><00><CR>
1911UC000250245P040P040<BD><E1><00><00><CR>
A5<CR>
1911UC000250090P040P040<BD><E0><00><00><CR>
A1<CR>
M<CR>
1911UC000250390P040P040<BD><E1><00><00><CR>
M<CR>
E<CR>
Note: The notation “<xx>” in this DPL file should be interpreted by the reader as representing the hexadecimal
value of the byte sent to the printer.
262
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
Appendix Q – ILPC Programming Examples
ILPC-KOREAN Option
The Korean Option is a double-byte scalable font supporting Korean Hangul. In the double-byte format,
the printer recalls one character printed from every two 8-bit bytes sent from the host. Double-byte
scalable fonts are selected using a print format record (see Generating Label Formats and Appendix H for
details).
eee
(Font Code)
UH0
uh0
u50 u5z…
u90 - u9z
U50 U5z...
U90 - U9z
Scalable Double-Byte Font Map - KOREAN
Scalable
Binary
Font Name
Font Type
Addressing
Scalable Resident
Korean Hangul
√
Scalable Resident
Korean Hangul
Scalable Non-Resident
User defined
(download)
Scalable Non-Resident
(download)
User defined
Hex ASCII
Addressing
√
√
Code
Pages
UC
UC
√
Note: Not all fonts contain an entire compliment of character codes for a given character map.
Sample Korean Hangul DPL file (binary addressing) and the resulting label:
<02>L<CR>
D11<CR>
ySPM<CR>
1911S0003100010P020P015Scalable Korean Available in UC Character Set<CR>
yUUC<CR>
1B110000020017001234567890<CR>
1X1100001900010b0392011000020002<CR>
112200002800030HANGUL CHARACTER’S IN ALL 4 ROTATIONS<CR>
112200002600030Rotation 1<CR>
1911UH002620150P012P012<AC><00><00><00><CR>
1911UH002620205P012P012<AC><65><00><00><CR>
1911UH002620250P012P012<AC><69><00><00><CR>
1911UH002620300P012P012<AC><DF><00><00><CR>
112200002400030Rotation 2<CR>
2911UH002550150P012P012<AC><00><00><00><CR>
2911UH002550205P012P012<AC><65><00><00><CR>
2911UH002550250P012P012<AC><69><00><00><CR>
2911UH002550300P012P012<AC><DF><00><00><CR>
112200002200030Rotation 3<CR>
3911UH002330165P012P012<AC><00><00><00><CR>
3911UH002330220P012P012<AC><65><00><00><CR>
3911UH002330265P012P012<AC><69><00><00><CR>
3911UH002330315P012P012<AC><DF><00><00><CR>
112200002000030Rotation 4<CR>
4911UH001950165P012P012<AC><00><00><00><CR>
4911UH001950215P012P012<AC><65><00><00><CR>
4911UH001950265P012P012<AC><69><00><00><CR>
4911UH001950315P012P012<AC><DF><00><00><CR>
1X1100001100010b0392007500020002<CR>
112200001650030SCALING HANGUL CHARACTERS<CR>
1911UH001200020P010P020<AC><AC><00><00><CR>
1911UH001200050P020P020<AC><AC><00><00><CR>
1911UH001200080P030P020<AC><AC><00><00><CR>
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
263
Appendix Q – ILPC Programming Examples
1911UH001200110P040P020<AC><AC><00><00><CR>
1911UH001200145P040P030<AC><AC><00><00><CR>
1911UH001200190P040P040<AC><AC><00><00><CR>
1911UH001200250P040P050<AC><AC><00><00><CR>
1911UH001200320P040P060<AC><AC><00><00><CR>
112200000200010NORMAL
INVERSE<CR>
112200000200245 NORMAL
MIRROR<CR>
1911UH000450010P040P040<AC><4D><00><00><CR>
1911UH000450245P040P040<AC><15><00><00><CR>
A5<CR>
1911UH000450090P040P040<AC><4D><00><00><CR>
A1<CR>
M<CR>
1911UH000450390P040P040<AC><15><00><00><CR>
M<CR>
E<CR>
Note: The notation “<xx>” in this DPL file should be interpreted by the reader as representing the hexadecimal
value of the byte sent to the printer.
264
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
Appendix R
Plug and Play IDs
MFG; CMD; MDL; CLS; DES
Where:
MFG
= Datamax
CMD
= Fixed string: “DPL”
MDL
= Model: (Valid designations are A4212, A4310, A4408, A4606, A6212, A6310, E4203,
E4204, E4304, EX2, H4212, H4310 I4206, I4208, I4308, I4210, I4212, I4406, I4604, M1,
M2, M4206, M4208, M4306, W6308, W6208, and W8306.)
CLS
= Fixed string: “PRINTER”
DES
= Description (subject to change with the application [firmware] revision and printer model)
Example: Datamax 4208 Label Printer Version 06.06 07/09/2001
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
265
Appendix R – Plug and Play IDs
266
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
Appendix S
Line Mode
Line Mode allows the printer to respond to raw data from a device that may not be able to send a
complete DPL file. In Line Mode, raw data is directed into replaceable fields in formats, or templates,
stored in the printer.
The printer can be placed in Line Mode via the front panel, as explained in the printer’s Operating
Manual, or by using the <STX>KcEM command (see Extended System-Level Command Functions),
where:
<STX>KcEM0 will enter standard DPL Mode; and,
<STX>KcEM1 will enter Line Mode.
Note: A reset will follow a change of mode. While in Line Mode, the printer will also respond to DPL commands;
however, special download types (such as firmware updates) should only be sent when the printer is in
DPL mode.
Line Mode Specifics
Raw data sent to the printer must be terminated by a carriage return [0x0D].
The host timeout setting (see <STX>KcHT) will determine the maximum waiting period between
data sent. If the timeout value is reached, the label will print using the data received before
timeout occurred.
A form feed command [0x0C] may be sent to terminate processing and print the data that has
been received.
Note: E-Class and M-4206 printers also allow the Feed Key to be pressed to terminate the waiting
period and print the data.
Issuing the <STX>Ennnn command (where nnnn represents the print count), allows quantities
of the same label to be printed.
The printer must have a template program loaded. A template is a standard DPL file that ends in a
store format command, instead of the print command (E). The template name must be either
DMXFRM or DMXFRMxx. Using DMXFRMxx, allows multiple templates to be available.
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
267
Appendix S – Line Mode
Sample DMXFRM Template:
The following sample uses DMXFRM as the template name and stores it to the default module. (The default
module is printer model dependent.)
<STX>L
PG
SG
D11
15110000160001099999999999999999999999999999999999
U
151100001200010FIXED FIELD #1
15110000080001099999999999999999999999999999999999
U
151100000400010FIXED FIELD #2
15110000000001099999999999999999999999999999999999
U
Q0001
sCDMXFRM
To print a label, the attached device now only has to send the data. Sample data in this example is as
follows:
TEST DATA AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA[CR]
TEST DATA BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB[CR]
TEST DATA CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC[CR]
The sample data will print the following label (layout and font are approximations):
TEST DATA AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA
FIXED FIELD #1
TEST DATA BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB
FIXED FIELD #2
TEST DATA CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC
If multiple labels are needed, data for the labels can be sent at the same time. Sample data for two labels:
TEST
TEST
TEST
TEST
TEST
TEST
268
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA[CR]
BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB[CR]
CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC[CR]
DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD[CR]
EEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE[CR]
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF[CR]
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
Appendix S – Line Mode
The sample data will print the following two labels (layout and typeface are approximations):
Label 1:
TEST DATA AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA
FIXED FIELD #1
TEST DATA BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB
FIXED FIELD #2
TEST DATA CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC
Label 2:
TEST DATA DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD
FIXED FIELD #1
TEST DATA EEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE
FIXED FIELD #2
TEST DATA FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
Sample DMXFRMxx Template:
If a template in the form of DMXFRMxx is used, the data must be preceded by the value of xx. Below is a
sample template for DMXFRMxx:
<STX>L
PG
SG
D11
15110000160001099999999999999999999999999999999999
U
151100001200010FIXED FIELD NUMBER ONE
15110000080001099999999999999999999999999999999999
U
151100000400010FIXED FIELD NUMBER TWO
15110000000001099999999999999999999999999999999999
U
Q0001
sCDMXFRMA1
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
269
Appendix S – Line Mode
Sample data for DMXFRMxx type templates:
A1>TEST DATA AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA[CR]
A1>TEST DATA BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB[CR]
A1>TEST DATA CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC[CR]
270
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
Appendix T
RFID Overview
The printer has two different operational modes for the programming of RFID tags: Direct, and Label
Formatting.
The RFID programming data can be entered in one of two formats: ASCII, or Hexadecimal. Data in
the ASCII format is entered conventionally, while data in the hexadecimal format is entered as the
hexadecimal-pairs equivalent of the ASCII character(s). For example, to program the word “TEST” in
the ASCII format, the data is entered as TEST; alternately, in the hexadecimal format the word is
entered as 54455354. The other important consideration is the data format byte count. Compared to
the ASCII format, hexadecimal formats use twice the number of bytes. Returning to the example
above, in the ASCII format “TEST” has a byte count of four, while the hexadecimal format
equivalent has a byte count of eight.
To send information about the results of tag printing back to the host, refer to the <STX>KcOF
command for option feedback.
Direct Mode
Direct Mode allows the user (host) to directly control the reading and writing of RFID tags. This mode
contains both a generic Read / Write Interface and a high level HF / UHF Tag Interface. In Direct Mode,
each RFID tag is individually processed with status and data responses. Typically these commands are
used for diagnostics or custom applications.
Generic Read/Write Interface
The Generic Read/Write Interface allows the Host Application to send generic commands for RFID
operations by utilizing the printer’s database for specific parameters. Requiring no knowledge of the
tag types being used (except the data format), these commands consist of simple read and write
operations. See the <STX>KaR and <STX>KaW commands for details.
HF (13.56 MHz) ISO15693 Tag Interface
The ISO15693 Tag Interface allows the Host Application to perform specific operations pertaining to
HF-type (13.56 MHz) tags. Since these commands override the printer’s database by interfacing
directly to the tag module, knowledge of HF tags and their operation is required. See the <STX>KtA,
<STX>KtD, <STX>KtE, <STX>KtH, <STX>KtU, <STX>KtR, and <STX>KtW commands for details.
UHF Interface
This interface allows the Host Application to perform specific operations pertaining to UHF-type
tags. Since these commands override the printer’s database by interfacing directly to the tag module,
knowledge of UHF protocols and their operation is required. See the <STX>KuR and <STX>KuW
commands for details.
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
271
Appendix T – RFID Details
Label Formatting Mode
Label Formatting Mode utilizes the current printer configuration to process all reading, writing, and
exception processing for each tag printed. (For exception processing and fault handling, see the
<STX>KcFH command.) The specification for RFID programming is contained in the data fields of the
DPL label format, which instructs the printer to write and read data. Two Label Formatting Modes for
RFID are available. While each supports auto increment and decrement commands for numeric (+/-),
alphanumeric (>/<), or hexadecimal ((/)) data, they differ when a byte count specifier is added. Both
RFID Label Formatting commands are detailed below.
Note:
Up to six RFID operations per label are allowed.
Wx / W1x:
RFID
Syntax for RFID (spaces shown for readability):
a bbb c d eee ffff gggg jj…j
Where:
Field
Valid Inputs
Meaning
Operation to perform, where:
1 = Read (report to host)
2 = Write
3 = Write w/ Read back and Verify
a
1, 2, and 3
bbb
Wnx
c
0
Not Used, should be 0
d
0
Not Used, should be 0
RFID Hexadecimal Operation, where no ‘n’ is an implied 1.
HF:
Lock after write, where:
x = 0 – Use printer setup to determine if lock is performed.
x = 1 – Lock after write.
yy = Not Used
eee
xyy
UHF EPC Gen2:
Lock after write, where:
x = 0 – Use printer setup to determine if lock is performed.
x = 1 – Lock after write.
yy = Lock state where “01”is permalock, “10” is pwd-write
lock or “11” is both states
UHF other tag types:
Not Used, should be 000
272
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
Appendix T – RFID Details
Wx / W1x:
RFID (continued)
Field
Valid Inputs
0000 – 9998
ffff
Meaning
HF:
Starting block number to write.
UHF EPC Gen2:
Block address where “0001” is EPC data, “0002” is Tag ID or
“0003” is user memory. Using “0000” is for EPC data also (for
backwards compatibility).
UHF other tag types:
Not Used, should be 0000
HF:
Not Used, should be 0000
0000
gggg
UHF EPC Gen2:
Data word offset – currently only used for read operation
UHF other tag types:
Not Used, should be 0000
jj…j
Valid hexadecimal
pairs per character
followed by a
termination character.
Data to write to the tag.
Note: UHF data length must be 16 or 24 for EPC, 16 for Tag ID or
multiples of four for user memory sections
Example 1:
The following example encodes an HF tag , starting at block 001, with “Datamax writes RFID best”:
<STX>L
D11<CR>
2W1x0000000010000446174616D61782077726974657320524649442062657374<CR>
E
Example 2:
The following format encodes a UHF Gen2 tag with EPC data “112233445566778899AABBCC” and
user memory data “1111222233334444”.
<STX>L
D11
2W1x0000000010000112233445566778899AABBCC
2W1x00000000300001111222233334444
E
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
273
Appendix T – RFID Details
Example 3:
The following format reads a UHF Gen2 tag with data from address 1, offset 2nd word (EPC data),
Tag ID from address 2, and user data from address 3. Note that the length of the data in the record
determines how much data is read.
<STX>L
D11
1W1x0000000010002xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
1W1x0000000020000xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
1W1x0000000030000xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
E
With Option Feedback enabled, the format above would return data such as:
<R;C;03;03;0002:0001;112233445566778899AABBCC;E20060010128FF33;11112222333
34444>
Where, “112233445566778899AABBCC” is the EPC data, “E20060010128FF33” is the Tag ID and
“1111222233334444” is the user memory data. See Option Feedback Mode (<STX>KcOF) for more
information on the response format.
WX / W1X:
RFID with Byte Count Specifier
Specified Length – The upper case X identifies an RFID data string with a string 4-digit length
specifier. The length specifier allows values 0x00 through 0xFF to be included within the data
strings without conflicting with the DPL format record terminators. The four-digit decimal data byte
count immediately follows the four-digit column position field. This value includes all of the data
following the byte count field, but does not include itself.
Syntax for RFID with Byte Count Specifier (spaces shown for readability):
a bbb c d eee ffff gggg hhhh jj…j
Where:
274
Field
Valid Inputs
Meaning
Operation to perform, where:
1 = Read (report to host)
2 = Write
3 = Write / Verify
a
1, 2, and 3
bbb
Wnx
c
0
Not Used, should be 0
d
0
Not Used, should be 0
RFID Hexadecimal Operation, where no ‘n’ is an implied 1.
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
Appendix T – RFID Details
WX / W1X: RFID with Byte Count Specifier (continued)
Field
Valid Inputs
Meaning
HF:
Lock after write, where:
x = 0 – Use printer setup to determine if lock is performed.
x = 1 – Lock after write.
yy = Not Used
eee
xyy
UHF EPC Gen2:
Lock after write, where:
x = 0 – Use printer setup to determine if lock is performed.
x = 1 – Lock after write.
yy = Lock state where “01”is for permalock, “10” for pwdwrite lock or “11” for both states
UHF other tag types:
Not Used, should be 000
HF:
Starting block number to write.
ffff
0000 – 9998
UHF EPC Gen2:
Block address where “0001” is EPC data, “0002” is Tag ID or
“0003” is user memory. Using “0000” is for EPC data also (for
backwards compatibility).
UHF other tag types:
Not Used, should be 0000
HF:
Not Used, should be 0000
gggg
0000
UHF EPC Gen2:
Data word offset – currently only used for read operation
UHF other tag types:
Not Used, should be 0000
hhhh
Number of bytes to follow (to include all bytes that follow until
Four-digit decimal data the end of the data).
byte count.
Note: UHF: Data length must be 8 or 12 for EPC, 8 for Tag ID or
multiples of 2 for user memory sections
jj…j
Valid ASCII character
string followed by a
termination character.
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
Data to write to the tag.
Note: UHF: Data length must be 8 or 12 for EPC, 8 for Tag ID or
multiples of 2 for user memory sections
275
Appendix T – RFID Details
Example1:
The following example encodes a HF tag, starting at block 001, with “Datamax <CR> writes RFID
best.” It includes a Byte Count Specifier (the portion in bold), where 0024 equals a four-digit decimal
data byte count and includes all bytes that follow until the end of the data. Field termination is set by
the byte count.
<STX>L
D11<CR>
2W1X00000000100000024Datamax<CR>
writes RFID best<CR>
E
Example 2:
The following format encodes a tag with EPC data “1122334455667788” with byte count shown in
bold. Note that the field data is entered as the hex value for the ASCII character.
<STX>L
D11
2W1x00000000000000008<0x11><0x22><0x33><0x44><0x55><0x66><0x77><0x88>
E
GEN2 Kill/Access Passwords
Gen2 tags are capable of storing a 4-byte kill password and a 4-byte access password. The kill password
is stored at address 0, word offset 0 and access password is stored at address 0, word offset 2. The default
for these passwords is typically 0.
To write these to the tag it is necessary to store the desired password value in the printer database:
•
To write the database for the kill password the command is <STX>KcRIKnnnnnnnn, where
nnnnnnnn represents the 4-byte value in hexadecimal pairs; and,
•
To write the database for the access password the command is <STX>KcRICnnnnnnnn, where
nnnnnnnn represents the 4-byte value in hexadecimal pairs.
These can also be viewed or modified on the printer’s display under RFID OPTIONS / UHF SETTINGS.
If the stored value for either or both of these passwords is non-zero and a label formatting command to
write EPC data is issued, then these passwords will be written also.
GEN2 Lock States
Gen2 supports a lock state of permalock, pwd-lock or both for any of the data sections of the tag. This
includes access/kill passwords, EPC data, Tag ID or user memory. To store these states in the printer
database the command is <STX>KcRIGn, where: 1 is permalock; 2 is pwd-lock; 3 is both; and, 0 is
none (default). When a section of the tag is written via label formatting command and the stored lock
state and lock after write are enabled, the section will be locked.
276
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
Appendix U
WiFi Region Country Codes
Region Country Codes
Code
Country
Code
Afghanistan
GH
Åland Islands
GI
Albania
GR
DZ
Algeria
AS
Country
Code
Country
Ghana
PK
Pakistan
Gibraltar
PW
Palau
Greece
PS
Palestinian Territory
GL
Greenland
PA
Panama
American Samoa
GD
Grenada
PG
Papua New Guinea
AD
Andorra
GP
Guadeloupe
PY
Paraguay
AO
Angola
GU
Guam
PE
Peru
AI
Anguilla
GT
Guatemala
PH
Philippines
AQ
Antarctica
GN
Guinea
PN
Pitcairn
AG
Antigua and Barbuda
GW
Guinea-Bissau
PL
Poland
AR
Argentina
GY
Guyana
PT
Portugal
AM
Armenia
HT
Haiti
PR
Puerto Rico
AW
Aruba
HM
Heard Island and McDonald
Islands
QA
Qatar
AU
Australia
VA
Holy See (Vatican City State)
RE
Réunion
AT
Austria
HN
Honduras
RO
Romania
AZ
Azerbaijan
HK
Hong Kong
RU
Russian Federation
BS
Bahamas
HU
Hungary
RW
Rwanda
BH
Bahrain
IS
Iceland
SH
Saint Helena
BD
Bangladesh
IN
India
KN
Saint Kitts and Nevis
BB
Barbados
ID
Indonesia
LC
Saint Lucia
BY
Belarus
IR
Iran, Islamic Republic of
PM
Saint Pierre and Miquelon
BE
Belgium
IQ
Iraq
VC
Saint Vincent and the Grenadines
BZ
Belize
IE
Ireland
WS
Samoa
BJ
Benin
IL
Israel
SM
San Marino
BM
Bermuda
IT
Italy
ST
Sao Tome and Principe
BT
Bhutan
JM
Jamaica
SA
Saudi Arabia
BO
Bolivia
JP
Japan
SN
Senegal
AF
AX
AL
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
277
Appendix U – WiFi Region Country Codes
WiFi Region Country Codes (continued)
Code
Country
Code
Country
Code
Country
BA
Bosnia and Herzegovina
JO
Jordan
CS
Serbia and Montenegro
BW
Botswana
KZ
Kazakhstan
SC
Seychelles
BV
Bouvet Island
KE
Kenya
SL
Sierra Leone
BR
Brazil
KI
Kiribati
SG
Singapore
IO
British Indian Ocean
Territory
KP
Korea, Democratic People's
Republic of
SK
Slovakia
BN
Brunei Darussalam
KR
Korea, Republic of
SI
Slovenia
BG
Bulgaria
KW
Kuwait
SB
Solomon Islands
BF
Burkina Faso
KG
Kyrgyzstan
SO
Somalia
BI
Burundi
LA
Lao People's Democratic
Republic
ZA
South Africa
KH
Cambodia
LV
Latvia
GS
South Georgia and the South
Sandwich Islands
CM
Cameroon
LB
Lebanon
ES
Spain
CA
Canada
LS
Lesotho
LK
Sri Lanka
CV
Cape Verde
LR
Liberia
SD
Sudan
KY
Cayman Islands
LY
Libyan Arab Jamahiriya
SR
Suriname
CF
Central African Republic
LI
Liechtenstein
SJ
Svalbard and Jan Mayen
TD
Chad
LT
Lithuania
SZ
Swaziland
CL
Chile
LU
Luxembourg
SE
Sweden
CN
China
MO
Macao
CH
Switzerland
CX
Christmas Island
MK
Macedonia
SY
Syrian Arab Republic
CC
Cocos (Keeling) Islands
MG
Madagascar
TW
Taiwan (Republic of China)
CO
Colombia
MW
Malawi
TJ
Tajikistan
KM
Comoros
MY
Malaysia
TZ
Tanzania, United Republic of
CG
Congo
MV
Maldives
TH
Thailand
CD
Congo, The Democratic
Republic of the
ML
Mali
TL
Timor
CK
Cook Islands
MT
Malta
TG
Togo
CR
Costa Rica
MH
Marshall Islands
TK
Tokelau
CI
Côte d'Ivoire
MQ
Martinique
TO
Tonga
HR
Croatia
MR
Mauritania
TT
Trinidad and Tobago
CU
Cuba
MU
Mauritius
TN
Tunisia
CY
Cyprus
YT
Mayotte
TR
Turkey
CZ
Czech Republic
MX
Mexico
TM
Turkmenistan
278
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
Appendix U – WiFi Region Country Codes
WiFi Region Country Codes (continued)
Code
Country
Code
Country
Code
Country
DK
Denmark
FM
Micronesia, Federated States of
TC
Turks and Caicos Islands
DJ
Djibout
MD
Moldova, Republic of
TV
Tuvalu
DM
Dominica
MC
Monaco
UG
Uganda
DO
Dominican Republic
MN
Mongolia
UA
Ukraine
EC
Ecuador
MS
Montserrat
AE
United Arab Emirates
EG
Egypt
MA
Morocco
GB
United Kingdom
SV
El Salvador
MZ
Mozambique
US
United States
GQ
Equatorial Guinea
MM
Myanmar
UM
United States Minor Outlying
Islands
ER
Eritrea
NA
Namibia
UY
Uruguay
EE
Estonia
NR
Nauru
UZ
Uzbekistan
ET
Ethiopia
NP
Nepal
VU
Vanuatu
FK
Falkland Islands
(Malvinas)
NL
Netherlands
FO
Faroe Islands
AN
Netherlands Antilles
VE
Venezuela
FJ
Fiji
NC
New Caledonia
VN
Viet Nam
FI
Finland
NZ
New Zealand
VG
Virgin Islands, British
FR
France
NI
Nicaragua
VI
Virgin Islands, U.S.
GF
French Guiana
NE
Niger
WF
Wallis and Futuna
PF
French Polynesia
NG
Nigeria
EH
Western Sahara
TF
French Southern
Territories
NU
Niue
YE
Yemen
GA
Gabon
NF
Norfolk Island
GM
Gambia
MP
Northern Mariana Islands
ZM
Zambia
GE
Georgia
NO
Norway
ZW
Zimbabwe
DE
Germany
OM
Oman
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
Vatican City State - see Holy See
Zaire - see Congo, The
Democratic Republic of the
279
Appendix U – WiFi Region Country Codes
280
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
Appendix V
Bar Code Symbology Information Resources
American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
1819 L Street, NW
Washington, DC 20036 USA
Phone: 202-293-8020
Fax: 202-293-9287
http://www.ansi.org/
Association for Automatic Identification and Mobility, Inc.
125 Warrendale-Bayne Road
Warrendale, PA 15086 USA
Phone: 724-934-4470
Fax: 724-934-4495
http://www.aimglobal.org/
Automotive Industry Action Group
26200 Lahser Rd., Suite 200
Southfield, MI 48034-7100 USA
Phone: 248-358-3570
Fax: 248-358-3253
http://www.aiag.org/
Computing Technology Industry Association
1815 S. Meyers Road, Suite 300
Oakbrook Terrace, IL 60181-5228 USA
Phone: 630-678-8300
Fax: 630-268-1384
http://www.comptia.org/
GS1 (International Article Numbering Association)
Blue Tower
Avenue Louise 326 - Bte 10
1050 Brussels - Belgium
Phone: 32(0)2-788 78 00
Fax: 32(0)2-788 78 99
http://www.gs1.org/
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
281
Appendix V – Bar Code Symbology Information Resources
Health Industry Business Communications Council (HIBCC)
2525 E Arizona Biltmore Circle, Suite 127
Phoenix, Arizona 85016 USA
Phone: 602-381-1091
Fax: 602-381-1093
http://www.hibcc.org/
Uniform Code Council, Inc.
7887 Washington Village Drive, Suite 300
Dayton, OH 45459 USA
Phone: 937-435-3870
Fax: 937-435-7317
http://www.uc-council.org/
U.S. Government Printing Office
732 North Capitol St. NW
Washington, DC 20401 USA
Phone: 202.512.0000
Fax: 202-512-1293
http://www.gpo.gov/
282
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
Glossary
alphanumeric Consisting of alphabetic, numeric, punctuation and other symbols.
backing material The silicon-coated paper carrier material to which labels with adhesive backing are
affixed. Also referred to as “liner”.
bar code A representation of alphanumeric information in a pattern of machine-readable marks. The
basic categories are divided into one-dimensional (UPC, Code 39, Postnet, etc.) and twodimensional bar codes (Data Matrix, MaxiCode, PDF417, etc.).
boot loader The resident program that loads the application from Flash memory, decompresses it into
the DRAM, and starts operations.
burn line The row of thermal elements in the print head.
calibration The process through which Media Sensor readings are entered into the printer for correct
sensor function (for example, detection of a given media type) and top of form positioning.
character set The entire complement of alphanumeric symbols contained in a given font.
checksum An alphanumeric error detection method used in many bar code symbologies for
informational security.
continuous media An uninterrupted roll or box of label or tag stock media that contains no gap, slit,
notch, or black mark to separate individual labels or tags.
cutter A mechanical device with a rotary or guillotine type blade used to cut labels or tags following
printing.
defaults The functional setting values returned following a factory reset of the printer.
diagnostics Programs used to locate and diagnose hardware problems.
die-cut media Media that has been cut into a pattern using a press, where the excess paper is removed
leaving individual labels, with gaps between them, attached to a backing material.
direct thermal The printing method that uses a heat sensitive media and only the heat of the thermal
print head to create an image on the label.
direct thermal media Media coated with special chemicals that react and darken with the application of
heat.
DPI (dots per inch) A measurement of print resolution, rated in the number of thermal elements
contained in one inch of the print head. Also referred to as “resolution.”
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
283
Glossary
DPL (Datamax Programming Language) programming commands used specifically for control of
and label production in Datamax printers.
fan-fold Media that is folded and stacked.
feed speed The rate at which the media moves under the print head in non-printed areas or when the
FEED Key is pressed.
Flash memory Non-volatile memory (does not require printer power to maintain data) that can be
erased and reprogrammed, used to hold the printer’s operating program.
font A set of alphanumeric characters that share a particular typeface.
gap A space between die-cut or notched labels used to sense the top-of-form.
IPS (inches per second) Imperial measurement of printer speeds.
label A paper or synthetic printing material, typically with a pressure sensitive adhesive backing.
label length The distance from the top of the label to the bottom of the label as it exits the printer.
label repeat The distance from the top of one label to the top of the next label.
label tracking Excessive lateral (side to side) movement of the media as it travels under the print head.
label width The left to right measurement of the label as it exits the printer.
media Generalized term for all types of printing stocks, including: roll fed, continuous, butt-cut, die-cut,
reflective, and fanfold.
media hub Device in the printer used to support roll media.
media sensor An electronic device equipped with photosensors to detect media and the top-of-form on
die-cut, notched or reflective media.
MMPS (millimeters per second) Metric measurement of printer speeds.
notched stock Media, typically tag stock, with holes or notches in the material that is used to signal the
top-of-form. The printer must be set to ‘gap’ to use this media type.
perforation Small cuts extending through the backing and/or label material to facilitate their separation.
Also referred to as “perf”.
preprinted media Label stock that contains borders, text, or graphics, floodcoating, etc.
present sensor An electronic sensor that provides a signal to the printer firmware that a label is present,
typically located beyond the print head, where the labels exits the printer.
print speed The rate at which the media moves under the print head during the printing process.
284
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
Glossary
reflective media Media imprinted with carbon-based black marks on the underside of the material,
which is used to signal the top-of-form when the ‘reflective’ Media Sensor is enabled.
registration Repeatable top to bottom alignment of printed labels.
reverse speed The backward rate of media motion into the printer during tear-off, peel and present and
cutting operations for positioning the label at the start of print position.
ribbon An extruded polyester tape with several layers of material, one of which is ink-like, used to
produce an image on the label. Also referred to as “foil”.
roll media A form of media that is wound upon a cardboard core.
slew The moving of media using the GPIO function.
start of print The position on the label where the printing actually begins.
tag stock A heavy paper or synthetic printing material, typically featuring a notch or black mark for top
of form and no adhesive backing.
thermal transfer The printing method that creates an image by transferring ink from a ribbon onto the
media using the heat from the thermal print head.
TOF (top-of-form) The start of a new label as indicated by a label gap, notch, mark or programming.
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
285
Glossary
286
Class Series Programmer’s Manual
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement